Home

SMC SMC8150L2 UK network switch

1. Command Function Mode Page spanning tree Enables the spanning tree protocol GC 4 145 spanning tree mode Configures STP RSTP or MSTP mode GC 4 145 spanning tree forward time Configures the spanning tree bridge forward time GC 4 146 spanning tree hello time Configures the spanning tree bridge hello time GC 4 147 spanning tree max age Configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age GC 4 147 spanning tree priority Configures the spanning tree bridge priority GC 4 148 spanning tree Configures the path cost method for RSTP MSTP GC 4 149 path cost method spanning tree Configures the transmission limit for RSTP MSTP GC 4 150 transmission limit spanning tree Changes to MSTP configuration mode GC 4 150 mst configuration mst vlan Adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance MST 4 151 mst priority Configures the priority of a spanning tree instance MST 4 151 name Configures the name for the multiple spanning tree MST 4 152 revision Configures the revision number for the multiple spanning MST 4 153 tree max hops Configures the maximum number of hops allowed in the MST 4 153 region before a BPDU is discarded spanning tree Disables spanning tree for an interface C 4 154 spanning disabled spanning tree cost Configures the spanning tree path cost of an interface 0 4 154 spanning tree port priority Configures the spanning tree priority of an interface 03 4 155 spanning tree edge port Enables fast forwarding for e
2. 3 187 3 Configuring the Switch DHCP Snooping VLAN Configuration Enables DHCP snooping on the specified VLAN Command Attributes e VLAN ID ID of a configured VLAN Range 1 4094 DHCP Snooping Status Enables or disables DHCP snooping for the selected VLAN When DHCP snooping is enabled globally on the switch and enabled on the specified VLAN DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN Web Click DHCP Snooping VLAN Configuration DHCP Snooping VLAN Configuration VLAN ID 1 he DHCP Snooping Status V Enabled Figure 3 115 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configuration CLI This example first enables DHCP Snooping for VLAN 1 Console config ip dhcp snooping vlan 1 4 233 Console config DHCP Snooping Information Option Configuration DHCP provides a relay mechanism for sending information about the switch and its DHCP clients to the DHCP server Known as DHCP Option 82 it allows compatible DHCP servers to use the information when assigning IP addresses or to set other services or policies for clients When the DHCP Snooping Information Option is enabled clients can be identified by the switch port to which they are connected rather than just their MAC address DHCP client server exchange messages are then forwarded directly between the server and client without having to flood them to the entire VLAN In some cases the switch may receive DHCP pac
3. Figure 3 16 Displaying Logs error number 1 Information System coldStart notification error number 1 Information Unit 1 Port 5 link up notfication k down notification down nobticabon ange notification notfication 3 25 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example shows the event message stored in RAM Console show log ram 4 47 1 00 00 27 2001 01 01 VLAN 1 link up notification level 6 module 5 function 1 and event no 1 0 00 00 25 2001 01 01 System coldStart notification level 6 module 5 function 1 and event no 1 Console System Log Configuration The system allows you to enable or disable event logging and specify which levels are logged to RAM or flash memory Severe error messages that are logged to flash memory are permanently stored in the switch to assist in troubleshooting network problems Up to 4096 log entries can be stored in the flash memory with the oldest entries being overwritten first when the available log memory 256 kilobytes has been exceeded The System Logs page allows you to configure and limit system messages that are logged to flash or RAM memory The default is for event levels 0 to 3 to be logged to flash and levels 0 to 6 to be logged to RAM Command Attributes e System Log Status Enables disables the logging of debug or error messages to the logging process Default Enabled Flash Level Limits log messages saved to
4. Confirm Password admin Privileged guest Normal Change Password User Name New Password Po Confirm Password DO O i Change Figure 3 33 Access Levels CLI Assign a user name to access level 15 i e administrator then specify the password Console config username bob access level 15 4 25 Console config username bob password 0 smith Console config 3 47 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication Use the Authentication Settings menu to restrict management access based on specified user names and passwords You can manually configure access rights on the switch or you can use a remote access authentication server based on RADIUS or TACACS protocols Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS and Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TACACS are logon Telnet authentication protocols that use software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware or RADIUS TACACS aware devices on the La ai network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the switch RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to
5. 3 184 Configuring Domain Name Service 3 Displaying the DNS Cache You can display entries in the DNS cache that have been learned via the designated name servers Field Attributes No The entry number for each resource record Flag The flag is always 4 indicating a cache entry and therefore unreliable Type This field includes CNAME which specifies the canonical or primary name for the owner and ALIAS which specifies multiple domain names which are mapped to the same IP address as an existing entry IP The IP address associated with this record TTL The time to live reported by the name server Domain The domain name associated with this record Web Select DNS Cache Cache No Flag Type IP Domain 4 CNAME 207 456 134 222 www m crosoft akadns net CNAME 207 465 134 190 www microsoft akadns net CNAME 207 46 134 155 www microsoft akadns net CNAME 207 46 249 222 www microsoft akadns net CNAME 207 46 249 27 www mecrosoft akadns net ALIAS POINTER TO 4 www microsoft com CNAME 207 46 68 27 msn cor tw AUAS POINTER TO6 www msn com tw CNAME 65 54 131 192 passportimages com ALIAS POINTER TOS Www passporlimages com CNAME 165 193 72 190 global msads net 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Figure 3 113 DNS Cache 3 185 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example displays all the resource records learned from the designated name servers Console show dns cache 4 2
6. The client authenticates the server using the server s digital certificate The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5 x or above and Netscape Navigator 6 2 or above The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS Table 3 5 HTTPS System Support Web Browser Operating System Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Netscape Navigator 6 2 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Solaris 2 6 To specify a secure site certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 53 Command Attributes HTTPS Status Allows you to enable disable the HTTPS server feature on the switch Default Enabled Change HTTPS Port Number Specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS connection to the switch s web interface Default Port 443 Web Click Security HTTPS Settings Enable HTTPS and specify the port number t hen click Apply HTTPS Settings HTTPS Status 7 Enabled Change HTTPS Port Number 1 3 65535 Figure 3 35 HTTPS Settings 3 52 User Authentication 3
7. Configures IP address es for the Telnet group IP Filter List IP address which are allowed management access to this interface Start IP Address A single IP address or the starting address of a range End IP Address The end address of a range Add Remove Filtering Entry Adds removes an IP address from the list Web Click Security IP Filter Enter the IP addresses or range of addresses that are allowed management access to an interface and click Add Web IP Filtering Entry to update the filter list IP Filter Web IP Filter Wed IP F iter List Stat IP D Adcress End IP Address Add Web IP Filtering Entry Remove Web IP Fitenng Entry Figure 3 48 Creating an IP Filter List 3 75 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example allows SNMP access for a specific client Console config management snmp client 10 1 2 3 4 27 Console config end Console show management all client Management IP Filter HTTP Client Start IP address End IP address SNMP Client Start IP address End IP address TELNET Client Start IP address End IP address Console Port Configuration Displaying Connection Status You can use the Port Information or Trunk Information pages to display the current connection status including link state speed duplex mode flow control and auto negotiation Field Attributes Web e Name Interface label Type Indicates the port type 1OOBASE TX 1000
8. The interface can be added to a VLAN as an untagged member regardless of connected devices to this interface The default setting is untagged VLAN 1 Note that each port can only have one untagged VLAN If a second VLAN is defined for a port as untagged the other VLAN that had untagged status will automatically be changed to tagged Setting a VLAN untagged will also change the native VLAN of the port to this VLAN Ifa VLAN on the forbidden list for an interface is manually added to that interface the VLAN is automatically removed from the forbidden list for that interface 4 173 4 Command Line Interface Example The following example shows how to add VLANs 1 2 5 and 6 to the allowed list as tagged VLANs for port 1 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 1 2 5 6 tagged Console config if switchport forbidden vlan This command configures forbidden VLANs Use the no form to remove the list of forbidden VLANs Syntax switchport forbidden vlan add vian list remove vian list no switchport forbidden vlan add vian list List of VLAN identifiers to add remove vian list List of VLAN identifiers to remove e vian list Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs Do not enter leading zeros Range 1 4094 Default Setting No VLANs are included in the forbidden list Command Mode I
9. full duplex 1000 trunk 500 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command is used by the Spanning Tree Algorithm to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority When the spanning tree pathcost method page 4 149 is set to short the maximum value for path cost is 65 535 Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree cost 50 Console config if spanning tree port priority This command configures the priority for the specified interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree port priority priority no spanning tree port priority priority The priority for a port Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Default Setting 128 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority that is lowest value will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console c
10. Console config snmp server host 192 168 1 19 private version 2c 4 104 Console config snmp server enable traps 4 106 Enabling SNMP Agent Status Enables SNMPv3 service for all management clients i e versions 1 2c 3 Command Attributes SNMP Agent Status Check the box to enable or disable the SNMP Agent Web Click SNMP Agent Status m ISOS SNMP Agent Status Snmp Agent Status Enabled Figure 3 26 Enabling SNMP Agent Status 3 35 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access To configure SNMPv3 management access to the switch follow these steps 1 If you want to change the default engine ID it must be changed first before configuring other parameters 2 Specify read and write access views for the switch MIB tree 3 Configure SNMP user groups with the required security model i e SNMP v1 v2c or v3 and security level i e authentication and privacy 4 Assign SNMP users to groups along with their specific authentication and privacy passwords Setting the Local Engine ID An SNMPV3 engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides on the switch This engine protects against message replay delay and redirection The engine ID is also used in combination with user passwords to generate the security keys for authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets A local engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the switch This is referred to as the defa
11. Phn 949 679 8000 www smc com
12. Setting an IP Address on page 2 4 2 Setuser names and passwords using an out of band serial connection Access to the web agent is controlled by the same user names and passwords as the onboard configuration program See Setting Passwords on page 2 4 3 After you enter a user name and password you will have access to the system configuration program Notes 1 You are allowed three attempts to enter the correct password on the third failed attempt the current connection is terminated 2 If you log into the web interface as guest Normal Exec level you can view the configuration settings or change the guest password If you log in as admin Privileged Exec level you can change the settings on any page 3 If the path between your management station and this switch does not pass through any device that uses the Spanning Tree Algorithm then you can set the switch port attached to your management station to fast forwarding i e enable Admin Edge Port to improve the switch s response time to management commands issued through the web interface See Configuring Interface Settings on page 3 114 3 Configuring the Switch Navigating the Web Browser Interface To access the web browser interface you must first enter a user name and password The administrator has Read Write access to all configuration parameters and statistics The default user name and password for the administrator is admin Home
13. Syntax no dot1q tunnel system tunnel control 4 176 VLAN Commands 4 Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage QinQ tunnel mode must be enabled on the switch for QinQ interface settings to be functional Example Console config dotlq tunnel system tunnel control Console config Related Commands show dottq tunnel 4 178 show interfaces switchport 4 125 switchport dot1q tunnel mode This command configures an interface as a QinQ tunnel port Use the no form to disable QinQ on the interface Syntax switchport dot1q tunnel mode lt access uplink gt no switchport dot1q tunnel mode access Sets the port as an 802 1Q tunnel access port uplink Sets the port as an 802 1Q tunnel uplink port Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Use the dot1q tunnel system tunnel control command to set the switch to QinQ mode before entering this command Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport dotlq tunnel mode access Console config if Related Commands show dot1q tunnel 4 178 show interfaces switchport 4 125 4 177 4 Command Line Interface switchport dot1q tunnel tpid This command sets the Tag Protocol Identifier TPID value of a tunnel port Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax switchport dot1q t
14. XV Tables Table 4 27 Table 4 28 Table 4 29 Table 4 30 Table 4 31 Table 4 32 Table 4 33 Table 4 34 Table 4 35 Table 4 36 Table 4 37 Table 4 38 Table 4 39 Table 4 40 Table 4 41 Table 4 42 Table 4 43 Table 4 44 Table 4 45 Table 4 46 Table 4 47 Table 4 48 Table 4 49 Table 4 50 Table 4 51 Table 4 52 Table 4 53 Table 4 54 Table 4 55 Table 4 56 Table 4 57 Table 4 58 Table 4 58 Table 4 58 Table 4 58 Table 4 59 Table 4 60 Table 4 61 Table 4 62 Table 4 63 Table 4 64 Table 4 65 Table 4 66 Table 4 67 Table 4 68 xvi Authentication Commands Authentication Sequence RADIUS Client Commands TACACS Commands Port Security Commands 802 1X Port Authentication Access Control Lists IP ACLs MAC ACL Commands ACL Information SNMP Commands show snmp engine id display description show snmp view display description show snmp group display description show snmp user display description Interface Commands Interfaces Switchport Statistics Mirror Port Commands Rate Limit Commands Link Aggregation Commands show lacp counters display description show lacp internal display description show lacp neighbors display description show lacp sysid display description Address Table Commands Spanning Tree Commands VLANs GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands Editing VLAN Groups Configuring VLAN Interfaces Show VLAN Commands Command Function Mode Page Private VLAN Commands Protocol based VL
15. Console config tacacs server key green Console config show tacacs server This command displays the current settings for the TACACS server Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show tacacs server Remote TACACS server configuration Server IP address 10 11 12 13 Communication key with TACACS server Server port number 49 Console 4 78 Authentication Commands 4 Port Security Commands These commands can be used to enable port security on a port When using port security the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table for this port will be authorized to access the network The port will drop any incoming frames with a source MAC address that is unknown or has been previously learned from another port If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message Table 4 31 Port Security Commands Command Function Mode Page port security Configures a secure port IC 4 79 mac address table static Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN GC 4 140 show mac address table Displays entries in the bridge forwarding database PE 4 141 po
16. Interface Indicates a port or trunk e MAC Address Physical address associated with this interface e VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 Address Table Sort Key You can sort the information displayed based on MAC address VLAN or interface port or trunk Dynamic Address Counts The number of addresses dynamically learned Current Dynamic Address Table Lists all the dynamic addresses 3 100 Address Table Settings 3 Web Click Address Table Dynamic Addresses Specify the search type i e mark the Interface MAC Address or VLAN checkbox select the method of sorting the displayed addresses and then click Query Dynamic Addresses Query by Interface Port e m OTrunk x MAC Address VLAN 1 fa Address Table Sort Key Address v Dynamic Address Table Dynamic Address Counts Eth 1 00 01 80 36 94 21 1 Current Dynamic Address Table Figure 3 62 Configuring a Dynamic Address Table CLI This example also displays the address table entries for port 1 Console show mac address table interface ethernet 1 1 4 141 Interface Mac Address Vlan Type Eth 1 1 00 12 CF 48 82 93 1 Delete on reset Eth 1 1 00 12 CF 94 34 DE 2 Learned Console 3 101 3 Configuring the Switch Changing the Aging Time You can set the aging time for entries in the dynamic address table Command Attributes Aging Status Enables disables the fun
17. New Differentiated Service Code Point DSCP value Range 0 63 new precedence New IP Precedence value Range 0 7 Default Setting None Command Mode Policy Map Class Configuration Example This example creates a policy called rd_policy uses the class command to specify the previously defined rd_class uses the set command to classify the service that incoming packets will receive and then uses the police command to limit the average bandwidth to 100 000 Kbps the burst rate to 1522 bytes and configure the response to drop any violating packets Console config policy map rd policy Console config pmap class rd class Console config pmap c set ip dscp 3 Console config pmap c police 100000 1522 exceed action drop Console config pmap c 4 197 4 Command Line Interface police This command defines an policer for classified traffic Use the no form to remove a policer Syntax no police rate kbps burst byte exceed action drop set e rate kbps Rate in kilobits per second Range 1 100000 kbps or maximum port speed whichever is lower burst byte Burst in bytes Range 64 1522 bytes drop Drop packet when specified rate or burst are exceeded set Set DSCP service to the specified value Range 0 63 Default Setting Drop out of profile packets Command Mode Policy Map Class Configuration Command Usage e You can configure up to 64 policers i e meter
18. Syntax logging sendmail level eve level One of the system message levels page 4 44 Messages sent include the selected level down to level 0 Range 0 7 Default 7 Default Setting Level 7 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The specified level indicates an event threshold All events at this level or higher will be sent to the configured email recipients For example using Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0 Example This example will send email alerts for system errors from level 4 through 0 Console config logging sendmail level 4 Console config 4 50 System Management Commands 4 logging sendmail source email This command sets the email address used for the From field in alert messages Use the no form to delete the source email address Syntax no logging sendmail source email email address email address The source email address used in alert messages Range 0 41 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You may use an symbolic email address that identifies the switch or the address of an administrator responsible for the switch Example This example will set the source email john acme com Console config logging sendmail source email john acme com Console config logging sendmail destination email This command specifies the email recipients of alert messages Use the no for
19. The CoS values that are mapped to the queue ID Itis a space separated list of numbers The CoS value is a number from 0 to 7 where 7 is the highest priority Default Setting This switch supports Class of Service by using four priority queues with Weighted Round Robin queuing for each port Eight separate traffic classes are defined in IEEE 802 1p The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard as shown below Table 4 63 Default CoS Values to Egress Queues Queue 0 1 2 3 Priority 1 2 0 3 45 6 7 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 187 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage CoS values assigned at the ingress port are also used at the egress port Example The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if queue cos map 0 0 Console config if queue cos map 1 1 Console config if queue cos map 2 2 Console config if exit Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 Information of Eth 1 1 Traffic Class 012 3 Priority Queue 0121 Console 5 7 2 3 W OY 4 2 Related Commands show queue cos map 4 189 show queue mode This command shows the current queue mode Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show queue mode Queue mode wrr Console show queue bandwidth This co
20. e unit Stack unit Always unit 1 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e If you enter the command dir without any parameters the system displays all files e A colon is required after the specified unit number e File information is shown below Table 4 26 File Directory Information Column Heading Description file name The name of the file file type File types Boot Rom Operation Code and Config file startup Shows if this file is used when the system is started size The length of the file in bytes Example The following example shows how to display all file information Console dir 1 file name file type startup size byte D2218 Boot Rom image Y 214124 V2271 Operation Code Y 1761944 Factory Default_Config cfg Config File X 5197 Total free space 5242880 Console 4 68 Flash File Commands 4 whichboot This command displays which files were booted when the system powered up Syntax whichboot unit unit Stack unit Always unit 1 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows the information displayed by the whichboot command See the table under the dir command for a description of the file information displayed by this command Console whichboot file name file type startup size byte Unit1 D2218 Boot Rom image Y 214124 V2271 Operation Code Y 1761944 Factory Default _Confi
21. interface interface interface interface interface interface interface interface fi 2 3 4 5 6 iF 1 24 is Normal mode is is is is is is is Access Uplink Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal moa moa moa moa moa moa moa e e e e e e 45 1 52 14 52 15 52 14 52 16 TP is TP is TP is TP is TP is TP is TP is TPID is 3 140 Configuring IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling 3 Configuring Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from uplink ports Note that private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch Uplink Ports Primary VLAN promiscuous ports Downlink Ports 0O 0O El gog Secondary VLAN private ports Enabling Private VLANs Use the Private VLAN Status page to enable disable the Private VLAN function Web Click VLAN Private VLAN Status Select Enable or Disable from the scroll down box and click Apply Private VLAN Status Private VLAN Status Enabled Figure 3 80 Private VLAN Status CLI This example enables private VLANs Console config pvlan 53 1 Console config 3 141 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring Uplink and Downlink Ports Use the Private VLA
22. the user name must first be defined with the snmp server user command Otherwise the authentication password and or privacy password will not exist and the switch will not authorize SNMP access for the host However if you specify a V3 host with the noauth option an SNMP user account will be generated and the switch will authorize SNMP access for the host Example Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 23 batman Console config Related Commands snmp server enable traps 4 106 snmp server enable traps This command enables this device to send Simple Network Management Protocol traps or informs i e SNMP notifications Use the no form to disable SNMP notifications Syntax no snmp server enable traps authentication link up down authentication Keyword to issue authentication failure notifications link up down Keyword to issue link up or link down notifications Default Setting Issue authentication and link up down traps Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e If you do not enter an snmp server enable traps command no notifications controlled by this command are sent In order to configure this device to send SNMP notifications you must enter at least one snmp server enable traps command If you enter the command with no keywords both authentication and link up down notifications are enabled If you enter the command with a keyword only the notification type related to
23. 10half 10full 100half 100full Flow control Disabled Port security Disabled ax MAC count 0 Current status Created by User Link status Up Port operation status Up Operation speed duplex 100full Flow control type None ember Ports Eth1 1 Eth1 2 Console Enabling LACP on Selected Ports Command Usage To avoid creating a loop in the network be sure dynamically you enable LACP before connecting the ports enabled and also disconnect the ports before disabling aa LACP SLSR LPL i active backu e Ifthe target switch has also enabled LACP on the fie a ik p connected ports the trunk will be activated automatically e A trunk formed with another switch using LACP gua Sad will automatically be assigned the next available configured trunk ID members If more than eight ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled the additional ports will be placed in standby mode and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails All ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex and auto negotiation Trunks dynamically established through LACP will also be shown in the Member List on the Trunk Membership menu see 3 81 3 82 Port Configuration 3 Command Attributes Member List Current Shows configured trunks Port e New Includes entry fields for creating new trunks Port Port identifier Range 1 26 50 Web Click Port LACP Configuration Sel
24. 2 Reauthentication State Machine State Initialize 802 1X is disabled on port 1 26 Console 4 88 Access Control List Commands 4 Access Control List Commands Access Control Lists ACL provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol or Layer 4 protocol port number or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type To filter packets first create an access list add the required rules and then bind the list to a specific port Access Control Lists An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses MAC addresses or other more specific criteria This switch tests ingress or egress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule If no rules match for a list of all permit rules the packet is dropped and if no rules match for a list of all deny rules the packet is accepted There are three filtering modes Standard IP ACL mode STD ACL filters packets based on the source IP address Extended IP ACL mode EXT ACL filters packets based on source or destination IP address as well as protocol type and protocol port number The following restrictions apply to ACLs e Each ACL can have up to 96 rules e However due to resource restrictions the average number of rules bound the ports should not exceed 20 e This switch supports ACLs for ingr
25. 20 S Eth1 21 S Eth1 22 S Eth1 23 S Eth1 24 S 25 S Eth1 26 S Vlan ID 2 Type Static Name R amp D Status Active Ports Port Channel Console 4 167 4 168 4 175 Eth1 Eth1 Eth1 Eth1 Eth1 Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index Assign ports as tagged if they are connected to 802 1Q VLAN compliant devices or untagged they are not connected to any VLAN aware devices Or configure a port as forbidden to prevent the switch from automatically adding it to a VLAN via the GVRP protocol Notes 1 You can also use the VLAN Static Membership by Port page to configure VLAN groups based on the port index page 3 131 However note that this configuration page can only add ports to a VLAN as tagged members 3 129 3 Configuring the Switch 2 VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN containing all ports on the switch and can only be modified by first reassigning the default port VLAN ID as described under Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces on page 3 132 Command Attributes VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters Status Enables or disables the specified VLAN Enable VLAN is operational Disable VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets Port Port identifier Membership Type Select VLAN membership for each interface by marking the
26. Command Attributes File Transfer Method The configuration copy operation includes these options file to file Copies a file within the switch directory assigning it a new name file to running config Copies a file in the switch to the running configuration file to startup config Copies a file in the switch to the startup configuration file to tftp Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server running config to file Copies the running configuration to a file running config to startup config Copies the running config to the startup config running config to tftp Copies the running configuration to a TFTP server startup config to file Copies the startup configuration to a file on the switch startup config to running config Copies the startup config to the running config startup config to tftp Copies the startup configuration to a TFTP server 3 19 3 Configuring the Switch tftp to file Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch tftp to running config Copies a file from a TFTP server to the running config tftp to startup config Copies a file from a TFTP server to the startup config e TFTP Server IP Address The IP address of a TFTP server e File Type Specify config configuration to copy configuration settings e File Name The file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a perio
27. For example a mask of 00 00 00 00 00 00 means an exact match and a mask of FF FF FF FF FF FF means any e The maximum number of address entries is 8191 Example Console show mac address table Interface Mac Address Vlan Type Eth 1 1 00 12 cf 94 34 de 1 Delete on reset Trunk 2 00 12 cf 8f aa l1b 1 Learned Console mac address table aging time This command sets the aging time for entries in the address table Use the no form to restore the default aging time Syntax mac address table aging time seconds no mac address table aging time seconds Aging time Range 10 30000 seconds 0 to disable aging Default Setting 300 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The aging time is used to age out dynamically learned forwarding information 4 142 Address Table Commands 4 Example Console config mac address table aging time 100 Console config show mac address table aging time This command shows the aging time for entries in the address table Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac address table aging time Aging time 100 sec Console 4 143 4 Command Line Interface Spanning Tree Commands This section includes commands that configure the Spanning Tree Algorithm STA globally for the switch and commands that configure STA for the selected interface Table 4 52 Spanning Tree Commands
28. However before making any physical connections between devices use the web interface or CLI to specify the trunk on the devices at both ends When using a port trunk take note of the following points e Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop e You can create up to 32 trunks on a switch with up to eight ports per trunk The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports When configuring static trunks on switches of different types they must be compatible with the Cisco EtherChannel standard 3 80 Port Configuration 3 The ports at both ends of a trunk must be configured in an identical manner including communication mode i e speed duplex mode and flow control VLAN assignments and CoS settings All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN STP VLAN and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk Statically Configuring a Trunk Command Usage When configuring static trunks you may not be able to link switches of different types depending on the manufacturer s implementation However note that the static trunks on this switch are Cisco EtherChannel compatible Betve To avoid creating a loop in the network be sure links you add a static trunk via the configuration interface before connecting the ports and also disco
29. Output Port Configuration Sets the output rate limit for ports 3 94 Output Trunk Configuration Sets the output rate limit for trunks 3 94 Port Statistics Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics 3 95 Address Table 3 99 Static Addresses Displays entries for interface address or VLAN 3 99 Dynamic Addresses Displays or edits static entries in the Address Table 3 100 Address Aging Sets timeout for dynamically learned entries 3 102 Spanning Tree 3 102 STA 3 102 Information Displays STA values used for the bridge 3 105 Configuration Configures global bridge settings for STA and RSTP 3 107 Port Information Displays individual port settings for STA 3 111 Trunk Information Displays individual trunk settings for STA 3 111 Port Configuration Configures individual port settings for STA 3 114 Trunk Configuration Configures individual trunk settings for STA 3 114 MSTP 3 116 VLAN Configuration Configures priority and VLANs for a spanning tree instance 3 116 Port Information Displays port settings for a specified MST instance 3 118 Trunk Information Displays trunk settings for a specified MST instance 3 118 Port Configuration Configures port settings for a specified MST instance 3 120 Trunk Configuration Configures trunk settings for a specified MST instance 3 120 Navigating the Web Browser Interface 3 Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Descripti
30. Requests a new IP address from the DHCP server 3 14 Basic Configuration 3 Manual Configuration Web Click System IP Configuration Select the VLAN through which the management station is attached set the IP Address Mode to Static enter the IP address subnet mask and gateway then click Apply IP Configuration Management VLAN 1 IP Address Mode Stoic z IP Address fs216811 Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 Gateway IP Address 0o00 MAC Address 00 00 35 28 10 03 Restart DHCP Figure 3 6 Manual IP Configuration CLI Specify the management interface IP address and default gateway Console config Console config interface vlan 1 4 116 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 4 223 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 0 0 0 0 4 224 Console config 3 15 3 Configuring the Switch Using DHCP BOOTP If your network provides DHCP BOOTP services you can configure the switch to be dynamically configured by these services Web Click System IP Configuration Specify the VLAN to which the management station is attached set the IP Address Mode to DHCP or BOOTP Click Apply to save your changes Then click Restart DHCP to immediately request a new address Note that the switch will also broadcast a request for IP configuration settings on each power reset IP Configuration Management VLAN i IP Address Mode DHCP IP Address f
31. Spanning tree settings Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet Example Console show startup config building startup config please wait 1 l username admin access level 15 username admin password 0 admin 1 username guest access level 0 username guest password 0 guest 1 enable password level 15 0 super 1 snmp server community public ro snmp server community private rw 1 logging history ram 6 logging history flash 3 1 vlan database vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active 1 interface ethernet 1 1 switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged switchport native vlan 1 interface vlan 1 ip address dhcp line console j line vty 1 end Console 4 58 System Management Commands 4 Related Commands show running config 4 59 show running config This command displays the configuration information currently in use Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Use this command in conjunction with the show startup config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non volatile memory This command displays settings for key command modes Each mode group is separated by symbols and includes the configuration mode command and corresponding commands This command displays the following information MAC address for each switch in the stack SNTP server settings Local time zone
32. Then finally click Add to register the new policy A policy map can contain multiple class statements that can be applied to the same interface with the Service Policy Settings page 3 161 You can configure up to 64 policers i e meters or class maps for each of the following access list types MAC ACL IP ACL including Standard ACL and Extended ACL Also note that the maximum number of classes that can be applied to a policy map is 16 Policing is based on a token bucket where bucket depth i e the maximum burst before the bucket overflows is by specified the Burst field and the average rate tokens are removed from the bucket is by specified by the Rate option After using the policy map to define packet classification service tagging and bandwidth policing it must be assigned to a specific interface by a service policy page 3 161 to take effect Command Attributes Policy Map Modify Name and Description Configures the name and a brief description of a policy map Range 1 16 characters for the name 1 64 characters for the description Edit Classes Opens the Policy Rule Settings page for the selected class entry Modify the criteria used to service ingress traffic on this page Add Policy Opens the Policy Configuration page Enter a policy name and description on this page and click Add to open the Policy Rule Settings page Enter the criteria used to service ingress traffic on
33. To create trunks and select port members see 3 80 Note Auto negotiation must be disabled before you can configure or force the interface to use the Speed Duplex Mode or Flow Control options Web Click Port Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Modify the required interface settings and click Apply Port Configuration Port Name Admin Speed Duplex Flow Control Autonegotiation Media Type Trunk Enabled z E Enabled Enabled m 4 ane sa l as None P Enable TE menia Period P 10n m 100 m zoon m woon Fem Enabled Tam a mEnabied 7 Enabled ho n sw f ash ne 4 Enabled E mEnabieg 7 Enabled 7 or bee hree eei ne z enabled rE menabied Enabled F 10n F 100h m 1000 m 10Gh frog Enabled ATE mEnabiea F Enabied F 10n F 100h m 10001 m 10Gh ey Enabled fom a mEnablea 7 Enabled eh pe con gt besi ne z a es Oe la se Eecaed F Enabled F 10h m 100h m 1000h M 10Gh fia zj Figure 3 50 Port Trunk Configuration 3 79 3 Configuring the Switch CLI Select the interface and then enter the required settings Console config interface ethernet 1 13 4 116 Console config if description RD SW 13 4 117 Console config if shutdown 4 121 Console config if no shutdown Console config if no negotiation 4 118 Console config if speed duplex 100half 4 117 Console config if flowcontrol 4 120 Console con
34. Use the no form with the multi host max count keywords to restore the default maximum count Syntax dot1x operation mode single host multi host max count counf no dot1x operation mode multi host max count e single host Allows only a single host to connect to this port e multi host Allows multiple host to connect to this port max count Keyword for the maximum number of hosts count The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port Range 1 1024 Default 5 Default Single host Command Mode Interface Configuration Command Usage The max count parameter specified by this command is only effective if the dot1x mode is set to auto by the dot1x port control command page 4 82 e In multi host mode only one host connected to a port needs to pass authentication for all other hosts to be granted network access Similarly a port can become unauthorized for all hosts if one attached host fails re authentication or sends an EAPOL logoff message Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dotlx operation mode multi host max count 10 Console config if 4 83 4 Command Line Interface dot1x re authenticate This command forces re authentication on all ports or a specific interface Syntax dot1x re authenticate interface interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 26 50 Command Mode Pr
35. Web Click Cluster Member Information Cluster Member Information Member ID Role IP Address MAC Address Description 1 Active Member 10 254 254 2 00 12 CF 23 49 CO 24 48 L2 L4 IPV4 IPV6 GE Switch Figure 3 125 Cluster Member Information 3 197 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example shows information about cluster Member switches Vty O sh cluster members 4 241 Cluster Members TDs 1 Role Active member IP Address 10 254 254 2 MAC Address 00 12 cf 23 49 c0 Description TigerSwitch 10 100 1000 SPORT MANAGE Vty 0 Cluster Candidate Information Displays information about discovered switches in the network that are already cluster Members or are available to become cluster Members Command Attributes Role Indicates the current status of Candidate switches in the network MAC Address The MAC address of the Candidate switch Description The system description string of the Candidate switch Web Click Cluster Candidate Information Cluster Candidate Information Clear cluster candidate table Role MAC Address Description Active Member 00 12 CF 23 49 CO 24 48 L2 L4 IPV4 IPV6 GE Switch Candidate 00 12 CF 0B 47 A0 24 48 L2 L4 IPV4 IPV6 GE Switch Figure 3 126 Cluster Candidate Information CLI This example shows information about cluster Candidate switches Vty O show cluster candidates 4 242 Cluster Candidates Role Mac Description ACTIVE MEMBE
36. appropriate radio button for a port or trunk Tagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be tagged that is carry a tag and therefore carry VLAN or CoS information Untagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be untagged that is not carry a tag and therefore not carry VLAN or CoS information Note that an interface can only have one untagged VLAN which must be the same as the Port VID See Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces on page 3 132 for configuring PVID Forbidden Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the VLAN via GVRP For more information see Automatic VLAN Registration on page 3 124 None Interface is not a member of the VLAN Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To add a trunk to the selected VLAN use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static Table Select a VLAN ID from the scroll down list Modify the VLAN name and status if required Select the membership type by marking the appropriate radio button in the list of ports or trunks Click Apply 1 UW By WlN VLAN Static Table VLAN 2 x Name R amp D Status Enabled Port Tagged Untagged Forbidden None Trunk Member O O O fe 3
37. e Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames e With ingress filtering enabled a port will discard received frames tagged for VLANs for it which it is not a member Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames such as GVRP or STA However they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames such as GMRP Example The following example shows how to select port 1 and then enable ingress filtering Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport ingress filtering Console config if switchport native vlan This command configures the PVID i e default VLAN ID for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport native vlan vlan id no switchport native vlan vlan id Default VLAN ID for a port Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes Default Setting VLAN 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Setting the native VLAN for a port can only be performed when the port is a member of the VLAN and the VLAN is untagged The no switchport native vlan command will set the native VLAN of the port to untagged VLAN 1 e If acceptable frame types is set to all or switchport mode is set to hybrid the PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port Example The following example shows how to set the PVID for port 1 to VLAN 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport native vl
38. is equal to the TPID of the uplink port no new VLAN tag is added If the uplink port is not the member of the outer VLAN of the incoming packets the packet will be dropped when ingress filtering is enabled If ingress filtering is not enabled the packet will still be forwarded If the VLAN is not listed in the VLAN table the packet will be dropped After successful source and destination lookup the packet is double tagged The switch uses the TPID of 0x8100 to indicate that an incoming packet is double tagged If the outer tag of an incoming double tagged packet is equal to the port TPID and the inner tag is 0x8100 it is treated as a double tagged packet If a single tagged packet has 0x8100 as its TPID and port TPID is not 3 135 3 Configuring the Switch 0x8100 a new VLAN tag is added and it is also treated as double tagged packet If the destination address lookup fails the packet is sent to all member ports of the outer tag s VLAN After packet classification the packet is written to memory for processing as a single tagged or double tagged packet The switch sends the packet to the proper egress port If the egress port is an untagged member of the SPVLAN the outer tag will be stripped If it is a tagged member the outgoing packet will have two tags Configuration Limitations for QinQ The native VLAN of uplink ports should not be used as the SPVLAN If the SPVLAN is the uplink port s native VLAN the uplink port
39. it possible to support common multicast services over a wide part of the network without having to use any multicast routing protocol MVR maintains the user isolation and data security provided by VLAN segregation by passing only multicast traffic into other VLANs to which the subscribers belong Even though common multicast streams are passed onto different VLAN groups from the MVR VLAN users in different IEEE 802 1Q or private VLANs cannot exchange any information except through upper level routing services Multicast Router Satellite Service Service Network Source J Port Multicast Server Layer2 Switch Receiver Ports Set top Box Set top Box r z i e 3 174 Multicast Filtering 3 General Configuration Guidelines for MVR 1 Enable MVR globally on the switch select the MVR VLAN and add the multicast groups that will stream traffic to attached hosts see Configuring Global MVR Settings on page 3 175 Set the interfaces that will join the MVR as source ports or receiver ports see Configuring MVR Interface Status on page 3 179 Enable IGMP Snooping to a allow a subscriber to dynamically join or leave an MVR group see 3 163 Note that only IGMP version 2 or 3 hosts can issue multicast join or leave messages For multicast streams that will run for a long term and be associated with a stable set of hosts you can statically bind the multicast group to the participating
40. rule can also be configured to monitor the average flow and burst rate and drop any traffic that exceeds the specified rate or just reduce the DSCP service level for traffic exceeding the specified rate 5 Use the Service Policy to assign a policy map to a specific interface Configuring a Class Map A class map is used for matching packets to a specified class Command Usage To configure a Class Map follow these steps Open the Class Map page and click Add Class When the Class Configuration page opens fill in the Class Name field and click Add When the Match Class Settings page opens specify type of traffic for this class 3 155 3 Configuring the Switch based on an access list a DSCP or IP Precedence value or a VLAN and click the Add button next to the field for the selected traffic criteria You can specify up to 16 items to match when assigning ingress traffic to a class map The class map is used with a policy map page 3 158 to create a service policy page 3 161 for a specific interface that defines packet classification service tagging and bandwidth policing Note that one or more class maps can be assigned to a policy map Command Attributes Class Map Modify Name and Description Configures the name and a brief description of a class map Range 1 16 characters for the name 1 64 characters for the description Edit Rules Opens the Match Class Settings page for the
41. 4 802 1X Port Details Displays the port access control parameters for each interface including the following items reauth enabled Periodic re authentication page 4 84 reauth period Time after which a connected client must be re authenticated page 4 85 quiet period Time a port waits after Max Request Count is exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client page 4 84 tx period Time a port waits during authentication session before re transmitting EAP packet page 4 85 supplicant timeout Supplicant timeout server timeout Server timeout reauth max Maximum number of reauthentication attempts max req Maximum number of times a port will retransmit an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session page 4 82 Status Authorization status authorized or not Operation Mode Shows if single or multiple hosts clients can connect to an 802 1X authorized port Max Count The maximum number of hosts allowed to access this port page 4 83 Port control Shows the dot1x mode on a port as auto force authorized or force unauthorized page 4 82 Supplicant MAC address of authorized client Current Identifier The integer 0 255 used by the Authenticator to identify the current authentication session Authenticator State Machine State Current state including initialize disconnec
42. 4 13 Console config line password thresh 3 4 14 Console config line silent time 60 4 15 Console config line databits 8 4 15 Console config line parity none 4 16 Console config line speed 19200 4 17 Console config line stopbits 1 4 17 Console config line end Console show line 4 18 Console configuration Password threshold 3 times Interactive timeout Disabled Login timeout Disabled Silent time 60 Baudrate 19200 Databits 8 Parity none Stopbits 1 VTY configuration Password threshold 3 times Interactive timeout 600 sec Login timeout 300 sec Console Telnet Settings You can access the onboard configuration program over the network using Telnet i e a virtual terminal Management access via Telnet can be enabled disabled and other various parameters set including the TCP port number timeouts and a password These parameters can be configured via the web or CLI interface Command Attributes Telnet Status Enables or disables Telnet access to the switch Default Enabled Telnet Port Number Sets the TCP port number for Telnet on the switch Default 23 Login Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval the connection is terminated for the session Range 0 300 seconds Default 300 seconds Exec Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected
43. 4 64 memory or a TFTP server delete Deletes a file or code image PE 4 67 dir Displays a list of files in flash memory PE 4 68 whichboot Displays the files booted PE 4 69 boot system Specifies the file or image used to start up the system GC 4 69 copy This command moves upload download a code image or configuration file between the switch s flash memory and a TFTP server When you save the system code or configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore system operation The success of the file transfer depends on the accessibility of the TFTP server and the quality of the network connection Syntax copy file file running config startup config tftp unit copy running config file startup config tftp copy startup config file running config tftp copy tftp file running config startup config https certificate public key copy unit file e file Keyword that allows you to copy to from a file running config Keyword that allows you to copy to from the current running configuration startup config The configuration used for system initialization tftp Keyword that allows you to copy to from a TFTP server 4 64 Flash File Commands 4 https certificate Copies an HTTPS certificate from an TFTP server to the switch public key Keyword that allows you to copy a SSH key from a TFTP server Secure Shell Co
44. 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Root Device Configuration Hello Time Interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Default 2 Minimum 1 Maximum The lower of 10 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum Age The maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section mean interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Default 20 Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 3 108 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds this device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding stat
45. 5 3 A linkDown trap signifies that the SNMP entity acting in an agent role has detected that the ifOperStatus object for one of its communication links is about to enter the down state from some other state but not from the notPresent state This other state is indicated by the included value of ifOperStatus linkUp 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 A linkUp trap signifies that the SNMP entity acting in an agent role has detected that the ifOperStatus object for one of its communication links left the down state and transitioned into some other state but not into the notPresent state This other state is indicated by the included value of ifOperStatus authenticationFailure 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 An authenticationFailure trap signifies that the SNMPvV2 entity acting in an agent role has received a protocol message that is not properly authenticated While all implementations of the SNMPv2 must be capable of generating this trap the snmpEnableAuthenTraps object indicates whether this trap will be generated RMON Events V2 risingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 1 The SNMP trap that is generated when an alarm entry crosses its rising threshold and generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps fallingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 2 The SNMP trap that is generated when an alarm entry crosses its falling threshold and generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps 3 42 Simple Netwo
46. 92726029378 6608 9236841423275912127 60325919683697053439336438445223335188287173896894511729290510813919642025 190932104328579045764891 DSA ssh dss AAAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAN6zwlIqCqDb3869j YVX1ME1SHLOECE Re6hlasfEthIwmj hLY400jqUZpcEQUgC LY1lum0Y2uoLka Py9ieGWO8 2 gobUZKI ICukg6vjO9XTs7XKcO5SxfzkBi KviDat 20r1z6UK 6vFOgvUDFed1lnixYTVoth5v8r0ea2 rpn06DkZAAAAFOCNZn x1 7dwpW8Rrv DOnSWw4Qk 6QAAATEAptkGeB B5hwagH4gUOCY 6i11TmrmSiJgfwO90qRPUMbCAkCC uzxat0o7 drniIZypMx Sx5RUdGMGgKS 9ywsalcWqHeFY5ilc31DCNBueeLykZzVS RS azTKIk zrJh8GLG Nq375R55yRxFvmcGin Q7 IphPqyJ309MK8 LFDfmJEAAACAL8A 6tESiswP20FqX7VGoEbzVDSOI RTMFy3iUXtvGyQAOVSy 67Mfc31MtgqPRUOYXDiwI Bp5NXgilCg5z7VqbmRm2 8mWc5a f8TUAg PNWKV6WOhqmshQdotVzDR1e XKNTZjOuTwWfjO5Kytdn4MdoTHgrb1 DMdAfjnte8MZZs Console 3 58 User Authentication 3 Configuring Port Security Port security is a feature that allows you to configure a switch port with one or more device MAC addresses that are authorized to access the network through that port When port security is enabled on a port the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted as authorized to access the network through that port If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port the intrusion will be detected and the switch can au
47. Apply IGMP Profile Group Configuration Profile ID 19 Access Mode permit v Current Multicast Address Range List 239 1 2 3 239 1 2 3 239 2 3 1 239 2 3 200 New Multicast Address Range List Start Multicast Address End Multicast Address o Figure 3 105 IGMP Profile Configuration 3 173 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example configures profile number 19 by setting the access mode to permit and then specifying a range of multicast groups that a user can join The current profile configuration is then displayed Console config ip igmp profile 19 4 222 Console config igmp profile permit 4 222 Console config igmp profile range 239 1 1 1 4 223 Console config igmp profile range 239 2 3 1 239 2 3 100 Console config igmp profile end 4 226 Console show ip igmp profile 19 IGMP Profile 19 permit range 239 1 1 1 239 1 1 1 range 239 2 3 1 239 2 3 100 Console Multicast VLAN Registration Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is a protocol that controls access to a single network wide VLAN most commonly used for transmitting multicast traffic such as television channels or video on demand across a service provider s network Any multicast traffic entering an MVR VLAN is sent to all attached subscribers This protocol can significantly reduce to processing overhead required to dynamically monitor and establish the distribution tree for a normal multicast VLAN This makes
48. Basic Information Port type Indicates the port type 100BASE TX 1000BASE T or SFP MAC address The physical layer address for this port To access this item on the web see 3 14 Configuration Name Interface label Port admin Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled i e up or down Speed duplex Shows the current speed and duplex mode Auto or fixed choice Capabilities Specifies the capabilities to be advertised for a port during auto negotiation To access this item on the web see 3 78 The following capabilities are supported 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 1000full Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation Sym Transmits and receives pause frames for flow control FC Supports flow control Broadcast storm Shows if broadcast storm control is enabled or disabled Broadcast storm limit Shows the broadcast storm threshold 500 262143 packets per second Flow control Shows if flow control is enabled or disabled LACP Shows if LACP is enabled or disabled 3 77 3 Configuring the Switch Port Security Shows if port security is enabled or disabled Max MAC count Shows the maximum number of MAC address that can be learned by a port 0 1024 addresses Port security action Sho
49. CLI This example enables the HTTP secure server and modifies the port number Console config ip http secure server 4 30 Console config ip http secure port 443 4 31 Console config Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate When you log onto the web interface using HTTPS for secure access a Secure Sockets Layer SSL certificate appears for the switch By default the certificate that Netscape and Internet Explorer display will be associated with a warning that the site is not recognized as a secure site This is because the certificate has not been signed by an approved certification authority If you want this warning to be replaced by a message confirming that the connection to the switch is secure you must obtain a unique certificate and a private key and password from a recognized certification authority Caution For maximum security we recommend you obtain a unique Secure Sockets Layer certificate at the earliest opportunity This is because the default certificate for the switch is not unique to the hardware you have purchased When you have obtained these place them on your TFTP server and use the following command at the switch s command line interface to replace the default unrecognized certificate with an authorized one Console copy tftp https certificate 4 64 TFTP server ip address lt server ip address gt Source certificate file name lt certificate file name gt Source private file na
50. Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Fill in the required settings for each interface click Apply VLAN Port Configuration GARP Join GARP Leave GARP LeaveAll Port PVID Acceptable Ingress GVRP Timer Centi Timer Centi Timer Centi Node Trunk Frame Type Filtering Status Seconds 20 Seconds 60 Seconds 500 Member 1000 3000 18000 iit AlL x MEnabled Enabled 20 60 1000 Access x 2h ALL x MEnabled O Enabled 20 60 1000 Access v 3 l2 AL MEnabled Enabled 20 60 1000 Access x 4 l2 AL x MEnabled Enabled 20 60 1000 Access x 5 l3 AL x MEnabled Enabled 20 60 1000 Access x 6 3 ALL m Enabled Enabled 20 60 1000 Access v Figure 3 77 Configuring VLANs per Port CLI This example sets port 3 to accept only tagged frames assigns PVID 3 as the native VLAN ID and then sets the switchport mode to hybrid Console config interface ethernet 1 3 4 116 Console config if switchport acceptable frame types tagged 4 171 Console config if switchport ingress filtering 4 171 Console config if switchport native vlan 3 4 172 Console config if switchport mode hybrid 4 170 Console config if Configuring IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling QinQ is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their networks QinQ tunneling is used to maintain custom
51. Commands class map match policy map class set police service policy show class map show policy map show policy map interface Example Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping Commands ip igmp snooping ip igmp snooping vlan static ip igmp snooping version ip igmp snooping leave proxy ip igmp snooping immediate leave show ip igmp snooping show mac address table multicast IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 Contents 4 178 4 178 4 179 4 179 4 180 4 181 4 181 4 182 4 183 4 183 4 184 4 184 4 185 4 185 4 186 4 187 4 188 4 188 4 189 4 189 4 189 4 190 4 191 4 192 4 194 4 194 4 195 4 196 4 197 4 198 4 199 4 199 4 200 4 200 4 201 4 201 4 201 4 202 4 202 4 203 4 203 4 204 4 204 4 205 4 206 xi Contents ip igmp snooping querier 4 206 ip igmp snooping query count 4 206 ip igmp snooping query interval 4 207 ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 208 ip igmp snooping router port expire time 4 208 Static Multicast Routing Commands 4 209 ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter 4 209 show ip igmp snooping mrouter 4 210 IGMP Filtering and Throttling Commands 4 211 ip igmp filter Global Configuration 4 211 ip igmp profile 4 212 permit deny 4 212 range 4 213 ip igmp filter Interface Configuration 4 213 ip igmp max groups 4 214 ip igmp max groups action 4 215 show ip igmp filter 4 215 show ip igmp profile 4 216 show ip igmp throttle interface 4 216 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands 4 217 mvr Glo
52. Console config logging facility 19 Console config 4 45 4 Command Line Interface logging trap This command enables the logging of system messages to a remote server or limits the syslog messages saved to a remote server based on severity Use this command without a specified level to enable remote logging Use the no form to disable remote logging Syntax logging trap evel no logging trap level One of the level arguments listed below Messages sent include the selected level up through level 0 Refer to the table on page 4 44 Default Setting Enabled e Level 6 0 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Using this command with a specified level enables remote logging and sets the minimum severity level to be saved Using this command without a specified level also enables remote logging but restores the minimum severity level to the default Example Console config logging trap 4 Console config clear logging This command clears messages from the log buffer Syntax clear logging flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset Default Setting Flash and RAM Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console clear logging Console 4 46 System Management Commands 4 Related Commands show logging 4 47 show logging This c
53. Destination Address This command specifies SMTP servers that may receive alert messages Web Click System Log SMTP To add an IP address to the Server IP List type the new IP address in the Server IP Address box and then click Add To delete an IP address click the entry in the Server IP List and then click Remove SMTP Admin Status F Enabled Email Source Address Severity ITP S rl N none lt lt Add SMTP Server Remove Email Destination Address List New none lt lt Add Email Destination Address Remove Figure 3 19 Enabling and Configuring SMTP 3 29 3 Configuring the Switch CLI Enter the host ip address followed by the mail severity level source and destination email addresses and enter the sendmail command to complete the action Use the show logging command to display SMTP information Renumbering the System Web Click System Renumber Click the Renumber button to renumber the switch When prompted confirm that you want to renumber the switch Renumbenng by selecting Renumbering Renumbernng Figure 3 20 Renumbering the System CLI Use the reload command to restart the switch When prompted confirm that you want to reset the switch Console reload 4 22 System will be restarted continue lt y n gt y When restarting the system it will always run the Power On Self Test Console config logging sendmail host 192 168 1 19 Console config logging
54. Discarded Packets 150 Received Unknown Packets 0 Received Errors 0 Transmit Octets 10621122 Transmit Unicast Packets 11107 Transmit Multicast Packets 85 Transmit Broadcast Packets 1 Transmit Discarded Packets 0 Transmit Errors 0 7 p ma Etherlike Statistics Alignment Errors OjLate Collisions 0 FCS Errors 0 Excessive Collisions 0 Single Collision Frames OlInternal MAC Transmit Errors 0 Multiple Collision Frames O Carrier Sense Errors 0 SQE Test Errors 0 Frames Too Long 0 Deferred Transmissions O Internal MAC Receive Errors 0 3 98 RMON Statistics Drop Events OJabbers 0 Received Bytes 12333448 Collisions 0 Received Frames 0 64 Bytes Frames 10824 Broadcast Frames 184 65 127 Bytes Frames 1349 Multicast Frames 547 128 255 Bytes Frames 140 CRC Alignment Errors 0 256 511 Bytes Frames 1189 Undersize Frames 0512 1023 Bytes Frames 554 Oversize Frames 01024 1518 Bytes Frames 7645 Fragments 0 Figure 3 60 Port Statistics Address Table Settings 3 CLI This example shows statistics for port 13 Console show interfaces counters ethernet 1 13 4 124 Ethernet 1 13 Iftable stats Octets input 868453 Octets output 3492122 Unicast input 7315 Unitcast output 6658 Discard input 0 Discard output 0 Error input 0 Error output 0 Unknown protos input 0 QLen output 0 Extended iftable stats Multi cast input 0 Multi cast output 17027 Broadcast input 231 Bro
55. EAP Total Req Id Req Oth 2017 1005 0 Console Access Control Lists Access Control Lists ACL provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type To filter incoming packets first create an access list add the required rules and then bind the list to a specific port Configuring Access Control Lists An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses MAC addresses or other more specific criteria This switch tests ingress or egress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule If no rules match for a list of all permit rules the packet is dropped and if no rules match for a list of all deny rules the packet is accepted Command Usage The following restrictions apply to ACLs e Each ACL can have up to 32 rules The maximum number of ACLs is also 32 The maximum number of rules that can be bound to the ports is 96 for each of the following list types MAC ACLs IP ACLs including Standard and Extended ACLs When an ACL is bound to an interface as an egress filter all entries in the ACL must be deny rules Otherwise the bind operation will fail The switch does not support the explicit deny any any rule for the egress IP ACL If these ru
56. Errors The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol Transmit Octets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters Transmit Unicast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent 3 95 3 Configuring the Switch Table 3 10 Port Statistics Continued Parameter Description Transmit Multicast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Broadcast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Discarded Packets The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space Transmit Errors The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors Etherlike Statistics Alignment Errors The number of alignment errors missynchronized
57. Figure 3 9 Copy Firmware Figure 3 10 Setting the Startup Code Figure 3 11 Deleting Files Figure 3 12 Downloading Configuration Settings for Startup Figure 3 13 Setting the Startup Configuration Settings Figure 3 14 Console Port Settings Figure 3 15 Enabling Telnet Figure 3 16 Displaying Logs Figure 3 17 System Logs Figure 3 18 Remote Logs Figure 3 19 Enabling and Configuring SMTP Figure 3 20 Renumbering the System Figure 3 21 Resetting the System Figure 3 22 SNTP Configuration Figure 3 23 Setting the System Clock Figure 3 24 Configuring SNMP Community Strings Figure 3 25 Configuring IP Trap Managers Figure 3 26 Enabling SNMP Agent Status Figure 3 27 Setting an Engine ID Figure 3 28 Setting a Remote Engine ID Figure 3 29 Configuring SNMPv3 Users Figure 3 30 Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users Figure 3 31 Configuring SNMPv3 Groups Figure 3 32 Configuring SNMPv3 Views Figure 3 33 Access Levels Figure 3 34 Authentication Settings Figure 3 35 HTTPS Settings Figure 3 36 SSH Server Settings Figure 3 37 SSH Host Key Settings Figure 3 38 Configuring Port Security Figure 3 39 802 1X Global Information Figure 3 40 802 1X Global Configuration Figure 3 41 802 1X Port Configuration Figure 3 42 Displaying 802 1X Port Statistics 3 3 3 10 3 12 3 13 3 15 3 16 3 17 3 18 3 18 3 19 3 20 3 21 3 22 3 24 3 25 3 27 3 28 3 29 3 30 3 30 3 31 3 32 3 34 3 35 3 35 3 36 3 37 3 39 3 40 3 44 3 45 3 47 3 50 3 52 3 56 3 58
58. IGMP Query Configures IGMP query parameters for multicast filtering at Layer 2 4 206 Static Multicast Routing Configures static multicast router ports 4 209 IGMP Filtering and Configures IGMP filtering and throttling 4 211 Throttling Multicast VLAN Registration Configures a single network wide multicast VLAN shared by hosts 4 212 residing in other standard or private VLAN groups preserving security and data isolation for normal traffic IGMP Snooping Commands Table 4 68 IGMP Snooping Commands Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping Enables IGMP snooping GC 4 202 ip igmp snooping vian static Adds an interface as a member of a multicast group GC 4 202 ip igmp snooping version Configures the IGMP version for snooping GC 4 203 ip igmp snooping Enables IGMP leave proxy on the switch GC 4 203 leave proxy ip igmp snooping Enables IGMP immediate leave for a VLAN interface IC 4 204 immediate leave show ip igmp snooping Shows the IGMP snooping and query configuration PE 4 203 show mac address table Shows the IGMP snooping MAC multicast list PE 4 205 multicast 4 201 4 Command Line Interface ip igmp snooping This command enables IGMP snooping on this switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no ip igmp snooping Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following example enables IGMP snooping Console config ip igmp snooping Console config ip igmp snooping vlan stat
59. If user input is not detected within the timeout interval the current session is terminated Range 0 65535 seconds Default 600 seconds Password Threshold Sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts When the logon attempt threshold is reached the 3 23 3 Configuring the Switch system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time set by the Silent Time parameter before allowing the next logon attempt Range 0 120 Default 3 attempts e Password Specifies a password for the line connection When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt Default No password Login Enables password checking at login You can select authentication by a single global password as configured for the Password parameter or by passwords set up for specific user name accounts Default Local Web Click System Line Telnet Specify the connection parameters for Telnet access then click Apply Telnet Teinet Stat W Enatile ehet Port Number f pi wou oo Ro bie Erec Tene pE x 0 able P os ow Toews i Ibe Figure 3 15 Enabling Telnet 2 CLI only 3 24 Basic Configuration 3 CLI Enter Line Configuration mode for a virtual terminal then specify the connection parameters as required To display the current virtual terminal settings use t
60. LenError The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid Rx Last EAPOLVer The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame Rx Last EAPOLSrc The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame Tx EAPOL Total The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Tx EAP Req Id The number of EAP Req Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Tx EAP Req Oth The number of EAP Request frames other than Rg ld frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Web Select Security 802 1X Statistics Select the required port and then click Query Click Refresh to update the statistics Port e1 802 1X Statistics Rx EAPOL Start Rx EAPOL Logoff Rx EAPOL Invalid Rx EAPOL Total Rx EAP Resp Id Rx EAP Resp Oth OIRx EAP LenError 0 ORx Last EAPOLVer 0 O Rx Last EAPOLSrc 00 00 00 00 00 00 O Tx EAPOL Total 1 0 Tx EAP Req Id 0 O Tx EAP Req Oth 0 Figure 3 42 Displaying 802 1X Port Statistics 3 66 Access Control Lists 3 CLI This example displays the 802 1X statistics for port 4 Console show dotlx statistics interface ethernet 1 4 4 86 Eth 1 4 Rx EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAP EAP EAP Start Logoff Invalid Total Resp Id Resp Oth LenError 2 0 0 1007 672 0 0 Last Last EAPOLVer EAPOLSrc 1 00 12 CF 94 34 DE Tx EAPOL EAP
61. Mode Page pvian Enables and configured private VLANS GC 4 179 show pvlan Displays the configured private VLANS PE 4 180 pvian This command enables or configures a private VLAN Use the no form to disable the private VLAN Syntax pvlan up link interface list down link interface list no pvian 4 179 4 Command Line Interface up link Sepcifies an uplink interface e down link Sepcifies a downlink interface Default Setting No private VLANs are defined Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage A private VLAN provides port based security and isolation between ports within the VLAN Data traffic on the downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from the uplink port e Private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch Entering the pvlan command without any parameters enables the private VLAN Entering no pvian disables the private VLAN Example This example enables the private VLAN and then sets port 12 as the uplink and ports 5 8 as the downlinks Console config pvlan Console config pvlan up link ethernet 1 12 down link ethernet 1 5 8 Console config show pvlan This command displays the configured private VLAN Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show pvlan Private VLAN status Enabled Up link port Ethernet 1 12 Down link port Ethernet 1 5 Ethernet 1 6 Ethernet 1 7 Ethernet 1 8 Console 4 180 VLAN
62. OUT 1 F Enabled none F Enabled Enabled J Enabled z 2 F Enabled inone 2 M Enabled inone M Enabled Zr Enabled a 3 Enabled a Z r Enabled r Enabled z 4 F Enabled Zj r Enabled rone Z F Enabled nons I F Enabled none 2 5 r Enabled j Enabled Enabled Enabled a 6 F Enabled 3 Zr Enabled inone Z r Enabled inone z 7 Enabled inone z r Enabled air Enabled z F Enabled a 3j r Enabled Enabled a 9 F Enabled none z Fr Enabled inone Z r Enabled inane z 10 Enabled z F Enabled nons Z r Enabled inone 11 I Enabled inone z r Enabled Z r Enabled r Enabled z 12 Enabled none g F Enabled none z F Enabled none g F Enabled 0one Zj 13 F Enabled gre J r Enabled Z Enabled E 14 F Enabled none i E ZJF Enabled inone 2 F Enabled inone f 15 I Enabled none Z M En Z r Enabled none Z r Enabled none z 16 F Enabled none Z r Enabled ZI Enabled none Z r Enabled inone 17 F Enabled Zj r Enabled Enabled Zj r Enabled 3 F Enabled Z Enabled Z Enabled Z r Enabled a 4 Figure 3 47 Configuring ACL Port Binding CLI This example assigns an IP access list to port 1 and an IP access list to port 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 116 Console config if ip access group david in 4 93 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if ip access group david in Console config if Filtering IP Addresses
63. Page When your web browser connects with the switch s web agent the home page is displayed as shown below The home page displays the Main Menu on the left side of the screen and System Information on the right side The Main Menu links are used to navigate to other menus and display configuration parameters and statistics Cluster Commander x Unit 1 SMC Mode Active x Networks F Link vof tink Down a peen TigerSwitch 10 100 1000 26 50 PORT MANAGED SWITCH amp SNTP Manager SNMP amp G Security System Name Port B Address Table obied ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 68 Spanning Tree Location Ea La Contact 8Q of Nea System Up Time 0 days 0 hours 8 minutes and 8 84 seconds G IGMP Snooping a MVR B DNS HEME Connect to textual user interface a DHCP Snooping julia IP Source Guard M gt Apply Revert Figure 3 1 Home Page Note The examples in this chapter are based on the SMC8126L2 Other than the number of fixed ports there are no other differences between the SMC8126L2 and SMC8150L2 The panel graphics for both switch types are shown on the following page Navigating the Web Browser Interface 3 Configuration Options Configurable parameters have a dialog box or a drop down list Once a configuration change has been made on a page be sure to click on the Apply button to confirm the new setting The following table summarizes the web page configuration buttons Tabl
64. Port Number Network TCP port of TACACS server used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default 49 Secret Text String Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Note The local switch user database has to be set up by manually entering user names and passwords using the CLI See username on page 4 25 3 49 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Security Authentication Settings To configure local or remote authentication preferences specify the authentication sequence i e one to three methods fill in the parameters for RADIUS or TACACS authentication if selected and click Apply Authentication Settings Authentication Local iy RADIUS Settings Global ServerIndex O1 O2 O3 04 O5 Server Port Number 1 65535 1812 Secret Text String Number of Server Transmits 1 30 Timeout for a reply 1 65535 5 sec 2 TACACS Settings Server IP Address 10 11 12 13 Server Port Number 1 65535 49 Secret Text String Figure 3 34 Authentication Settings 3 50 User Authentication 3 CLI Specify all the required parameters to enable logon authentication Console config authentication login radius 4 71 Console config radius server port 181 4 74 Console config radius server key green 4 75 Console config radius server retransmit 5 4 75 Console config radius serve
65. Port Oper Pri Admin Key 0 Oper Key 4 Admin State Oper State cp 1 neighbors neighbors System ID 32768 00 00 00 00 00 00 System ID 32768 00 00 00 00 00 01 Port Number 1 Port Number 1 jority 32768 ority 32768 defaulted distributing collecting synchronization long timeout distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity 4 138 Table 4 49 Link Aggregation Commands 4 show lacp neighbors display description Field Description Partner Admin System ID LAG partner s system ID assigned by the user Partner Oper System ID LAG partner s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol Partner Admin Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner Port Number Partner Oper Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port s protocol Port Number partner Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner Oper Key Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner Admin State Administrative values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table Oper State Operational values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table Console
66. RSTP and Multiple Spanning Trees MSTP Virtual LANs Up to 256 using IEEE 802 1Q port based protocol based or private VLANs Traffic Prioritization Default port priority traffic class map queue scheduling or Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP and TCP UDP Port Qualify of Service Supports Differentiated Services DiffServ Multicast Filtering Supports IGMP snooping and query as well as Multicast VLAN Registration 1 1 4 Introduction Table 1 1 Key Features Feature Description Switch Clustering Supports up to 16 Member switches in a cluster Description of Software Features The switch provides a wide range of advanced performance enhancing features Flow control eliminates the loss of packets due to bottlenecks caused by port saturation Broadcast storm suppression prevents broadcast traffic storms from engulfing the network Port based private VLANs and protocol based VLANs plus support for automatic GVRP VLAN registration provide traffic security and efficient use of network bandwidth CoS priority queueing ensures the minimum delay for moving real time multimedia data across the network While multicast filtering provides support for real time network applications Some of the management features are briefly described below Configuration Backup and Restore You can save the current configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server and later download this file to r
67. SNMP community strings Users names access levels and encrypted passwords Event log settings VLAN database VLAN ID name and state VLAN configuration settings for each interface IP address configured for the switch Layer 4 precedence settings Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet 4 59 A Command Line Interface Example Console show running config building startup config please wait 1 phymap 00 12 cf ce 2a 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 1 SNTP server 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 clock timezone hours 0 minute 0 after UTC 1 SNMP server community private rw SNMP server community public ro 1 username admin access level 15 username admin password 7 21232 297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3 username guest access level 0 username guest password 7 084e0343a0486ff05530df6c705c8bb4 enable password level 15 7 1b3231655cebb7a1l 783edd 27d254ca logging history ram 6 logging history flash 3 1 vlan database vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active 1 interface ethernet 1 1 switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged switchport native vlan 1 interface VLAN 1 IP address DHCP 1 no map IP DSCP 1 line console 1 line vty 1 end Console Related Commands show startup config 4 57 4 60 System Management Commands 4 show syste
68. Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Network traffic may be disrupted when malicious DHCP messages are received from an outside source DHCP snooping is used to filter DHCP messages received on an unsecure interface from outside the network or 4 231 A Command Line Interface 4 232 firewall When DHCP snooping is enabled globally by this command and enabled on a VLAN interface by the ip dhcp snooping vlan command page 4 233 DHCP messages received on an untrusted interface as specified by the no ip dhcp snooping trust command page 4 234 from a device not listed in the DHCP snooping table will be dropped When enabled DHCP messages entering an untrusted interface are filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping Table entries are only learned for untrusted interfaces Each entry includes a MAC address IP address lease time entry type Dynamic DHCP Binding Static DHCP Binding VLAN identifier and port identifier When DHCP snooping is enabled the rate limit for the number of DHCP messages that can be processed by the switch is 100 packets per second Any DHCP packets in excess of this limit are dropped Filtering rules are implemented as follows Ifthe global DHCP snooping is disabled all DHCP packets are forwarded If DHCP snooping is enabled globally and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received all DHCP packets are forwarded for a truste
69. Stop Bits Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte Range 1 2 Default 1 stop bit Password Specifies a password for the line connection When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt Default No password e Login Enables password checking at login You can select authentication by a single global password as configured for the Password parameter or by passwords set up for specific user name accounts Default Local Web Click System Line Console Specify the console port connection parameters as required then click Apply Console Login Timeout 0 300 0 secs 0 Disabled Exec Timeout 0 65535 600 secs 0 Disabled Password Threshold 0 120 0 Disabled Silent Time 0 65535 0 secs 0 Disabled Data Bit fa Parity None Speed Auto Stop Bits hzl Figure 3 14 Console Port Settings 1 CLI only 3 22 Basic Configuration 3 CLI Enter Line Configuration mode for the console then specify the connection parameters as required To display the current console port settings use the show line command from the Normal Exec level Console config line console 4 11 Console config line login local 4 11 Console config line password 0 secret 4 12 Console config line timeout login response 0 4 13 Console config line exec timeout 0
70. This example shows the STA attributes for port 5 Console show spanning tree ethernet 1 5 4 160 Eth 1 5 information Admin status Role State Path cost Priority Designated cost Designated port Designated root Designated bridge Fast forwarding Forward transitions Admin edge port Oper edge port Admin Link type Oper Link type Console Spanning Tree Status enabled disable discarding 10000 128 0 128 5 32768 0012CFOBODO00 32768 0012CFOBOD00 disabled 0 disabled disabled auto point to point enabled 3 113 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring Interface Settings You can configure RSTP and MSTP attributes for specific interfaces including port priority path cost link type and edge port You may use a different priority or path cost for ports of the same media type to indicate the preferred path link type to indicate a point to point connection or shared media connection and edge port to indicate if the attached device can support fast forwarding References to ports in this section means interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Command Attributes The following attributes are read only and cannot be changed STA State Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree See Displaying Interface Settings on 3 111 for additional information Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets
71. VLAN 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if protocol vlan protocol group 1 vlan 2 Console config if show protocol vlan protocol group This command shows the frame and protocol type associated with protocol groups Syntax show protocol vlan protocol group group id group id Group identifier for a protocol group Range 1 2147483647 Default Setting All protocol groups are displayed Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This shows protocol group 1 configured for IP over Ethernet Console show protocol vlan protocol group ProtocolGroup ID Frame Type Protocol Type Console show interfaces protocol vlan protocol group This command shows the mapping from protocol groups to VLANs for the selected interfaces Syntax show interfaces protocol vian protocol group interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 50 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting The mapping for all interfaces is displayed 4 183 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This shows that traffic entering Port 1 that matches the specifications for protocol group 1 will be mapped to VLAN 2 Console show interfaces protocol vlan protocol group Port ProtocolGroup ID Vlan ID Eth 1 1 1 vlan2 Console Priority Commands The commands described in this section allow you to spec
72. a spanning instance in the Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mst instance_id port priority priority no spanning tree mst instance_id port priority e instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 no leading zeroes e priority Priority for an interface Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Default Setting 128 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command defines the priority for the use of an interface in the multiple spanning tree If the path cost for all interfaces on a switch are the same the interface with the highest priority that is lowest value will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree Where more than one interface is assigned the highest priority the interface with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree mst 1 port priority 0 Console config if Related Commands spanning tree mst cost 4 158 4 159 A Command Line Interface spanning tree protocol migration This command re checks the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interface Syntax spanning tree protocol migration interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 50 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Command Mode Privileged Exe
73. above a pre defined threshold it will be throttled until the level falls back beneath the threshold Static Addresses A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table Static addresses can be used to provide network security by restricting access for a known host to a specific port IEEE 802 1D Bridge The switch supports IEEE 802 1D transparent bridging The address table facilitates data switching by learning addresses and then filtering or forwarding traffic based on this information The address table supports up to 8K addresses Store and Forward Switching The switch copies each frame into its memory before forwarding them to another port This ensures that all frames are a standard Ethernet size and have been verified for accuracy with the cyclic redundancy check CRC This prevents bad frames from entering the network and wasting bandwidth To avoid dropping frames on congested ports the SMC8126L2 and SMC8150L2 provide 4 Mbits respectively for frame buffering This buffer can queue packets awaiting transmission on congested networks Spanning Tree Algorithm The switch supports these spanning tree protocols Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D This protocol provides loop detection and re
74. access to a broad range of statistics including a total count of different frame types and sizes passing through each port All values displayed have been accumulated since the last system reboot and are shown as counts per second Statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds by default Note RMON groups 2 3 and 9 can only be accessed using SNMP management software such as HP OpenView Table 3 10 Port Statistics Parameter Description Interface Statistics Received Octets The total number of octetts received on the interface including framing characters Received Unicast Packets The number of subnetwork unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol Received Multicast Packets The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer Received Broadcast Packets The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer Received Discarded Packets The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space Received Unknown Packets The number of packets received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol Received
75. address bitmask Decimal number representing the address bits to match host Keyword followed by a specific IP address Default Setting None Command Mode Standard ACL Command Usage e New rules are appended to the end of the list e Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and then compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned Example This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10 1 1 21 and another rule for the address range 168 92 16 x 168 92 31 x using a bitmask Console config std acl permit host 10 1 1 21 Console config std acl permit 168 92 16 0 255 255 240 0 Related Commands access list ip 4 90 permit deny Extended ACL This command adds a rule to an Extended IP ACL The rule sets a filter condition for packets with specific source or destination IP addresses protocol types or source or destination protocol ports Use the no form to remove a rule 4 91 A Command Line Interface Syntax no permit deny protocol number udp any source address bitmask host source any destination address bitmask host destination source port sport ena destination port
76. amp Description l Edit Rules Add Class Remove Class Class Name Type Description 2 match any Class Configuration Class Name Type match any v Description Match Class settings Class Name 2 match any ACL List none x Ada IP DSCP 0 63 Ada IP Precedence 0 7 Ada VLAN 1 4094 Add Figure 3 94 Configuring Class Maps Remove CLI This example creates a class map call rd class and sets it to match packets marked for DSCP service value 3 Console config class map rd_class match any Console config cmap match ip dscp 3 Console config cmap 4 198 4 199 3 157 3 Configuring the Switch Creating QoS Policies This function creates a policy map that can be attached to multiple interfaces Command Usage To configure a Policy Map follow these steps Create a Class Map as described on page 3 155 Open the Policy Map page and click Add Policy When the Policy Configuration page opens fill in the Policy Name field and click Add When the Policy Rule Settings page opens select a class name from the scroll down list Class Name field Configure a policy for traffic that matches criteria defined in this class by setting the quality of service that an IP packet will receive in the Action field defining the maximum throughput and burst rate in the Meter field and the action that results from a policy violation in the Exceed field
77. an excluded view Default Setting defaultview includes access to the entire MIB tree Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Views are used in the snmp server group command to restrict user access to specified portions of the MIB tree e The predefined view defaultview includes access to the entire MIB tree Examples This view includes MIB 2 Console config snmp server view mib 2 1 3 6 1 2 1 included Console config This view includes the MIB 2 interfaces table ifDescr The wild card is used to select all the index values in this table Console config snmp server view ifEntry 2 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 included Console config This view includes the MIB 2 interfaces table and the mask selects all index entries Console config snmp server view ifEntry a 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 included Console config 4 109 4 Command Line Interface show snmp view This command shows information on the SNMP views Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show snmp view View Name mib 2 Subtree OID 1 2 2 3 6 2 1 View Type included Storage Type permanent Row Status active View Name defaultview Subtree OID 1 View Type included Storage Type volatile Row Status active Console Table 4 39 show snmp view display description Field Description View Name Name of an SNMP view Subtree OID A branch in the MIB tree View Type Indicates i
78. at which the switch sends IGMP host query messages Range 60 125 seconds Default 125 IGMP Report Delay Sets the time between receiving an IGMP Report for an IP multicast address on a port before the switch sends an IGMP Query out of that port and removes the entry from its list Range 5 25 seconds Default 10 IGMP Query Timeout The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port i e the interface which had been receiving query packets to have expired Range 300 500 seconds Default 300 IGMP Version Sets the protocol version for compatibility with other devices on the network Range 1 2 Default 2 Notes 1 All systems on the subnet must support the same version 2 Some attributes are only enabled for IGMPv2 including IGMP Report Delay and IGMP Query Timeout 3 163 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Configuration Adjust the IGMP settings as required and then click Apply The default settings are shown below IGMP Configuration GMP Status V Enabled Act as IGMP Querier C Enabled GMP Query Count 2 10 2 GMP Query Interval 60 125 125 seconds GMP Report Delay 5 25 10 seconds GMP Query Timeout 300 500 300 seconds GMP Version 1 2 2 Figure 3 97 IGMP Configuration CLI This example modifies the settings for multicast filtering and then displays the current status Console c
79. authentication at login specifies or changes a user s password or specify that no password is required or specifies or changes a user s access level Use the no form to remove a user name Syntax username name access level eve nopassword password 0 7 password no username name 4 25 4 Command Line Interface name The name of the user Maximum length 8 characters case sensitive Maximum users 16 access level evel Specifies the user level The device has two predefined privilege levels 0 Normal Exec 15 Privileged Exec nopassword No password is required for this user to log in 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password password password The authentication password for the user Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting e The default access level is Normal Exec e The factory defaults for the user names and passwords are Table 4 10 Default Login Settings username access level password guest 0 guest admin 15 admin Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example This example shows how to set t
80. by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port and IGMP throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join IGMP filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multcast groups that are permitted or denied on the port An IGMP filter profile can contain one or more or a range of multicast addresses but only one profile can be assigned to a port When enabled IGMP join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile If a requested multicast group is permitted the IGMP join report is forwarded as normal If a requested multicast group is denied the IGMP join report is dropped IGMP throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port the switch can take one of two actions either deny or replace If the action is set to deny any new IGMP join reports will be dropped If the action is set to replace the 3 169 3 Configuring the Switch switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group Note IGMP filtering and throttling only applies to dynamically learned multicast groups it does not apply to statically configured groups Enabling IGMP Filtering and Throttling To implement IGMP filtering and throttling on the switch you must first enable the feature globally and create IGMP profile numbers Co
81. by a symbol next to the Line i e session index number Example Console show users Username accounts Username Privilege Public Key admin 15 None guest 0 None steve 15 RSA Online users Line Username Idle time h m s Remote IP addr 0 console admin 0 14 14 i VTY 0 admin 0 00 00 192 168 1619 2 SSH 1 steve 0 00 06 192 168 1 19 Web online users Line Remote IP addr Username Idle time h m s 1 HTTP 192 168 1 19 admin 0 00 00 Console show version This command displays hardware and software version information for the system Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage See Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions on page 3 11 for detailed information on the items displayed by this command 4 62 Example System Management Commands 4 Console show version Unitl Serial number Service tag Hardware version Module A type Module B type Number of ports Main power status Redundant power status Agent master Unit ID Loader version Boot ROM version Operation code version Console S416000937 R01 1000BaseT 1000BaseT 26 up snot present NNNEB NNN arr H e Frame Size Commands Table 4 24 Frame Size Commands Command Function Mode Page jumbo frame Enables support for jumbo frames GC 4 63 jumbo frame This command enables support for jumbo frames Use t
82. command to specify the name of the policy map and then use the class command to configure policies for traffic that matches criteria defined in a class map A policy map can contain multiple class statements that can be applied to the same interface with the service policy command page 4 199 e You must create a Class Map page 4 195 before assigning it to a Policy Map Example This example creates a policy called rd_policy uses the class command to specify the previously defined rd_class uses the set command to classify the service that incoming packets will receive and then uses the police command to limit the average bandwidth to 100 000 Kbps the burst rate to 1522 bytes and configure the response to drop any violating packets Console config policy map rd _ policy Console config pmap class rd _ class Console config pmap c set ip dscp 3 Console config pmap c police 100000 1522 exceed action drop Console config pmap c class This command defines a traffic classification upon which a policy can act and enters Policy Map Class configuration mode Use the no form to delete a class map and return to Policy Map configuration mode Syntax no class class map name class map name Name of the class map Range 1 16 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Policy Map Configuration Command Usage Use the policy map command to specify a policy map and enter Policy Map configu
83. config interface ethernet 1 4 Console config if spanning tree mst port priority 0 Console config if spanning tree mst cost 50 Console config if VLAN Configuration IEEE 802 1Q VLANs In large networks routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains This switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage groups such as e mail or multicast groups used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN 3 122 VLAN Configuration 3 This s
84. data packets Late Collisions The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet FCS Errors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check This count does not include frames received with frame too long or frame too short error Excessive Collisions A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in full duplex mode Single Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Internal MAC Transmit Errors A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error Multiple Collision Frames A count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision Carrier Sense Errors The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame SQE Test Errors A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the PLS sublayer for a particular interface Frames Too Long A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size Deferred Transmissions
85. devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce 3 112 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to reconfigure when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device Admin Link Type The link type attached to this interface Point to Point A connection to exactly one other bridge Shared A connection to two or more bridges Auto The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point to point link or to shared media Web Click Spanning Tree STA Port Information or STA Trunk Information J STA Port Information Oper Oper Spanning STA Forward Designated Designated Designated Trunk Port Tree Status Transitions Cost Bridge Port Link ray Port Role Member Enabled Forwarding 1 32768 0012CFOBODOL 12 gt Disabled Designated Enabled Discarding 32768 0012CF0B0DO 128 2 gt Disabled Disabled 3 Discarding 32768 0012CFOBODOL 128 3 gt Disabled Disabled 4 Discarding 32768 0012CFOBODO P it Disabled Disabled 5 Enabled Discarding 32768 0012cF0B0D00 1285 Pointto Disabled Disabled Point zj Figure 3 66 Displaying Spanning Tree Port Information CLI
86. does not apply to multicast groups which have been statically assigned to a port IGMP snooping must be enabled to a allow a subscriber to dynamically join or leave an MVR group see ip igmp snooping on page 4 202 Note that only IGMP version 2 or 3 hosts can issue multicast join or leave messages Example The following configures one source port and several receiver ports on the switch enables immediate leave on one of the receiver ports and statically assigns a multicast group to another receiver port Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso le config interface ethernet 1 5 le config if mvr type source le config if exit le config interface ethernet 1 6 le config if mvr type receiver le config if mvr immediate le config if exit le config interface ethernet 1 7 le config if mvr type receiver le config if mvr group 225 0 0 5 le config if 4 220 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 show mvr This command shows information about the global MVR configuration settings when entered without any keywords the interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN using the interface keyword or the multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN using the members keyword Syntax show mvr interface interface members ip address e interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 port channel channel id Range 1 12 jp addres
87. dport ena no permit deny tcp any source address bitmask host source any destination address bitmask host destination source port sport ena destination port dport ena protocol number A specific protocol number Range 0 255 source Source IP address destination Destination IP address address bitmask Decimal number representing the address bits to match host Keyword followed by a specific IP address sport Protocol source port number Range 0 65535 dport Protocol destination port number Range 0 65535 end Upper bound of the protocol port range Range 0 65535 Default Setting None Command Mode Extended ACL Command Usage All new rules are appended to the end of the list e Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and then compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned Example This example accepts any incoming packets if the source address is within subnet 10 7 1 x For example if the rule is matched i e the rule 10 7 1 0 amp 255 255 255 0 equals the masked address 10 7 1 2 amp 255 255 255 0 the packet passes through Console config ext
88. event entries If the clock is not set the switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup Table 4 22 Time Commands Command Function Mode Page sntp client Accepts time from specified time servers GC 4 53 sntp server Specifies one or more time servers GC 4 54 sntp poll Sets the interval at which the client polls for time GC 4 55 show sntp Shows current SNTP configuration settings NE PE 4 55 clock timezone Sets the time zone for the switch s internal clock GC 4 56 calendar set Sets the system date and time PE 4 56 show calendar Displays the current date and time setting NE PE 4 57 sntp client This command enables SNTP client requests for time synchronization from NTP or SNTP time servers specified with the sntp servers command Use the no form to disable SNTP client requests Syntax no sntp client Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and times for log events Without SNTP the switch only records the time starting from the factory default set at the last bootup i e 00 00 00 Jan 1 2001 This command enables client time requests to time servers specified via the sntp servers command It issues time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command 4 53 4 Command Line Interface Example Console conf
89. for multicast filtering MVR receiver ports cannot be members of a trunk Receiver ports can belong to different VLANs but should not be configured as a member of the MVR VLAN IGMP snooping can be used to allow a receiver port to dynamically join or leave multicast groups within the MVR VLAN Multicast groups can also be statically assigned to a receiver port using the group keyword One or more interfaces may be configured as MVR source ports A source port is able to both receive and send data for multicast groups which it has joined through IGMP snooping or which have been statically assigned using the group keyword The IP address range from 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 is used for multicast streams MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast address range of 224 0 0 x Immediate leave applies only to receiver ports When enabled the receiver port is immediately removed from the multicast group identified in the leave message When immediate leave is disabled the switch follows the standard rules by sending a group specific query to the receiver port and waiting for a response to determine if there are any remaining subscribers for that multicast group before removing the port from the group list Using immediate leave can speed up leave latency but should only be enabled on a port attached to one multicast subscriber to avoid disrupting services to other group members attached to the same interface Immediate leave
90. for Management Access You create a list of up to 16 IP addresses or IP address groups that are allowed management access to the switch through the web interface SNMP or Telnet Command Usage The management interfaces are open to all IP addresses by default Once you add an entry to a filter list access to that interface is restricted to the specified addresses e If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid address the switch will reject the connection enter an event message in the system log and send a trap message to the trap manager IP address can be configured for SNMP web and Telnet access respectively Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses either individual addresses or address ranges e When entering addresses for the same group i e SNMP web or Telnet the switch will not accept overlapping address ranges When entering addresses for different groups the switch will accept overlapping address ranges 3 74 Access Control Lists 3 You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range You must delete the entire range and reenter the addresses You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address or by specifying both the start address and end address Command Attributes Web IP Filter Configures IP address es for the web group SNMP IP Filter Configures IP address es for the SNMP group Telnet IP Filter
91. for a response to determine if there are any remaining subscribers for that multicast group before removing the port from the group list Using immediate leave can speed up leave latency but should only be enabled on a port attached to one multicast subscriber to avoid disrupting services to other group members attached to the same interface Note that immediate leave does not apply to multicast groups which have been statically assigned to a port Command Attributes MVR Type The following interface types are supported Source An uplink port that can send and receive multicast data for the groups assigned to the MVR VLAN Receiver A subscriber port that can receive multicast data sent through the MVR VLAN Non MVR An interface that does not participate in the MVR VLAN This is the default type e Immediate Leave Configures the switch to immediately remove an interface from a multicast stream as soon as it receives a leave message for that group Trunk13 Shows if port is a trunk member 13 Port Information only 3 179 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click MVR Port or Trunk Configuration MVR Port Configuration Port MVR Type Immediate Leave Trunk 1 Non MVR v Enabled 2 Non MVR x Enabled 3 Non MVR x Enabled 4 Non MVR x Enabled 5 Non MVR x Enabled 6 Non MvR x Enabled 7 Non MVR x Enabled 8 Non MVR x Enabled 9 Non MVR v Enabled F
92. in other standard or private VLAN groups while preserving security and data isolation for normal traffic 4 Introduction System Defaults The switch s system defaults are provided in the configuration file Factory_Default_Config cfg To reset the switch defaults this file should be set as the startup configuration file page 3 19 The following table lists some of the basic system defaults Table 1 2 System Defaults Function Parameter Default Console Port Baud Rate 9600 Connection Data bits 8 Stop bits 1 Parity none Local Console Timeout 0 disabled Authentication Privileged Exec Level Username admin Password admin Normal Exec Level Username guest Password guest Enable Privileged Exec from Normal Exec Level Password super RADIUS Authentication Disabled TACACS Authentication Disabled 802 1X Port Authentication Disabled HTTPS Enabled SSH Disabled Port Security Disabled IP Filtering Disabled Web Management HTTP Server Enabled HTTP Port Number 80 HTTP Secure Server Enabled HTTP Secure Port Number 443 SNMP SNMP Agent Enabled Community Strings public read only private read write Traps Authentication traps enabled Link up down events enabled SNMP V3 View default view Group public read only private read write System Defaults A Table 1 2 System Default
93. in the capabilities list for any port e Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually required to solve a problem Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub 4 120 Interface Commands 4 Example The following example enables flow control on port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if flowcontrol Console config if no negotiation Console config if Related Commands negotiation 4 118 capabilities flowcontrol symmetric 4 119 shutdown This command disables an interface To restart a disabled interface use the no form Syntax no shutdown Default Setting All interfaces are enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command allows you to disable a port due to abnormal behavior e g excessive collisions and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved You may also want to disable a port for security reasons Example The following example disables port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if shutdown Console config if 4 121 4 Command Line Interface switchport broadcast packet rate This command configures broadcast storm control Use the no form to disable broadcast storm control Syntax switchport broadcast octet rate rate no switchport broadcast rate Threshold level as a
94. keys ip ssh server This command enables the Secure Shell SSH server on this switch Use the no form to disable this service Syntax no ip ssh server Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The SSH server supports up to four client sessions The maximum number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions 4 35 4 Command Line Interface The SSH server uses DSA or RSA for key exchange when the client first establishes a connection with the switch and then negotiates with the client to select either DES 56 bit or 3DES 168 bit for data encryption e You must generate the host key before enabling the SSH server Example Console ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa Console configure Console config ip ssh server Console config Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 38 show ssh 4 40 ip ssh timeout This command configures the timeout for the SSH server Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh timeout seconds no ip ssh timeout seconds The timeout for client response during SSH negotiation Range 1 120 Default Setting 10 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The timeout specifies the interval the switch will wait for a response from the client during the SSH negotiation phase Once an SSH session has been established the timeout for user input is controlle
95. link based on the capabilites command When auto negotiation is disabled you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed duplex and flowcontrol commands 4 119 4 Command Line Interface Example The following example configures Ethernet port 5 capabilities to 100half 100full and flow control Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if capabilities 100half Console config if capabilities 100full Console config if capabilities flowcontrol Console config if Related Commands negotiation 4 118 speed duplex 4 117 flowcontrol 4 120 flowcontrol This command enables flow control Use the no form to disable flow control Syntax no flowcontrol Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Flow control can eliminate frame loss by blocking traffic from end stations or segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill When enabled back pressure is used for half duplex operation and IEEE 802 3x for full duplex operation e To force flow control on or off with the flowcontrol or no flowcontrol command use the no negotiation command to disable auto negotiation on the selected interface When using the negotiation command to enable auto negotiation the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command To enable flow control under auto negotiation flowcontrol must be included
96. maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ Note Up to two copies of the system software i e the runtime firmware can be stored in the file directory on the switch The currently designated startup version of this file cannot be deleted Downloading System Software from a Server When downloading runtime code you can specify the destination file name to replace the current image or first download the file using a different name from the current runtime code file and then set the new file as the startup file Web Click System File Management Copy Operation Select tftp to file as the file transfer method enter the IP address of the TFTP server set the file type to opcode enter the file name of the software to download select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name then click Apply If you replaced the current firmware used for startup and want to start using the new operation code reboot the system via the System Reset menu Copy coc E Figure 3 9 Copy Firmware If you download to a new destination file go to the System File Set Start Up menu mark the operation code file used at startup and click Apply To start the new firmware reboot the system via the System Reset menu Set Start Up Name Type Startup Size bytes a Factory Defaut_Contg chy Contig F
97. mechanisms to synchronize time across the network The time servers operate in a hierarchical master slave configuration in order to synchronize local clocks within the subnet and to national time standards via wire or radio Out of Band Management Management of the network from a station not attached to the network Port Authentication See IEEE 802 1X Port Mirroring A method whereby data on a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for troubleshooting with a logic analyzer or RMON probe This allows data on the target port to be studied unobstructively Port Trunk Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies how to create a single high speed logical link that combines several lower speed physical links Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from uplink ports Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS compliant devices on the network Remote Monitoring RMON RMON provides comprehensive network monitoring capabilities It eliminates the polling required in standard SNMP and can set alarms on a variety of traffic conditions including specific error types Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP RSTP reduces the convergence time for network
98. no switchport broadcast config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if switchport broadcast packet rate 500 Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 2 Enabled 500 packets second Disabled Disabled 100000 Kbits per second Disabled 100000 Kbits per second Hybrid Enabled All frames 1 0 Disabled 1 u NONE NONE NONE 4 116 4 122 4 122 4 125 Port Configuration 3 Configuring Port Mirroring You can mirror traffic from any source port to a target port for real time analysis You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the PeH eomess target port and study the traffic crossing the Source i Single source port in a completely unobtrusive manner port s target port Command Usage e Monitor port speed should match or exceed source port speed otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port All mirror sessions must share the same destination port When mirroring port traffic the target port must be included in the same VLAN as the source port Command Attributes Mirror Sessions Displays a list of current mirror sessions Source Port The port whose traffic will be monitored Range 1 26 50 Type Allows you to select which traffic to mirror to the target port Rx receive or Tx transmit Default Rx Target Port The port that will mirror the traffic on the source port Range 1 26 50 Web Click Port Mir
99. of the spanning tree Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage The MST region name page 4 152 and revision number are used to designate a unique MST region A bridge i e spanning tree compliant device such as this switch can only belong to one MST region And all bridges in the same region must be configured with the same MST instances Example Console config mstp revision 1 Console config mstp Related Commands name 4 152 max hops This command configures the maximum number of hops in the region before a BPDU is discarded Use the no form to restore the default Syntax max hops hop number hop number Maximum hop number for multiple spanning tree Range 1 40 Default Setting 20 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage An MSTI region is treated as a single node by the STP and RSTP protocols Therefore the message age for BPDUs inside an MSTI region is never changed However each spanning tree instance within a region and the internal spanning tree IST that connects these instances use a hop count to 4 153 4 Command Line Interface specify the maximum number of bridges that will propagate a BPDU Each bridge decrements the hop count by one before passing on the BPDU When the hop count reaches zero the message is dropped Example Console config mstp max hops 30 Console config mstp spanning tree spanning disabled
100. only displayed for the CLI e Admin status Shows if this interface is enabled e Path cost This parameter is used by the STA to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm If the path cost for all ports on a switch is the same the port with the highest priority i e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Algorithm is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with the lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Designated root The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device Fast forwarding This field provides the same information as Admin Edge port and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products Admin Edge Port You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for
101. packet to the client before it times out the authentication session dot1x port control Sets dot1x mode for a port interface IC 4 82 dot1x operation mode Allows single or multiple hosts on an dot1x port IC 4 83 dot1x re authenticate Forces re authentication on specific ports PE 4 84 dot1x re authentication Enables re authentication for all ports IC 4 84 dot1x timeout quiet period Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max IC 4 84 Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client dot1x timeout re authperiod Sets the time period after which a connected client must IC 4 85 be re authenticated dot1x timeout tx period Sets the time period during an authentication session that IC 4 85 the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet show dot1x Shows all dot1x related information PE 4 86 dot1x system auth control This command enables 802 1X port authentication globally on the switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax no dotx system auth control Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config Console config dotlx system auth control 4 81 4 Command Line Interface dot1x default This command sets all configurable dot1x global and port settings to their default values Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dotlx default Console config dot1x max req This comm
102. policy map command to designate a policy name for a specific manner in which ingress traffic will be handled and enter the Policy Map configuration mode 5 Use the class command to identify the class map and enter Policy Map Class configuration mode A policy map can contain multiple class statements 6 Use the set command to modify the QoS value for matching traffic class and use the policer command to monitor the average flow and burst rate and drop any traffic that exceeds the specified rate or just reduce the DSCP service level for traffic exceeding the specified rate 7 Use the service policy command to assign a policy map to a specific interface Notes 1 You can configure up to 16 rules per Class Map You can also include multiple classes in a Policy Map 2 You should create a Class Map page 4 194 before creating a Policy Map page 4 195 Otherwise you will not be able to specify a Class Map with the class command page 4 196 after entering Policy Map Configuration mode 4 193 4 Command Line Interface class map This command creates a class map used for matching packets to the specified class and enters Class Map configuration mode Use the no form to delete a class map and return to Global configuration mode Syntax no class map class map name match any match any Match any condition within a class map class map name Name of the class map Range 1 16 characters Default Setting None Command
103. port Specifies the port to be used by the Telnet interface GC 4 29 ip telnet server Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from Telnet GC 4 30 ip telnet port This command specifies the TCP port number used by the Telnet interface Use the no form to use the default port Syntax ip telnet port port number no ip telnet port port number The TCP port to be used by the browser interface Range 1 65535 Default Setting 23 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip telnet port 123 Console config Related Commands ip telnet server 4 33 4 32 System Management Commands 4 ip telnet server This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from Telnet Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip telnet server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip telnet server Console config Related Commands ip telnet port 4 32 Secure Shell Commands The Berkley standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix systems Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows and other environments These tools including commands such as rlogin remote login rsh remote shell and rcp remote copy are not secure from hostile attacks The Secure Shell SSH includes server client applications intended as a secure replacement for the older Berkley remot
104. privacy is selected the DES 56 bit algorithm is used for data encryption For additional information on the notification messages supported by this switch see Supported Notification Messages on page 5 13 Also note that the authentication link up and link down messages are legacy traps and must therefore be enabled in conjunction with the snmp server enable traps command page 4 106 Example Console config snmp server group r d v3 auth write daily Console config 17 No view is defined 18 Maps to the defaultview 4 111 4 Command Line Interface show snmp group Four default groups are provided SNMPv1 read only access and read write access and SNMPv2c read only access and read write access Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show snmp group Group Name r d Security Model v3 Read View defaultview Write View daily Notify View none Storage Type permanent Row Status active Group Name public Security Model v1 Read View defaultview Write View none Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active Group Name public Security Model v2c Read View defaultview Write View none Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active Group Name private Security Model vl Read View defaultview Write View defaultview Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active Group Name private Security Model v2c Read View defa
105. queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round Robin 3 147 Queue Scheduling Configures Weighted Round Robin queueing 3 148 IP Precedence DSCP Priority Globally selects IP Precedence or DSCP Priority or disables 3 149 Status both IP Precedence Priority Sets IP Type of Service priority mapping the precedence tag to 3 150 a class of service value 3 Configuring the Switch Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page IP DSCP Priority Sets IP Differentiated Services Code Point priority mapping a 3 152 DSCP tag to a class of service value IP Port Prioriey Status Globally enables or disables IP Port Priority 3 153 IP Port Priority Sets TCP UDP port priority defining the socket number and 3 153 associated class of service value QoS 3 154 DiffServ 3 154 Class Map Sets Class Maps 3 155 Policy Map Sets Policy Maps 3 158 Service Policy Defines service policy settings for ports 3 161 IGMP Snooping 3 162 IGMP Configuration Enables multicast filtering configures parameters for multicast 3 163 query IGMP Filter Configuration Enables IGMP filtering and throttling for the switch creates filter 3 159 profile numbers IGMP Immediate Leave Enables the immediate leave function 3 164 Multicast Router Displays the ports that are attached to a neighboring multicast 3 165 Port Information router for each VLAN ID Static Multicast Router Port Ass
106. rate i e kilobits per second Range 500 262143 Default Setting Enabled for all ports Packet rate limit 500 pps Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e When broadcast traffic exceeds the specified threshold packets above that threshold are dropped e This command can enable or disable broadcast storm control for the selected interface However the specified threshold value applies to all ports on the switch Example The following shows how to configure broadcast storm control at 500 packets per second Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if switchport broadcast packet rate 500 Console config if clear counters This command clears statistics on an interface Syntax clear counters interface interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 26 50 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting None 4 122 Interface Commands 4 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Statistics are only initialized for a power reset This command sets the base value for displayed statistics to zero for the current management session However if you log out and back into the management interface the statistics displayed will show the absolute value accumulated since the last power reset Example The following example clears statistics on port 5 Console clear counters ethernet 1 5 Cons
107. respectively Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses either individual addresses or address ranges When entering addresses for the same group i e SNMP web or Telnet the switch will not accept overlapping address ranges When entering addresses for different groups the switch will accept overlapping address ranges e You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range You must delete the entire range and reenter the addresses e You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address or by specifying both the start address and end address Example This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses Console config management all client 192 168 1 19 Console config management all client 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Console config show management This command displays the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch through various protocols Syntax show management all client http client snmp client telnet client all client Adds IP address es to the SNMP web and Telnet groups http client Adds IP address es to the web group snmp client Adds IP address es to the SNMP group telnet client Adds IP address es to the Telnet group Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 28 System Management Commands 4 Example Console show management all client Management IP Filter HTTP Client Star
108. router switch e Multicast IP The IP address for a specific multicast service e Port or Trunk Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router switch 3 168 Multicast Filtering 3 Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Member Port Table Specify the interface attached to a multicast service via an IGMP enabled switch or multicast router indicate the VLAN that will propagate the multicast service specify the multicast IP address and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply IGMP Member Port Table IGMP Member Port List New Static IGMP Member Port VLAN1 224 1 1 12 Unitt Portt Interface Port VLANID 1 fx lt lt Add Multicast IP Port el x Trunk Figure 3 102 IGMP Member Port Table CLI This example assigns a multicast address to VLAN 1 and then displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224 1 1 12 ethernet 1 12 4 202 Console config exit Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 4 205 VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type 1 224 1 1 12 Eth1 12 USER 1 224 P P Eth1 12 IGMP Console IGMP Filtering and Throttling In certain switch applications the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users For example an IP TV service based on a specific subscription plan The IGMP filtering feature fulfills this requirement
109. same VLAN If the DHCP snooping is globally disabled all dynamic bindings are removed from the binding table Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client The port s through which the switch submits a client request to the DHCP server must be configured as trusted Note that the switch will not add a dynamic entry for itself to the binding table when it receives an ACK message from a DHCP server Also when the switch sends out DHCP client packets for itself no filtering takes place However when the switch receives any messages from a DHCP server any packets received from untrusted ports are dropped DHCP Snooping Configuration Command Attributes DHCP Snooping Status Enables or disables DHCP snooping globally DHCP Snooping MAC Address Verification Enables or disables MAC address verification DHCP packets will be dropped if the source MAC address in the Ethernet header of the packet is not same as the client s hardware address in the DHCP packet Web Click DHCP Snooping Configuration DHCP Snooping Configuration DHCP Snooping Status Cl Enabled DHCP Snooping MAC Address Verification M Enabled Figure 3 114 DHCP Snooping Configuration CLI This example first enables DHCP Snooping and then enables DHCP Snooping MAC Address Verification Console config ip dhcp snooping 4 231 Console config ip dhcp snooping verify mac address 4 235 Console config
110. server 4 77 Port Security Configures secure addresses for a port 4 79 Port Authentication Configures host authentication on specific ports using 802 1X 4 81 Authentication Sequence Table 4 28 Authentication Sequence Command Function Mode Page authentication login Defines logon authentication method and precedence GC 4 71 authentication enable Defines the authentication method and precedence for GC 4 72 command mode change 4 70 Authentication Commands 4 authentication login This command defines the login authentication method and precedence Use the no form to restore the default Syntax authentication login local radius tacacs no authentication login local Use local password e radius Use RADIUS server password tacacs Use TACACS server password Default Setting Local Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level for each user name and password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server e You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to
111. spanning tree link type auto Automatically derived from the duplex mode setting point to point Point to point link e shared Shared medium Default Setting auto Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Specify a point to point link if the interface can only be connected to exactly one other bridge or a shared link if it can be connected to two or more bridges e When automatic detection is selected the switch derives the link type from the duplex mode A full duplex interface is considered a point to point link while a half duplex interface is assumed to be on a shared link 4 157 4 Command Line Interface e RSTP only works on point to point links between two bridges If you designate a port as a shared link RSTP is forbidden Since MSTP is an extension of RSTP this same restriction applies Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree link type point to point spanning tree mst cost This command configures the path cost on a spanning instance in the Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mst instance_id cost cost no spanning tree mst instance_id cost instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 no leading zeroes cost Path cost for an interface Range 1 200 000 000 The recommended range is Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast E
112. ssh crypto zeroize Clear the host key from RAM PE 4 39 ip ssh save host key Saves the host key from RAM to flash memory PE 4 39 disconnect Terminates a line connection PE 4 18 show ip ssh Displays the status of the SSH server and the configured values PE 4 40 for authentication timeout and retries show ssh Displays the status of current SSH sessions PE 4 40 show public key Shows the public key for the specified user or for the host PE 4 41 show users Shows SSH users including privilege level and public key type PE 4 61 The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key authentication If password authentication is specified by the SSH client then the password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS remote authentication server as specified by the authentication login command on page 4 71 If public key authentication is specified by the client then you must configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the following section Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password authentication you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch and enable the SSH server To use the SSH server complete these steps 1 4 34 Generate a Host Key Pair Use the ip ssh crypto host key generate command to create a host public private key pair Provide Host Public Key to Clients Many SSH client programs automatically impo
113. switch connections Flow control should also be enabled to control network traffic during periods of congestion and prevent the loss of packets when port buffer thresholds are exceeded The switch supports flow control based on the IEEE 802 3x standard Description of Software Features 4 Rate Limiting This feature controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into the network Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Port Mirroring The switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity Port Trunking Ports can be combined into an aggregate connection Trunks can be manually set up or dynamically configured using IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP The additional ports dramatically increase the throughput across any connection and provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk should fail The switch supports up to 32 trunks Broadcast Storm Control Broadcast suppression prevents broadcast traffic from overwhelming the network When enabled on a port the level of broadcast traffic passing through the port is restricted If broadcast traffic rises
114. that keyword is enabled The snmp server enable traps command is used in conjunction with the snmp server host command Use the snmp server host command to specify which host or hosts receive SNMP notifications In order to send notifications you must configure at least one snmp server host command e The authentication link up and link down traps are legacy notifications and therefore when used for SNMP Version 3 hosts they must be enabled in 4 106 SNMP Commands 4 conjunction with the corresponding entries in the Notify View assigned by the snmp server group command page 4 110 Example Console config snmp server enable traps link up down Console config Related Commands snmp server host 4 104 snmp server engine id This command configures an identification string for the SNMPv3 engine Use the no form to restore the default Syntax snmp server engine id local remote ip address engineid string no snmp server engine id local remote ip address local Specifies the SNMP engine on this switch remote Specifies an SNMP engine on a remote device jp address The Internet address of the remote device engineid string String identifying the engine ID Range 9 64 hexadecimal characters Default Setting A unique engine ID is automatically generated by the switch based on its MAC address Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage An SNMP engine is an indepen
115. the multicast groups to filter and set the access mode Command Usage e Each profile has only one access mode either permit or deny When the access mode is set to permit IGMP join reports are processed when a multicast group falls within the controlled range When the access mode is set to 3 172 Multicast Filtering 3 deny IGMP join reports are only processed when a multicast group is not in the controlled range Command Attributes Profile ID Selects an existing profile number to configure After selecting an ID number click the Query button to display the current configuration Access Mode Sets the access mode of the profile either permit or deny Default Deny New Multicast Address Range List Specifies multicast groups to include in the profile Specify a multicast group range by entering a start and end IP address Specify a single multicast group by entering the same IP address for the start and end of the range Click the Add button to add a range to the current list Current Multicast Address Range List Lists multicast groups currently included in the profile Select an entry and click the Remove button to delete it from the list Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Filter Profile Configuration Select the profile number you want to configure then click Query to display the current settings Specify the access mode for the profile and then add multicast groups to the profile list Click
116. the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section mean interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Hello Time Interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds the root device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Designated Root The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device Root Port The number of the port on this switch that is closest to the root This switch communicates with the root device through this port If there is no root port then this switch has been accepted as the root device of the Spanning Tree network Root Path Cost The path cost from the root port on this switch to the root device e Configuration Changes The number of times the Spanning Tree has been reconfigured e Last Topology Change Time since the Spanning Tree was last
117. the no form to disable fast forwarding Syntax no spanning tree portfast Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 156 Spanning Tree Commands 4 Command Usage e This command is used to enable disable the fast spanning tree mode for the selected port In this mode ports skip the Discarding and Learning states and proceed straight to Forwarding Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can be passed through the spanning tree state changes more quickly than allowed by standard convergence time Fast forwarding can achieve quicker convergence for end node workstations and servers and also overcome other STA related timeout problems Remember that fast forwarding should only be enabled for ports connected to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or for an end node device This command is the same as spanning tree edge port and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products Note that this command may be removed for future software versions Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if bridge group 1 portfast Console config if Related Commands spanning tree edge port 4 156 spanning tree link type This command configures the link type for Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree link type auto point to point shared no
118. the switch s permanent flash memory for all levels up to the specified level For example if level 3 is specified all messages from level 0 to level 3 will be logged to flash Range 0 7 Default 3 Table 3 3 Logging Levels Level Severity Name Description 7 Debug Debugging messages 6 Informational Informational messages only 5 Notice Normal but significant condition such as cold start 4 Warning Warning conditions e g return false unexpected return 3 Error Error conditions e g invalid input default used 2 Critical Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted 1 Alert Immediate action needed 0 Emergency System unusable There are only Level 2 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release e RAM Level Limits log messages saved to the switch s temporary RAM memory for all levels up to the specified level For example if level 7 is specified all messages from level 0 to level 7 will be logged to RAM Range 0 7 Default 6 Note The Flash Level must be equal to or less than the RAM Level 3 26 Basic Configuration 3 Web Click System Log System Logs Specify System Log Status set the level of event messages to be logged to RAM and flash memory then click Apply System Logs Figure 3 17 System Logs CLI Enable system logging and then specify the level of messages to be logged to RAM and flash
119. the switch i e Authenticator responds with an EAPOL identity request The client provides its identity such as a user name in an EAPOL response to the switch which it forwards to the RADIUS server The RADIUS server verifies the client identity and sends an access challenge back to the client The EAP packet from the RADIUS server contains not only the challenge but the authentication method to be used The client can reject the authentication method and request another depending on the configuration of the client software and the RADIUS server The authentication method must be MD5 The client responds to the appropriate method with its credentials such as a password or certificate The RADIUS server verifies the client credentials and responds with an accept or reject packet If authentication is successful the switch allows the client to access the network Otherwise network access is denied and the port remains blocked The operation of 802 1X on the switch requires the following e The switch must have an IP address assigned RADIUS authentication must be enabled on the switch and the IP address of the RADIUS server specified 802 1X must be enabled globally for the switch Each switch port that will be used must be set to dot1X Auto mode Each client that needs to be authenticated must have dot1X client software installed and properly configured The RADIUS server and 802 1X client support EAP The switch onl
120. to assign to a VLAN using the protocol vian protocol group command General Configuration mode 3 Then map the protocol for each interface to the appropriate VLAN using the protocol vian protocol group command Interface Configuration mode protocol vlan protocol group Configuring Groups This command creates a protocol group or to add specific protocols to a group Use the no form to remove a protocol group Syntax protocol vian protocol group group id add remove frame type frame protocol type protocol no protocol vian protocol group group id group id Group identifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 frame Frame type used by this protocol Options ethernet rfc_1042 Ilc_other 1 SNAP frame types are not supported by this switch due to hardware limitations 4 181 4 Command Line Interface protocol Protocol type The only option for the Ilc_other frame type is ipx_raw The options for all other frames types include ip arp rarp and user defined 0801 FFFF hexadecimal Default Setting No protocol groups are configured Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following creates protocol group 1 and specifies Ethernet frames with IP and ARP protocol types Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame type ethernet protocol type ip Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame type ethernet protocol type arp Console config proto
121. to disable this function Syntax no ip dhcp snooping information option Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage DHCP provides a relay mechanism for sending information about the switch and its DHCP clients to the DHCP server Known as DHCP Option 82 it allows compatible DHCP servers to use the information when assigning IP addresses or to set other services or policies for clients When the DHCP Snooping Information Option is enabled clients can be 4 235 4 Command Line Interface identified by the switch port to which they are connected rather than just their MAC address DHCP client server exchange messages are then forwarded directly between the server and client without having to flood them to the entire VLAN DHCP snooping must be enabled on the switch for the DHCP Option 82 information to be inserted into packets Example This example enables the DHCP Snooping Information Option Console config ip dhcp snooping information option Console config ip dhcp snooping information policy This command sets the DHCP snooping information option policy for DHCP client packets that include Option 82 information Syntax ip dhcp snooping information policy lt drop keep replace gt drop Discards the Option 82 information in a packet and then floods it to the entire VLAN keep Retains the client s DHCP information replace Overwrites the DHCP client pack
122. to permit IGMP join reports are processed when a multicast group falls within the controlled range When the access mode is set to deny IGMP join reports are only processed when a multicast group is not in the controlled range Example Console config ip igmp profile 19 Console config igmp profile permit Console config igmp profile range This command specifies multicast group addresses for a profile Use the no form to delete addresses from a profile Syntax no range ow ip address high ip address low ip address A valid IP address of a multicast group or start of a group range high ip address A valid IP address for the end of a multicast group range Default Setting None Command Mode IGMP Profile Configuration Command Usage Enter this command multiple times to specify more than one multicast address or address range for a profile Example Console Console Console Console config ip igmp profile 19 config igmp profile range 239 1 1 1 config igmp profile range 239 2 3 1 239 2 3 100 config igmp profile ip igmp filter Interface Configuration This command assigns an IGMP filtering profile to an interface on the switch Use the no form to remove a profile from an interface Syntax no ip igmp filter profile number profile number An IGMP filter profile number Range 1 4294967295 Default Setting None 4 213 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Int
123. to the selected DSCP Priority value Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority Note IP DSCP settings apply to all interfaces Web Click Priority IP DSCP Priority Select an entry from the DSCP table enter a value in the Class of Service Value field then click Apply IP DSCP Priority DSCP Priority Table Class of Service Value 0 7 Restore Default Figure 3 91 Mapping IP DSCP Priority Values 3 152 Class of Service Configuration 3 CLI The following example globally enables DSCP Priority service on the switch maps DSCP value 0 to CoS value 1 on port 1 and then displays the DSCP Priority settings Console config map ip dscp 4 189 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 116 Console config if map ip dscp 1 cos 0 4 190 Console config if end Console show map ip dscp ethernet 1 1 4 191 DSCP mapping status disabled Port DSCP COS Eth 1 1 0 0 Eth 1 1 pi 0 Eth 1 1 2 0 Eth 1 1 3 0 Eth 1 1 61 0 Eth 1 1 62 0 Eth 1 1 63 0 Console Mapping specific values for IP DSCP is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch Mapping IP Port Priority You can also map network applications to Class of Service values based on the IP port number i e TCP UDP port number in the frame header Some of the more common TCP service ports include HTTP 80 FTP 21 Telnet 23 a
124. topology changes to about 10 of that required by the older IEEE 802 1D STP standard Glossary 4 Glossary Secure Shell SSH A secure replacement for remote access functions including Telnet SSH can authenticate users with a cryptographic key and encrypt data connections between management clients and the switch Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network management services Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a Network Time Protocol NTP server Updates can be requested from a specific NTP server or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP servers Spanning Tree Algorithm STA A technology that checks your network for any loops A loop can often occur in complicated or backup linked network systems Spanning Tree detects and directs data along the shortest available path maximizing the performance and efficiency of the network Telnet Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over TCPIIP Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TACACS TACACS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to TACACS compliant devices on the network Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP Protocol suite that includes TCP as the primary transport pro
125. untagged member Acceptable Frame Type Sets the interface to accept all frame types including tagged or untagged frames or only tagged frames When set to receive all frame types any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN Options All Tagged Default All Ingress Filtering Determines how to process frames tagged for VLANs for which the ingress port is not a member Ingress Filtering is always enabled Default Enabled Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames Ifa port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be discarded Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames such as GVRP or STP However they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames such as GMRP Mode Indicates VLAN membership mode for an interface Default Hybrid 1Q Trunk Specifies a port as an end point for a VLAN trunk A trunk is a direct link between two switches so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN Note that frames belonging to the port s default VLAN i e associated with the PVID are also transmitted as tagged frames Hybrid Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To add a trunk to the selected VLAN use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page 3 132 Configuring IEEE 802 1 Tunneling lt 3 Web
126. version Boot ROM version Operation code version ooor ooo FOO Nou Console 3 12 Basic Configuration 3 Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities The Bridge MIB includes extensions for managed devices that support Multicast Filtering Traffic Classes and Virtual LANs You can access these extensions to display default settings for the key variables Field Attributes Extended Multicast Filtering Services This switch does not support the filtering of individual multicast addresses based on GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol Traffic Classes This switch provides mapping of user priorities to multiple traffic classes Refer to Class of Service Configuration on page 3 144 e Static Entry Individual Port This switch allows static filtering for unicast and multicast addresses Refer to Setting Static Addresses on page 3 99 e VLAN Learning This switch uses Shared VLAN Learning SVL where all VLANs share the same address table Configurable PVID Tagging This switch allows you to override the default Port VLAN ID PVID used in frame tags and egress status VLAN Tagged or Untagged on each port Refer to VLAN Configuration on page 3 122 e Local VLAN Capable This switch does not support multiple local bridges outside of the scope of 802 1Q defined VLANs e GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP allows network devices to register endstations with
127. will be eight bytes larger than the size specified because the switch adds header information count Number of packets to send Range 1 16 default 5 Default Setting This command has no default for the host Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage e Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be reached e Following are some results of the ping command Normal response The normal response occurs in one to ten seconds depending on network traffic Destination does not respond If the host does not respond a timeout appears in ten seconds Destination unreachable The gateway for this destination indicates that the destination is unreachable Network or host unreachable The gateway found no corresponding entry in the route table e Press lt Esc gt to stop pinging 4 226 Example IP Source Guard Commands 4 PING to 10 1 0 response time response time response time response time response time Console Console ping 10 1 0 9 Type ESC to abort 9 by 5 32 byte payload ICMP packets timeout is 5 seconds 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms Ping statistics for 10 1 0 9 5 packets transmitted 5 packets received 100 0 packets lost Approximate round trip times Minimum 10 ms Maximum 20 ms Average 10 ms 0 Related Commands interface 4 116 IP Source Guard Commands IP Source Guard is a security feature that filters IP traff
128. with the new one Example Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if mac access group jerry in Console config if Related Commands show mac access list 4 97 show mac access group This command shows the ports assigned to MAC ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac access group Interface ethernet 1 5 MAC access list M5 in Console Related Commands mac access group 4 98 4 98 Access Control List Commands 4 ACL Information Table 4 36 ACL Information Command Function Mode Page show access list Show all ACLs and associated rules PE 4 99 show access group Shows the ACLs assigned to each port PE 4 99 show access list This command shows all ACLs and associated rules as well as all the user defined masks Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Once the ACL is bound to an interface i e the ACL is active the order in which the rules are displayed is determined by the associated mask Example Console show access list IP standard access list david permit host 10 1 1 21 permit 168 92 16 0 255 255 240 0 IP extended access list bob permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any destination port 80 80 IP access list jerry permit any host 00 30 29 94 34 de ethertype 800 800 IP extended access list A6 permit any any Console show access group This command shows the port as
129. 0 LACP 3 82 4 132 static 3 81 4 131 U upgrading software 3 18 user password 3 46 4 25 4 26 Index 4 V VLANs 3 122 3 142 3 144 4 163 802 1Q tunnel mode 3 138 adding static members 3 129 3 131 4 173 creating 3 128 4 168 description 3 122 3 144 displaying basic information 3 126 4 164 displaying port members 3 126 4 175 egress mode 3 132 4 170 interface configuration 3 132 4 171 4 174 private 3 141 3 142 4 179 protocol 4 181 Ww Web interface access requirements 3 1 configuration buttons 3 3 home page 3 2 menu list 3 4 panel display 3 3 Networks TECHNICAL SUPPORT From U S A and Canada 24 hours a day 7 days a week Phn 800 SMC 4 YOU 949 679 8000 Fax 949 502 3400 ENGLISH Technical Support information available at www smc com FRENCH Informations Support Technique sur www smc com DEUTSCH Technischer Support und weitere Information unter www smc com SPANISH En www smc com Ud podra encontrar la informacion relativa a servicios de soporte t cnico DUTCH Technische ondersteuningsinformatie beschikbaar op www smc com PORTUGUES Informa es sobre Suporte T cnico em www smc com SWEDISH Information om Teknisk Support finns tillg ngligt pa www smc com INTERNET E mail address techsupport smc com Driver updates http www smc com index cfm action tech_support_drivers_downloads World Wide Web http www smc com 149100036100A R01 20 Mason Irvine CA 92618
130. 1 32 Default Setting Shows both global and interface specific configuration Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show gvrp configuration ethernet 1 6 Eth 1 6 GVRP configuration Enabled Console 4 165 A Command Line Interface garp timer This command sets the values for the join leave and leaveall timers Use the no form to restore the timers default values Syntax garp timer join leave leaveall timer_value no garp timer join leave leaveall join leave leaveall Which timer to set e timer_value Value of timer Ranges join 20 1000 centiseconds leave 60 3000 centiseconds leaveall 500 18000 centiseconds Default Setting e join 20 centiseconds e leave 60 centiseconds e leaveall 1000 centiseconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP and GMRP to register or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN The default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data rate These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties with GMRP or GVRP registration deregistration e Timer values are applied to GVRP for all the ports on all VLANs Timer values must meet the following restrictions leave gt 2 x join leaveall gt leave Note Set GVRP timers on all Layer 2 dev
131. 1 cos 0 Console config if show map ip dscp This command shows the IP DSCP priority map Syntax show map ip dscp interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 26 50 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 191 4 Command Line Interface Example Eth Eth Eth 1 Console DSCP COS 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 61 0 62 0 63 0 Console show map ip dscp ethernet 1 1 DSCP mapping status disabled Related Commands map ip dscp Global Configuration 4 189 map ip dscp Interface Configuration 4 190 Quality of Service Commands The commands described in this section are used to configure Differentiated Services DiffServ classification criteria and service policies You can classify traffic based on access lists IP Precedence or DSCP values or VLANs Using access lists allows you select traffic based on Layer 2 Layer 3 or Layer 4 information contained in each packet Note Due to a chip limitation IP source guard and Quality of Service only for IP related QoS function cannot be enabled at the same time Thus if the user has already enabled the IP source guard function it needs to be disabled first in order for the QoS function to work and vice versa 4 192 Quality of Service Commands 4 Table 4 66 Quality of Service Commands Command F
132. 130 VLAN Configuration 3 Figure 3 75 Configuring a VLAN Static Table CLI The following example adds tagged and untagged ports to VLAN 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 116 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged 4 173 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 untagged Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 13 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged Adding Static Members to VLANs Port Index Use the VLAN Static Membership by Port menu to assign VLAN groups to the selected interface as a tagged member Command Attributes Interface Port or trunk identifier Member VLANs for which the selected interface is a tagged member Non Member VLANs for which the selected interface is not a tagged member Web Open VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static Membership by Port Select an interface from the scroll down box Port or Trunk Click Query to display membership information for the interface Select a VLAN ID and then click Add to add the interface as a tagged member or click Remove to remove the interface After configuring VLAN membership for each interface click Apply VLAN Static Membership by Port Interface Port e1 yl OTrunk x Member Non Member VLAN 1 VLAN 4093 lt lt Add vana MANS VLANG v Figure 3 76 VLAN Static Membershi
133. 162943253281 8915045306393916643 steve 192 168 1 19 4 Set the Optional Parameters Set other optional parameters including the authentication timeout the number of retries and the server key size 5 Enable SSH Service Use the ip ssh server command to enable the SSH server on the switch 6 Configure Challenge Response Authentication When an SSH client attempts to contact the switch the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key and encryption method Only clients that have a private key corresponding to the public keys stored on the switch can gain access The following exchanges take place during this process a The client sends its public key to the switch b The switch compares the client s public key to those stored in memory c Ifa match is found the switch uses the public key to encrypt a random sequence of bytes and sends this string to the client d The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes and sends the decrypted bytes back to the switch e The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it sent If the two sets match this means that the client s private key corresponds to an authorized public key and the client is authenticated Note To use SSH with only password authentication the host public key must still be given to the client either during initial connection or manually entered into the known host file However you do not need to configure the client s
134. 1Q Tunnel and a tunnel uplink port to 802 1Q Tunnel Uplink Set the TPID of the ports if the client is using a non standard ethertype to identify 802 1Q tagged frames Click Apply 802 1Q Tunnel Port Configuration Port Mode a 1 None x 2 None x 3 None 4 None ha 5 None x 6 None x 7 None 8 None x 9 None Figure 3 79 Tunnel Port Configuration 3 139 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example sets port 1 to tunnel access mode indicates that the TPID used for 802 1Q tagged frames is 9100 hexadecimal and sets port 2 to tunnel uplink mode he dotlq tunne oo he dotlq tunne 00 dotlq tunne 00 dotlq tunne oo dotliq tunne 00 dotliq tunne 00 dotlq tunne oo x Xe HOHCHOHOCOHOH ON Tx OX TX TK SX Momom aom HMM fo x The dotlq tunne 0x8100 Console 1 mode mode mode mode mode mode mode mode of of of of of of of of Current double tagged status the the the the the the the the Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport dotlq tunnel mode access Console config if switchport dotlq tunnel tpid 9100 Console config if interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if switchport dotlq tunnel mode uplink Console config if end Console show dotlq tunnel of the system is Enabled set set set set set set set set
135. 2004 Console System Status Commands Table 4 23 System Status Commands Command Function Mode Page show startup config Displays the contents of the configuration file stored in flash PE 4 57 memory that is used to start up the system show running config Displays the configuration data currently in use PE 4 59 show system Displays system information NE PE 4 61 show users Shows all active console and Telnet sessions including user NE PE 4 61 name idle time and IP address of Telnet clients show version Displays version information for the system NE PE 4 62 show startup config This command displays the configuration file stored in non volatile memory that is used to start up the system Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 57 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage Use this command in conjunction with the show running config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non volatile memory e This command displays settings for key command modes Each mode group is separated by symbols and includes the configuration mode command and corresponding commands This command displays the following information SNMP community strings Users names and access levels VLAN database VLAN ID name and state VLAN configuration settings for each interface IP address configured for the switch
136. 211 ip igmp profile Sets a profile number and enters IGMP filter profile GC 4 212 configuration mode permit deny Sets a profile access mode to permit or deny IPC 4 212 range Specifies one or a range of multicast addresses for a profile IPC 4 213 ip igmp filter Assigns an IGMP filter profile to an interface IC 4 213 ip igmp max groups Specifies an IGMP throttling number for an interface IC 4 214 ip igmp max groups action Sets the IGMP throttling action for an interface IC 4 215 show ip igmp filter Displays the IGMP filtering status PE 4 215 show ip igmp profile Displays IGMP profiles and settings PE 4 216 show ip igmp throttle Displays the IGMP throttling setting for interfaces PE 4 216 interface ip igmp filter Global Configuration This command globally enables IGMP filtering and throttling on the switch Use the no form to disable the feature Syntax no ip igmp filter Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage IGMP filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port An IGMP filter profile can contain one or more or a range of multicast addresses but only one profile can be assigned to a port When enabled IGMP join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile If a requested multicast group is permitted the IGMP join report is forwarded as normal If a requested multicast
137. 25 0 0 1 ACTIVE eth1 1 d eth1 2 s 225 0 0 2 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 3 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 4 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 5 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 6 INACTIVE None 2250 0 7 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 8 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 9 INACTIVE None 225 00410 INACTIVE None Console 3 178 Multicast Filtering 3 Configuring MVR Interface Status Each interface that participates in the MVR VLAN must be configured as an MVR source port or receiver port If only one subscriber attached to an interface is receiving multicast services you can enable the immediate leave function Command Usage One or more interfaces may be configured as MVR source ports e MVR receiver ports cannot be members of a trunk Receiver ports can belong to different VLANs but should not be configured as a member of the MVR VLAN IGMP snooping can be used to allow a source port or receiver port to dynamically join or leave multicast groups within the MVR VLAN using the standard rules for multicast filtering Multicast groups can also be statically assigned to a source port or receiver port see Assigning Static Multicast Groups to Interfaces on page 3 180 Immediate leave applies only to receiver ports When enabled the receiver port is immediately removed from the multicast group identified in the leave message When immediate leave is disabled the switch follows the standard rules by sending a group specific query to the receiver port and waiting
138. 250 36 2 128 250 36 2 Console Setting the Time Zone SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time or UTC formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT based on the time at the Earth s prime meridian zero degrees longitude To display a time corresponding to your local time you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east before or west after of UTC Command Attributes e Current Time Displays the current time Name Assigns a name to the time zone Range 1 29 characters Hours 0 12 The number of hours before after UTC Minutes 0 59 The number of minutes before after UTC Direction Configures the time zone to be before east or after west UTC Web Select SNTP Clock Time Zone Set the offset for your time zone relative to the UTC and click Apply a Clock Time Zone i Tene 101 4552 AD fas anb f4 Mentes 0 49 fo C After UTC Dwectior Before UTC Figure 3 23 Setting the System Clock CLI This example shows how to set the time zone for the system clock Console config clock timezone Atlantic hours 4 minute 0 before UTC Console config 3 32 Simple Network Management Protocol 3 Simple Network Management Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a communication protocol designed specifically for managing devices on a network Equipment commonly managed with SNMP includes switches routers and host computers SNMP is typical
139. 3 60 3 62 3 62 3 64 3 66 xix Figures Figure 3 43 Figure 3 44 Figure 3 45 Figure 3 46 Figure 3 47 Figure 3 48 Figure 3 49 Figure 3 50 Figure 3 51 Figure 3 52 Figure 3 53 Figure 3 54 Figure 3 55 Figure 3 56 Figure 3 57 Figure 3 58 Figure 3 59 Figure 3 60 Figure 3 61 Figure 3 62 Figure 3 63 Figure 3 64 Figure 3 65 Figure 3 66 Figure 3 67 Figure 3 68 Figure 3 69 Figure 3 70 Figure 3 71 Figure 3 72 Figure 3 73 Figure 3 74 Figure 3 75 Figure 3 76 Figure 3 77 Figure 3 78 Figure 3 79 Figure 3 80 Figure 3 81 Figure 3 82 Figure 3 83 Figure 3 84 Figure 3 85 Figure 3 86 Figure 3 87 XX Selecting ACL Type Configuring Standard IP ACLs Configuring Extended IP ACLs Configuring MAC ACLs Configuring ACL Port Binding Creating an IP Filter List Displaying Port Trunk Information Port Trunk Configuration Configuring Static Trunks LACP Trunk Configuration LACP Port Configuration LACP Port Counters Information LACP Port Internal Information LACP Port Neighbors Information Port Broadcast Control Mirror Port Configuration Input Rate Limit Port Configuration Port Statistics Configuring a Static Address Table Configuring a Dynamic Address Table Setting the Address Aging Time Displaying Spanning Tree Information Configuring Spanning Tree Displaying Spanning Tree Port Information Configuring Spanning Tree per Port Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees Displaying MSTP Interface Settings Displaying MSTP Int
140. 3580581 76716709574804776117 3 54 User Authentication 3 3 Import Client s Public Key to the Switch Use the copy tftp public key command 4 64 to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH client s granted management access to the switch Note that these clients must be configured locally on the switch via the User Accounts page as described on 3 46 The clients are subsequently authenticated using these keys The current firmware only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the following example for an RSA Version 1 key 1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880 0555361616310517759408386863 1109291232226828519254374603100937187721199 69631781366277414168985132049117204830339254324 10163799759237 1449011938 0060902539484084827 178194372288402533 11595213486 10229029789827213532671 31629432532818915045306393916643 steve 192 168 1 19 4 Set the Optional Parameters On the SSH Settings page configure the optional parameters including the authentication timeout the number of retries and the server key size 5 Enable SSH Service On the SSH Settings page enable the SSH server on the switch 6 Challenge Response Authentication When an SSH client attempts to contact the switch the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key and encryption method Only clients that have a private key corresponding to the public keys stored on the swit
141. 38 NO FLAG TYPE IP TTL DOMAIN 0 4 CNAME 207 46 134 222 51 www microsoft akadns net 1 4 CNAME 207 46 134 190 51 www microsoft akadns net 2 4 CNAME 207 46 134 155 51 www microsoft akadns net 3 4 CNAME 207 46 249 222 51 www microsoft akadns net 4 4 CNAME 207 46 249 27 51 www microsoft akadns net 5 4 ALIAS POINTER TO 4 51 www microsoft com 6 4 CNAME 207 46 68 27 71964 msn com tw 7 4 ALIAS POINTER TO 6 71964 www msn com tw 8 4 CNAME 65 54 131 192 605 passportimages com 9 4 ALIAS POINTER TO 8 605 www passportimages com 10 4 CNAME 165 193 72 190 87 global msads net Console DHCP Snooping DHCP snooping allows a switch to protect a network from rogue DHCP servers or other devices which send port related information to a DHCP server This information can be useful in tracking an IP address back to a physical port Network traffic may be disrupted when malicious DHCP messages are received from an outside source DHCP snooping is used to filter DHCP messages received on a non secure interface from outside the network or firewall When DHCP snooping is enabled globally and enabled on a VLAN interface DHCP messages received on an untrusted interface from a device not listed in the DHCP snooping table will be dropped When enabled DHCP messages entering an untrusted interface are filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping Filtering rules are implemented as follows Ifthe global DHCP snooping is disabled all DHCP packets ar
142. 5 3 Configuring the Switch CLI Use the snmp server view command to configure a new view This example view includes the MIB 2 interfaces table and the wildcard mask selects all index entries Console config snmp server view ifEntry a 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 included4 115 Console config exit Console show snmp view4 116 View Name ifEntry a Subtree OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 View Type included Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active View Name readaccess Subtree OID 1 3 6 1 2 View Type included Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active View Name defaultview Subtree OID 1 View Type included Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console User Authentication You can restrict management access to this switch using the following options e User Accounts Manually configure access rights on the switch for specified users e Authentication Settings Use remote authentication to configure access rights e HTTPS Settings Provide a secure web connection SSH Settings Provide a secure shell for secure Telnet access e Port Security Configure secure addresses for individual ports 802 1X Use IEEE 802 1X port authentication to control access to specific ports IP Filter Filters management access to the web SNMP or Telnet interface Configuring User Accounts The guest only has read access for most configuration parameters However the administra
143. 57 SNMPv2 RFC 2571 SNMPv3 RFC DRAFT 3414 3410 2273 3411 3415 SNTP RFC 2030 SSH Version 2 0 TFTP RFC 1350 Management Information Bases Bridge MIB RFC 1493 Differentiated Services MIB RFC 3289 Entity MIB RFC 2737 Ether like MIB RFC 2665 Extended Bridge MIB RFC 2674 Extensible SNMP Agents MIB RFC 2742 Forwarding Table MIB RFC 2096 IGMP MIB RFC 2933 Interface Group MIB RFC 2233 Interfaces Evolution MIB RFC 2863 IP Multicasting related MIBs MAU MIB RFC 2668 MIB II RFC 1213 Port Access Entity MIB IEEE 802 1X Port Access Entity Equipment MIB Private MIB Quality of Service MIB RADIUS Authentication Client MIB RFC 2621 RMON MIB RFC 2819 RMON II Probe Configuration Group RFC 2021 partial implementation SNMPv2 IP MIB RFC 2011 SNMP Community MIB RFC 3584 SNMP Framework MIB RFC 3411 SNMP MPD MIB RFC 3412 SNMP Target MIB SNMP Notification MIB RFC 3413 SNMP User Based SM MIB RFC 3414 SNMP View Based ACM MIB RFC 3415 TACACS Authentication Client MIB TCP MIB RFC 2013 Trap RFC 1215 UDP MIB RFC 2012 A Software Specifications A 4 Appendix B Troubleshooting Problems Accessing the Management Interface Table B 1 Troubleshooting Chart Symptom Action Cannot connect using Telnet web browser or SNMP software Be sure the switch is powered up e Check network cabling between the management station and the switch e Check that you h
144. 6 4 37 serial port configuring 4 10 show dot1q tunnel 4 178 Simple Network Management Protocol See SNMP SNMP 3 33 community string 3 33 3 37 3 40 3 41 3 45 4 102 enabling traps 3 34 4 106 filtering IP addresses 3 74 trap manager 3 34 4 104 software displaying version 3 11 4 62 downloading 3 18 4 64 Spanning Tree Protocol See STA specifications software A 1 SSH configuring 3 54 4 36 4 37 STA 3 102 4 144 edge port 3 112 3 115 4 156 global settings configuring 3 107 4 145 4 150 global settings displaying 3 105 4 160 interface settings 3 111 4 154 4 160 4 161 link type 3 113 3 115 3 117 3 119 3 122 4 157 path cost 3 105 3 112 4 154 path cost method 3 109 4 149 port priority 3 112 4 155 protocol migration 3 115 4 160 transmission limit 3 109 4 150 standards IEEE A 2 startup files creating 3 20 displaying 3 18 4 57 setting 3 18 4 69 static addresses setting 3 99 4 140 statistics port 3 95 4 124 STP 3 107 4 145 STP Also see STA switchport dot1q ethertype 4 178 Index 3 index switchport mode dotiq tunnel 4 177 system clock setting 3 31 4 53 system logs 3 25 system mode normal or QinQ 3 137 4 176 system software downloading from server 3 18 T TACACS logon authentication 3 48 4 77 throttling IGMP 3 169 time setting 3 31 4 53 TPID 3 137 4 178 traffic class weights 3 148 4 186 trap manager 2 7 3 34 4 104 troubleshooting B 1 trunk configuration 3 80 4 13
145. 81 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across the network This section describes how to enable GVRP for individual interfaces and globally for the switch as well as how to display default configuration settings for the Bridge Extension MIB Note GVRP is not supported in the current software Table 4 54 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands Command Function Mode Page bridge ext gp Enables GVRP globally forthe switch fec 4 164 show bridge ext Shows the global bridge extension configuration PE 4 164 switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface IC 4 165 switchport forbidden vlan Configures forbidden VLANs for an interface IC 4 174 show gvrp configuration Displays GVRP configuration for the selected interface NE PE 4 165 garp timer Sets the GARP timer for the selected function IC 4 166 show garp timer Shows the GARP timer for the selected function NE PE 4 166 4 163 4 Command Line Interface bridge ext gvrp This command enables GVRP globally for the switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no bridge ext gvrp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network This fun
146. A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium was busy Internal MAC Receive Errors A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error 3 96 Port Configuration 3 Table 3 10 Port Statistics Continued Parameter Description RMON Statistics Drop Events The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of resources Jabbers The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error Received Bytes Total number of bytes of data received on the network This statistic can be used as a reasonable indication of Ethernet utilization Collisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment Received Frames The total number of frames bad broadcast and multicast received Broadcast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets Multicast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to this multicast address CRC Alignment Errors The number of CRC alignment errors FCS or alignment errors Undersize Frames The total number of frames received that we
147. AC addresses 3 67 Port Binding Binds a port to the specified ACL 3 73 IP Filter Sets IP addresses of clients allowed management access via 3 74 the web SNMP and Telnet Port 3 76 Port Information Displays port connection status 3 76 Trunk Information Displays trunk connection status 3 76 Port Configuration Configures port connection settings 3 78 Trunk Configuration Configures trunk connection settings 3 78 Trunk Membership Specifies ports to group into static trunks 3 81 LACP 3 82 Configuration Allows ports to dynamically join trunks 3 82 3 Configuring the Switch Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page Aggregation Port Configures parameters for link aggregation group members 3 84 Port Counters Information Displays statistics for LACP protocol messages 3 86 Port Internal Information Displays settings and operational state for the local side 3 88 Port Neighbors Information Displays settings and operational state for the remote side 3 90 Port Broadcast Control Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each port 3 91 Trunk Broadcast Control Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each trunk 3 91 Mirror Port Configuration Sets the source and target ports for mirroring 3 93 Rate Limit 3 94 Input Port Configuration Sets the input rate limit for each port 3 94 Input Trunk Configuration Sets the input rate limit for each trunk 3 94
148. AN Commands Priority Commands Priority Commands Layer 2 Default CoS Values to Egress Queues Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 IP DSCP to CoS Vales Quality of Service Commands Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping Commands 4 70 4 70 4 73 4 77 4 79 4 81 4 89 4 90 4 95 4 99 4 100 4 108 4 110 4 113 4 115 4 116 4 126 4 127 4 129 4 130 4 137 4 138 4 139 4 139 4 140 4 144 4 163 4 163 4 167 4 169 4 175 4 176 4 176 4 176 4 176 4 179 4 181 4 184 4 184 4 187 4 189 4 190 4 193 4 201 4 201 Table 4 69 Table 4 70 Table 4 71 Table 4 72 Table 4 73 Table 4 74 Table 4 75 Table 4 76 Table 4 77 Table 4 78 Table 4 79 Table B 1 IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 Static Multicast Routing Commands IGMP Filtering and Throttling Commands Multicast VLAN Registration Commands show mvr display description show mvr interface display description show mvr members display description IP Interface Commands IP Source Guard Commands DHCP Snooping Commands Switch Cluster Commands Troubleshooting Chart Tables 4 206 4 209 4 211 4 217 4 221 4 222 4 222 4 223 4 227 4 231 4 237 B 1 xvii Tables xviii Figures Figure 3 1 Home Page Figure 3 2 Panel Display Figure 3 3 System Information Figure 3 4 Switch Information Figure 3 5 Bridge Extension Configuration Figure 3 6 Manual IP Configuration Figure 3 7 DHCP IP Configuration Figure 3 8 Bridge Extension Configuration
149. ANs Class of Service Supports 4 levels of priority and Weighted Round Robin Queueing which can be configured by VLAN tag or port Layer 3 4 priority mapping IP DSCP Multicast Filtering IGMP Snooping Layer 2 Multicast VLAN Registration A Software Specifications Quality of Service DiffServ supports class maps policy maps and service policies Additional Features BOOTP client SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol RMON Remote Monitoring groups 1 2 3 9 SMTP Email Alerts DHCP Snooping IP Source Guard Switch Clustering Management Features In Band Management Telnet Web based HTTP or HTTPS SNMP manager or Secure Shell Out of Band Management RS 232 console port Software Loading TFTP in band or XModem out of band SNMP Management access via MIB database Trap management to specified hosts RMON Groups 1 2 3 9 Statistics History Alarm Event Standards IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and traffic priorities IEEE 802 1p Priority tags IEEE 802 1Q VLAN IEEE 802 1v Protocol based VLANs IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication IEEE 802 3 2005 Ethernet Fast Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet Full duplex flow control Link Aggregation Control Protocol IEEE 802 3ac VLAN tagging DHCP Client RFC 1541 HTTPS IGMP RFC 1112 IGMPv2 RFC 2236 RADIUS RFC 2618 A 2 Management Information Bases A RMON RFC 1757 groups 1 2 3 9 SNMP RFC 11
150. Access 2 6 Community Strings for SNMP version 1 and 2c clients 2 6 Trap Receivers 2 7 Configuring Access for SNMP Version 3 Clients 2 8 Saving Configuration Settings 2 8 Managing System Files 2 9 Chapter 3 Configuring the Switch 3 1 Using the Web Interface 3 1 Navigating the Web Browser Interface 3 2 Home Page 3 2 Configuration Options 3 3 Panel Display 3 3 Main Menu 3 4 Basic Configuration 3 10 Displaying System Information 3 10 Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions 3 11 Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities 3 13 Setting the Switch s IP Address 3 14 Manual Configuration 3 15 Using DHCP BOOTP 3 16 Enabling Jumbo Frames 3 17 Managing Firmware 3 17 Downloading System Software from a Server 3 18 Contents Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server Console Port Settings Telnet Settings Configuring Event Logging Displaying Log Messages System Log Configuration Remote Log Configuration Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Renumbering the System Resetting the System Setting the System Clock Configuring SNTP Setting the Time Zone Simple Network Management Protocol Setting Community Access Strings Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types Enabling SNMP Agent Status Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access Setting the Local Engine ID Specifying a Remote Engine ID Configuring SNMPv3 Users Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users Configuring SNMPv3 Groups Setting SNMPv3 Views User Authenticati
151. Apply 802 1X Configuration 802 1X System Authentication Control F Enabled Figure 3 40 802 1X Global Configuration CLI This example enables 802 1X globally for the switch Console config dotlx system auth control 4 81 Console config 3 62 User Authentication 3 Configuring Port Settings for 802 1X When 802 1X is enabled you need to configure the parameters for the authentication process that runs between the client and the switch i e authenticator as well as the client identity lookup process that runs between the switch and authentication server These parameters are described in this section Command Attributes Port Port number Status Indicates if authentication is enabled or disabled on the port Default Disabled Operation Mode Allows single or multiple hosts clients to connect to an 802 1X authorized port Options Single Host Multi Host Default Single Host Max Count The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port when the Multi Host operation mode is selected Range 1 1024 Default 5 Mode Sets the authentication mode to one of the following options Auto Requires a dot1x aware client to be authorized by the authentication server Clients that are not dot1x aware will be denied access Force Authorized Forces the port to grant access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise This is the default setting Force Unauthorize
152. B It assigns these respective read and read write views to a group call r amp d and specifies group authentication via MD5 or SHA In the last step it assigns a v3 user to this group indicating that MD5 will be used for authentication provides the password greenpeace for authentication and the password einstien for encryption Console config snmp server view mib 2 1 3 6 1 2 1 included4 109 Console config snmp server view 802 1d 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 included Console config snmp server group r d v3 auth mib 2 802 1d4 110 Console config snmp server user steve group r d v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien4 113 Console config For a more detailed explanation on how to configure the switch for access from SNMP v3 clients refer to Simple Network Management Protocol on page 3 33 or refer to the specific CLI commands for SNMP starting on page 4 100 Saving Configuration Settings Configuration commands only modify the running configuration file and are not saved when the switch is rebooted To save all your configuration changes in nonvolatile storage you must copy the running configuration file to the start up configuration file using the copy command To save the current configuration settings enter the following command 1 From the Privileged Exec mode prompt type copy running config startup config and press lt Enter gt 2 Enter the name of the start up file Press lt
153. BASE T or SFP e Admin Status Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled e Oper Status Indicates if the link is Up or Down e Speed Duplex Status Shows the current speed and duplex mode Auto or fixed choice e Flow Control Status Indicates the type of flow control currently in use IEEE 802 3x Back Pressure or None e Autonegotiation Shows if auto negotiation is enabled or disabled e Media Type Media type used for the combo ports 21 24 SMC8126L2 or 45 48 SMC8150L2 Options Coppper Forced SFP Forced or SFP Preferred Auto Default SFP Preferred Auto Trunk Member Shows if port is a trunk member e Creation5 Shows if a trunk is manually configured or dynamically set via LACP 3 Port information only 4 Port information only 5 Trunk information only 3 76 Port Configuration 3 Web Click Port Port Information or Trunk Information Port Information PortName Type aan pos al okr a Autonegotiation Media Type Misa Status 1 Sra Enabled Down 10half None Enabled None 1 Sass Enabled Down 10half None Enabled None 3 1 Enabled Down 10half None Enabled None 4 100Base Enabled Down 10halt None Enabled None 5 apg Enabled p 100full None Enabled None 100Base Enabled Down 10half None Enabled None h seg Enabled Down 10half Enabled None 2 Enabled Dowr 10half Enabled None Figure 3 49 Displaying Port Trunk Information Field Attributes CLI
154. Commands Layer 2 Table 4 69 IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping querier Allows this device to act as the querier for IGMP snooping GC 4 206 ip igmp snooping Configures the query count GC 4 206 query count ip igmp snooping Configures the query interval GC 4 207 query interval ip igmp snooping Configures the report delay GC 4 208 query max response time ip igmp snooping Configures the query timeout GC 4 208 router port expire time ip igmp snooping querier This command enables the switch as an IGMP querier Use the no form to disable it Syntax no ip igmp snooping querier Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If enabled the switch will serve as querier if elected The querier is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic Example Console config ip igmp snooping querier Console config ip igmp snooping query count This command configures the query count Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query count count no ip igmp snooping query count count The maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the multicast group Range 2 10 4 206 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 Default Setting 2 times Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage T
155. Commands 4 Configuring Protocol based VLANs The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped into a common VLAN This may require non standard devices to pass traffic between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a specific protocol This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits of VLANs including security and easy accessibility To avoid these problems you can configure this switch with protocol based VLANs that divide the physical network into logical VLAN groups for each required protocol When a frame is received at a port its VLAN membership can then be determined based on the protocol type in use by the inbound packets Table 4 60 Protocol based VLAN Commands Command Function Mode Page protocol vian protocol group Maps a protocol group to a VLAN IC 4 182 show protocol vlan Shows the configuration of protocol groups PE 4 183 protocol group show interfaces Shows the interfaces mapped to a protocol group and the PE 4 183 protocol vlan protocol group corresponding VLAN To configure protocol based VLANs follow these steps 1 First configure VLAN groups for the protocols you want to use page 4 168 Although not mandatory we suggest configuring a separate VLAN for each major protocol running on your network Do not add port members at this time 2 Create a protocol group for each of the protocols you want
156. Community string sent with the notification operation Range 1 32 characters case sensitive Trap UDP Port Sets the UDP port number Default 162 Trap Version Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP v1 v2c or v3 traps The default is version 1 e Trap Security Level Specifies the security level Enable Authentication Traps Issues a trap message whenever an invalid community string is submitted during the SNMP access authentication process Default Enabled Enable Link up and Link down Traps Issues a trap message whenever a port link is established or broken Default Enabled 3 34 Simple Network Management Protocol 3 Web Click SNMP Configuration Fill in the IP address and community string for each trap manager that will receive trap messages and then click Add Select the trap types required using the check boxes for Authentication and Link up down traps and then click Apply Trap Managers Trap Manager Capability 5 Current New Trap Manager IP Address Trap Manager Community String none Trap UDP Po 162 lt lt Add ep UD sk Trap Version z Remove ap Trap Secunty Level z Timeout 0 2147483647 1 100 secs F Trap Inform Retry tmes 0 255 Enable Authentication Traps Gd Enable Link up and Link down Traps F Figure 3 25 Configuring IP Trap Managers CLI This example adds a trap manager and enables both authentication and link up link down traps
157. DP Port 162 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Ifyou do not enter an snmp server host command no notifications are sent In order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications you must enter at least one snmp server host command In order to enable multiple hosts you must issue a separate snmp server host command for each host The snmp server host command is used in conjunction with the snmp server enable traps command Use the snmp server enable traps command to enable the sending of traps or informs and to specify which SNMP notifications are sent globally For a host to receive notifications at least one snmp server enable traps command and the snmp server host command for that host must be enabled Some notification types cannot be controlled with the snmp server enable traps command For example some notification types are always enabled Notifications are issued by the switch as trap messages by default The recipient of a trap message does not send a response to the switch Traps are therefore not as reliable as inform messages which include a request for acknowledgement of receipt Informs can be used to ensure that critical information is received by the host However note that informs consume more system resources because they must be kept in memory until a response is received Informs also add to network traffic You should consider these effects when deciding whether to issue notifications as traps or i
158. Enabled Disabled z Figure 3 69 Displaying MSTP Interface Settings 3 119 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This displays STA settings for instance 0 followed by settings for each port The settings for instance 0 are global settings that apply to the IST the settings for other instances only apply to the local spanning tree Console show spanning tree mst 0 4 231 Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode MSTP Spanning tree enable disable enable Instance 0 Vlans configuration 1 4094 Priority 32768 Bridge Hello Time sec 2 Bridge Max Age sec 20 Bridge Forward Delay sec 15 Root Hello Time sec 2 Root Max Age sec 20 Root Forward Delay sec 15 Max hops 20 Remaining hops 20 Designated Root 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 Current root port 1 Current root cost 200000 Number of topology changes 1 Last topology changes time sec 645 Transmission limit 3 Path Cost Method long Admin status enable Role root State forwarding External path cost 100000 Internal path cost 100000 Priority 128 Designated cost 200000 Designated port 128 24 Designated root 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 Designated bridge 32768 0 0030F1552000 Fast forwarding disable Forward transitions 1 Admin edge port enable Oper edge port disable Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to point Spanning Tree Status enable Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP You can
159. Enter gt Console copy running config startup config Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console Managing System Files 2 Managing System Files The switch s flash memory supports three types of system files that can be managed by the CLI program web interface or SNMP The switch s file system allows files to be uploaded and downloaded copied deleted and set as a start up file The three types of files are Configuration This file stores system configuration information and is created when configuration settings are saved Saved configuration files can be selected as a system start up file or can be uploaded via TFTP to a server for backup A file named Factory_Default_Config cfg contains all the system default settings and cannot be deleted from the system See Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings on page 3 19 for more information Operation Code System software that is executed after boot up also known as run time code This code runs the switch operations and provides the CLI and web management interfaces See Managing Firmware on page 3 17 for more information Diagnostic Code Software that is run during system boot up also known as POST Power On Self Test Due to the size limit of the flash memory the switch supports only two operation code files However you can have as many diagnostic co
160. ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 68 Spanning Tree Location VLAN Priority Contact am QoS System Up Time 0 days 0 hours 10 minutes and 14 50 seconds GIGMP Snooping SG MVR GI DNS k DHCP Snooping Connect to textual user interface amp IP Source Guard Figure 3 3 System Information 3 10 Basic Configuration 3 CLI Specify the hostname location and contact information Console config hostname R amp D 5 4 25 Console config snmp server location WC 9 4 103 Console config snmp server contact Ted 4 103 Console config exit Console show system 4 61 System description TigerSwitch 10 100 1000 26 50 PORT MANAGED SWITCH System OID string 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 68 System information System Up time 0 days 0 hours 14 minutes and 32 93 seconds System Name NONE System Location NONE System Contact NONE MAC address 00 00 35 28 10 03 Web server enabled Web server port 80 Web secure server enabled Web secure server port 443 Telnet server enable Telnet port E Aa Jumbo Frame Disabled POST result UART Loopback Test PASS DRAM TOSE 2c5 d ss0 dee wee eo dee ea ais PASS Timer TeSt 5 scscidie sei ie seis 6 aceiene a PASS PCI Device 1 Test PASS I2C Bus Initialization PASS Switch Int Loopback Test PASS Fan Speed Test c202008 PASS Done All Pass Console Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions Use the Switch
161. IP source guard on port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if ip source guard sip Console config if Related Commands ip source guard binding 4 229 ip dhcp snooping 4 231 ip dhcp snooping vlan 4 233 ip source guard binding This command adds a static address to the source guard binding table Use the no form to remove a static entry Syntax ip source guard binding mac address vlan vlan id ip address interface ethernet unit port no ip source guard binding mac address vlan vian id mac address A valid unicast MAC address e vian id ID of a configured VLAN Range 1 4094 jp address A valid unicast IP address including classful types A B or C e unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 28 Default Setting No configured entries Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Table entries include a MAC address IP address lease time entry type Static IP SG Binding Dynamic DHCP Binding Static DHCP Binding VLAN identifier and port identifier All static entries are configured with an infinite lease time which is indicated with a value of zero by the show ip source guard command page 4 230 e When source guard is enabled traffic is filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping static entries configured in the DHCP snooping 4 229 4 Command Line Interface table or static addresses configured in the source gu
162. Information page to display hardware firmware version numbers for the main board and management software as well as the power status of the system Field Attributes Main Board Serial Number The serial number of the switch Number of Ports Number of built in RJ 45 ports Hardware Version Hardware version of the main board Internal Power Status Displays the status of the internal power supply Management Software e EPLD Version Version number of the Electronically Programmable Logic Device code e Loader Version Version number of loader code Boot ROM Version Version of Power On Self Test POST and boot code Operation Code Version Version number of runtime code Role Shows that this switch is operating as Master or Slave 3 11 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click System Switch Information Switch Information Main Board Serial Number Number of Ports 26 Hardware Version Internal Power Status Active Management Software EPLD Version 45 15 Loader Version 3 28 10 10 Boot ROM Version 3 28 14 10 Operation Code Version 1 0 0 1 Role Master Figure 3 4 Switch Information CLI Use the following command to display version information Console show version 4 62 Unit 1 Serial number Hardware version EPLD Version 4 04 Number of ports 26 Main power status Up Redundant power status Not present Agent master Unit ID Loader
163. LAN Unaware rT 3 tagged untagged p m frames f frames r 1 Bono i VA VA vu VLAN Classification When the switch receives a frame it classifies the frame in one of two ways If the frame is untagged the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port But if the frame is tagged the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still need to communicate you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch Untagged VLANs Untagged or static VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security A group of network users assigned to a 3 123 3 Configuring the Switch VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets However you should use IEEE 802 3 tagged VLANs with GVRP whenever possible to fully automate VLAN registration Automatic VLAN Registration GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a system whereby the switch can automatically learn the VLANs to which each end station should be assign
164. LI shows Queue ID 3 146 Class of Service Configuration 3 CLI The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 116 Console config if queue cos map 0 0 4 187 Console config if queue cos map 1 1 Console config if queue cos map 2 2 Console config if end Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 4 189 Information of Eth 1 1 CoS Value 0123 Priority Queue 0121 Console 5 7 2 3 W OV 4 2 Enabling CoS Enable or disable Class of Service CoS Command Attributes Traffic Classes Click to enable Class of Service Default Enabled Web Click Priority Traffic Classes Status Traffic Classes Status Traffic Classes Enabled Figure 3 86 Enable Traffic Classes Selecting the Queue Mode You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are serviced or use Weighted Round Robin WRR queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue This prevents the head of line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing Command Attributes WRR Weighted Round Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using schedulin
165. Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Configuration only The following interface attributes can be configured e Spanning Tree Enables disables STA on this interface Default Enabled e Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority i e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Protocol is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Default 128 e Range 0 240 in steps of 16 e Path Cost This parameter is used by the STP to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Note that when the Path Cost Method is set to short the maximum path cost is 65 535 e Range Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fas
166. MP communities 1 private and the privilege is read write 2 public and the privilege is read only 0 SNMP packets input 0 Bad SNMP version errors Unknown community name Illegal operation for community name supplied Encoding errors Number of requested variables Number of altered variables Get request PDUs Get next PDUs 0 Set request PDUs 0 SNMP packets output 0 Too big errors No such name errors Bad values errors General errors Response PDUs Trap PDUs oo0oo0oo0oo0o0o0 ooo0oo0oo0o SNMP logging disabled Console snmp server community This command defines the SNMP v1 and v2c community access string Use the no form to remove the specified community string Syntax snmp server community string ro rw no snmp server community string string Community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol Maximum length 32 characters case sensitive Maximum number of strings 5 ro Specifies read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects rw Specifies read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Default Setting public Read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects 4 102 SNMP Commands 4 private Read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Command Mode Global Conf
167. MVR VLAN add the multicast groups that will stream traffic to attached hosts and then click Apply MVR Configuration MVR Status Enabled MVR Running Status False MVR VLAN 1 ix MVR Group IP List Current New MVR Group IP none Figure 3 106 MVR Global Configuration CLI This example first enables IGMP snooping enables MVR globally and then configures a range of MVR group addresses Console config ip igmp snooping 4 202 Console config mvr 4 218 Console config mvr group 228 1 23 1 10 4 218 Console config Displaying MVR Interface Status You can display information about the interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN Field Attributes Type Shows the MVR port type e Oper Status Shows the link status e MVR Status Shows the MVR status MVR status for source ports is ACTIVE if MVR is globally enabled on the switch MVR status for receiver ports is ACTIVE only if there are subscribers receiving multicast traffic from one of the MVR groups or a multicast group has been statically assigned to an interface e Immediate Leave Shows if immediate leave is enabled or disabled Trunk Member 2 Shows if port is a trunk member 12 Port Information only 3 176 Web Click MVR Port or Trunk Information Multicast Filtering 3 1 WLAN DA n A w N m oOo Non MVR Non MVR Non MVR Non MVR Non MVR Non MVR Non MVR No
168. Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e First enter this command to designate a class map and enter the Class Map configuration mode Then use the match command page 4 194 to specify the criteria for ingress traffic that will be classified under this class map Up to 16 match commands are permitted per class map e The class map is used with a policy map page 4 195 to create a service policy page 4 199 for a specific interface that defines packet classification service tagging and bandwidth policing Example This example creates a class map call rd_class and sets it to match packets marked for DSCP service value 3 Console config class map rd_class match any Console config cmap match ip dscp 3 Console config cmap Related Commands show class map 4 199 match This command defines the criteria used to classify traffic Use the no form to delete the matching criteria Syntax no match access list aci name ip dscp dscp ip precedence ip precedence vlan vlan acl name Name of the access control list Any type of ACL can be specified including standard or extended IP ACLs and MAC ACLs Range 1 16 characters dscp A DSCP value Range 0 63 jp precedence An IP Precedence value Range 0 7 4 194 Quality of Service Commands 4 e vlan A VLAN Range 1 4094 Default Setting None Command Mode Class Map Configuration Command Usage First enter the
169. N Link Status page to set ports as downlink or uplink ports Ports designated as downlink ports can not communicate with any other ports on the switch except for the uplink ports Uplink ports can communicate with any other ports on the switch and with any designated downlink ports Web Click VLAN Private VLAN Link Status Mark the ports that will serve as uplinks and downlinks for the private VLAN then click Apply Private VLAN Link Status Port Uplink Downlink None Trunk Member 1 2 3 0 4 5 0 6 7 2 8 fe 9 0 Figure 3 81 Private VLAN Link Status CLI This configures port 3 as an uplink and port 5 and 6 as downlinks Console config pvlan up link ethernet 1 3 down link ethernet 1 5 53 1 Console config pvlan up link ethernet 1 3 down link ethernet 1 6 Console config end Console show pvlan 53 2 Private VLAN status Enabled Up link port Ethernet 1 3 Down link port Ethernet 1 5 Ethernet 1 6 Console Protocol VLANs You can configure VLAN behavior to support multiple protocols to allow traffic to pass through different VLANS When a packet is received at a port its VLAN membership is determined by the protocol type of the packet Protocol VLAN Group Configuration Command Attributes e Protocol Group ID Protocol Group ID assigned to the Protocol VLAN Group Range 1 2147483647 Frame T
170. Page Line Sets communication parameters for the serial port and Telnet 4 10 including baud rate and console time out General Basic commands for entering privileged access mode restarting the 4 19 system or quitting the CLI System Management Controls system logs system passwords user name browser 4 24 management options and a variety of other system information Flash File Manages code image or switch configuration files 4 64 Authentication Configures logon access using local or remote authentication 4 70 also configures port security and IEEE 802 1X port access control Access Control List Provides filtering for IP frames based on address protocol or TCP 4 89 UDP port number or non IP frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type SNMP Activates authentication failure traps configures community access 4 100 strings and trap managers also configures IP address filtering Interface Configures the connection parameters for all Ethernet ports 4 116 aggregated links and VLANs Mirror Port Mirrors data to another port for analysis without affecting the data 4 127 passing through or the performance of the monitored port Rate Limiting Controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on a port 4 129 Link Aggregation Statically groups multiple ports into a single logical trunk configures 4 130 Link Aggregation Control Protocol for port trunks Address Table Configures the address table for filtering specified addresses disp
171. Port Configuration Port Status cat Mode Ache e auten Mec og Authorized Supplicant Trunk 1 Disabled Single Host y Force Auhorized ClEnable 2 a o o w bach 2 Disabled Single Host w Force Aut orized v C Enable 2 60 3600 z toil 3 Disabled Single Host y Force Authorized v ClEnable 2 60 a je 4 Disabled Singie Host x Force Authorized x ClEnable 2 60 3600 30 5 Disabled Sage Host Force Auorzed y Denable2 o o o l pea Figure 3 41 802 1X Port Configuration 3 64 User Authentication 3 CLI This example sets the 802 1X parameters on port 2 For a description of the additional fields displayed in this example see show dot1x on page 4 86 Console config interface ethernet 1 2 4 116 Console config if dot1x port control auto 4 82 Console config if dot1x re authentication 4 84 Console config if dot1x max req 5 4 82 Console config if dot1x timeout quiet period 30 4 84 Console config if dotlx timeout re authperiod 1800 4 85 Console config if dotlx timeout tx period 40 4 85 Console config if exit Console config exit Console show dot1x 4 86 Global 802 1X Parameters system auth control enable 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized 1 1 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 1 2 enabled Single Host auto yes 1 26 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is disabled on port 1 1 802 1X is enabled on port 1 2 reau
172. Pv3 Users 3 40 Simple Network Management Protocol 3 CLI Use the snmp server user command to configure a new user name and assign it to a group Console config snmp server user mark group r amp d remote 192 168 1 19 v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien 4 113 Console config exit Console show snmp user 4 113 No user exist SNMP remote user EnginelId 8000000003000 4e2b316c54321 User Name mark Authentication Protocol none Privacy Protocol none Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console Configuring SNMPv3 Groups An SNMPv3 group sets the access policy for its assigned users restricting them to specific read write and notify views You can use the pre defined default groups or create new groups to map a set of SNMP users to SNMP views Command Attributes Group Name The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned Range 1 32 characters Model The user security model SNMP v1 v2c or v3 Level The security level used for the group noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications This is the default for SNMPv3 AuthNoPriv SNMP communications use authentication but the data is not encrypted only available for the SNMPv3 security model AuthPriv SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption only available for the SNMPv3 security model e Read View The configured view for read ac
173. R 00 12 cf 23 49 c0 TigerSwitch 10 100 1000 SPORT MANAGE CANDIDATE 00 12 cf 0b 47 a0 TigerSwitch 10 100 1000 SPORT MANAGE Vty O 3 198 Chapter 4 Command Line Interface This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface CLI Using the Command Line Interface Accessing the CLI When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection to the server s console port or via a Telnet connection the switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt Using the switch s command line interface CLI is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system Console Connection To access the switch through the console port perform these steps 1 At the console prompt enter the user name and password The default user names are admin and guest with corresponding passwords of admin and guest When the administrator user name and password is entered the CLI displays the Console prompt and enters privileged access mode i e Privileged Exec But when the guest user name and password is entered the CLI displays the Console gt prompt and enters normal access mode i e Normal Exec 2 Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks 3 When finished exit the session with the quit or exit command After connecting to the system through the console port the login screen displays User Access Verificat
174. SMC MANAGEMENT GUIDE N ks etwor TigerSwitch 10 100 1000 Management Guide From SMC s Tiger line of feature rich workgroup LAN solutions SMC Networks 20 Mason September 2007 Irvine CA 92618 Pub 149100036100A Phone 949 679 8000 E092007 AP RO1 Information furnished by SMC Networks Inc SMC is believed to be accurate and reliable However no responsibility is assumed by SMC for its use nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties which may result from its use No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of SMC SMC reserves the right to change specifications at any time without notice Copyright 2007 by SMC Networks Inc 20 Mason Irvine CA 92618 All rights reserved Printed in Taiwan Trademarks SMC is a registered trademark and EZ Switch TigerStack and TigerSwitch are trademarks of SMC Networks Inc Other product and company names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders Contents Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Key Features 1 1 Description of Software Features 1 2 System Defaults 1 6 Chapter 2 Initial Configuration 2 1 Connecting to the Switch 2 1 Configuration Options 2 1 Required Connections 2 2 Remote Connections 2 3 Basic Configuration 2 3 Console Connection 2 3 Setting Passwords 2 4 Setting an IP Address 2 4 Manual Configuration 2 4 Dynamic Configuration 2 5 Enabling SNMP Management
175. SNMP trap message Shutdown Disable the port Trap and Shutdown Send an SNMP trap message and disable the port e Security Status Enables or disables port security on the port Default Disabled Max MAC Count The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port Range 0 1024 where 0 means disabled Trunk Trunk number if port is a member page 3 81 and 3 82 3 59 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Security Port Security Set the action to take when an invalid address is detected on a port mark the checkbox in the Status column to enable security for a port set the maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a port and click Apply Configuration Port Name Action Security Status Max MAC Count 0 1024 Trunk 1 None bd l Enabled D 2 None I Enabled 3 None F Enabled 7 Noe E enabled 5 Trap and Shutdown F Enabled k None x l Enabled Figure 3 38 Configuring Port Security H zi CLI This example selects the target port sets the port security action to send a trap and disable the port and sets the maximum MAC addresses allowed on the port and then enables port security for the port Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if port security action trap and shutdown 4 79 Console config if port security max mac count 20 4 79 Console config if port security 4 79 Console config if Configuring 802 1X Port Authen
176. System Priority e Ports must have the same LACP port Admin Key e However if the port channel Admin Key is set 4 135 then the port Admin Key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group Note If the port channel admin key lacp admin key 4 135 is not set through the CLI when a channel group is formed i e it has a null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key used by the interfaces that joined the group lacp admin key as described in this section and on 4 134 Command Attributes Set Port Actor This menu sets the local side of an aggregate link i e the ports on this switch e Port Port number Range 1 26 50 e System Priority LACP system priority is used to determine link aggregation group LAG membership and to identify this device to other switches during LAG negotiations Range 0 65535 Default 32768 Ports must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG 3 84 Port Configuration 3 System priority is combined with the switch s MAC address to form the LAG identifier This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP negotiations with other systems Admin Key The LACP administration key must be set to the same value for ports that belong to the same LAG Range 0 65535 Default 1 Port Priority If a link goes down LACP port priority is used to select a backup link R
177. This command disables the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface Use the no form to reenable the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface Syntax no spanning tree spanning disabled Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example This example disables the spanning tree algorithm for port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree spanning disabled Console config if spanning tree cost This command configures the spanning tree path cost for the specified interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree cost cost no spanning tree cost cost The path cost for the port Range 0 for auto configuration or 1 200 000 000 The recommended range is Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 e Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 e 10 Gigabit Ethernet 200 20 000 Default Setting By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode e Ethernet half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 4 154 Spanning Tree Commands 4 Fast Ethernet half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 e 10 Gigabit Ethernet
178. This command removes any learned entries from the forwarding database and clears the transmit and receive counts for any static or system configured entries Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console clear mac address table dynamic Console show mac address table This command shows classes of entries in the bridge forwarding database Syntax show mac address table address mac address mask interface interface vlan vian id sort address vlan interface mac address MAC address e mask Bits to match in the address interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 26 50 port channel channel id Range 1 32 e vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 4 141 4 Command Line Interface sort Sort by address vlan or interface Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The MAC Address Table contains the MAC addresses associated with each interface Note that the Type field may include the following types Learned Dynamic address entries Permanent Static entry Delete on reset Static entry to be deleted when system is reset The mask should be hexadecimal numbers representing an equivalent bit mask in the form xx xx xx xx xx xx that is applied to the specified MAC address Enter hexadecimal numbers where an equivalent binary bit 0 means to match a bit and 1 means to ignore a bit
179. URCE ACTIVE UP Disable ethl 2 RECEIVER ACTIVE UP Disable ethl 5 RECEIVER INACTIVE DOWN Disable ethl 6 RECEIVER INACTIVE DOWN Disable ethl 7 RECEIVER INACTIVE DOWN Disable Console Table 4 74 show mvr interface display description Field Description Port Shows interfaces attached to the MVR Type Shows the MVR port type Status Shows the MVR status and interface status MVR status for source ports is ACTIVE if MVR is globally enabled on the switch MVR status for receiver ports is ACTIVE only if there are subscribers receiving multicast traffic from one of the MVR groups or a multicast group has been statically assigned to an interface Immediate Leave Shows if immediate leave is enabled or disabled The following shows information about the interfaces associated with multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN Console show mvr members MVR Group IP Status embers 225 0 0 1 ACTIVE eth1 1 d eth1 2 s 225 0 0 2 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 3 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 4 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 5 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 6 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 7 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 8 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 9 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 10 INACTIVE None Console Table 4 75 show mvr members display description Field Description MVR Group IP Multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN Status Shows whether or not the there are active subscribers for this multicast group Note that this field will also disp
180. VLAN using VLAN ID 105 and name RD5 The VLAN is activated by default Console config vlan database Console config vlan vlan 105 name RD5 media ethernet Console config vlan Related Commands show vlan 4 175 Configuring VLAN Interfaces Table 4 56 Configuring VLAN Interfaces Command Function Mode Page interface vlan Enters interface configuration mode for a specified VLAN GC 4 169 switchport mode Configures VLAN membership mode for an interface IC 4 170 switchport Configures frame types to be accepted by an interface IC 4 171 acceptable frame types switchport ingress filtering Enables ingress filtering on an interface IC 4 171 switchport native vlan Configures the PVID native VLAN of an interface IC 4 172 switchport allowed vlan Configures the VLANs associated with an interface IC 4 173 switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface IC 4 165 switchport forbidden vlan Configures forbidden VLANs for an interface IC 4 174 switchport priority default Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames IC 4 185 interface vlan This command enters interface configuration mode for VLANs which is used to configure VLAN parameters for a physical interface Syntax interface vlan vlan id vlan id ID of the configured VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 169 4 Command Line Interface Example The f
181. acl permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any Console config ext acl 15 Includes TCP UDP or other protocol types 4 92 Access Control List Commands 4 This allows TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 to any destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 i e HTTP Console config ext acl permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any destination port 80 Console config ext acl Related Commands access list ip 4 90 show ip access list This command displays the rules for configured IP ACLs Syntax show ip access list standard extended ac _name e standard Specifies a standard IP ACL extended Specifies an extended IP ACL e acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip access list standard IP standard access list david permit host 10 1 1 21 permit 168 92 0 0 255 255 255 0 Console Related Commands permit deny 4 91 ip access group 4 93 ip access group This command binds a port to an IP ACL Use the no form to remove the port Syntax no ip access group ac _name in acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e in Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet 4 93 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage A port can only be bound to one ACL e Ifa portis already bound
182. adcast output 7 Ether like stats Alignment errors 0 FCS errors 0 Single Collision frames 0 Multiple collision frames 0 SQE Test errors 0 Deferred transmissions 0 Late collisions 0 Excessive collisions 0 Internal mac transmit errors 0 Internal mac receive errors 0 Frame too longs 0 Carrier sense errors 0 Symbol errors 0 RMON stats Drop events 0 Octets 4422579 Packets 31552 Broadcast pkts 238 Multi cast pkts 17033 Undersize pkts 0 Oversize pkts 0 Fragments 0 Jabbers 0 CRC align errors 0 Collisions 0 Packet size lt 64 octets 25568 Packet size 65 to 127 octets 1616 Packet size 128 to 255 octets 1249 Packet size 256 to 511 octets 1449 Packet size 512 to 1023 octets 802 Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets 871 Console Address Table Settings Switches store the addresses for all known devices This information is used to pass traffic directly between the inbound and outbound ports All the addresses learned by monitoring traffic are stored in the dynamic address table You can also manually configure static addresses that are bound to a specific port Setting Static Addresses A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table Command Attributes Static Address Count
183. ade the querier and assumes responsibility for keeping track of group membership In Band Management Management of the network from a station attached directly to the network IP Multicast Filtering A process whereby this switch can pass multicast traffic along to participating hosts Layer 2 Data Link layer in the ISO 7 Layer Data Communications Protocol This is related directly to the hardware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on MAC addresses Link Aggregation See Port Trunk Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Allows ports to automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP configured ports on another device Management Information Base MIB An acronym for Management Information Base It is a set of database objects that contains information about a specific device MD5 Message Digest Algorithm An algorithm that is used to create digital signatures It is intended for use with 32 bit machines and is safer than the MD4 algorithm which has been broken MD5 is a one way hash function meaning that it takes a message and converts it into a fixed string of digits also called a message digest Glossary 3 Glossary Multicast Switching A process whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for services for which no attached host has registered or forwards them to all ports contained within the designated multicast VLAN group Network Time Protocol NTP NTP provides the
184. al between time requests Range 16 16384 seconds Default Setting 16 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config sntp poll 60 Console config Related Commands sntp client 4 53 show sntp This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the SNTP client and indicates whether or not the local time has been properly updated Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the current time the poll interval used for sending time synchronization requests and the current SNTP mode i e unicast Example Console show sntp Current time Dec 23 05 13 28 2002 Poll interval 16 Current mode unicast SNTP status Enabled SNTP server 137 92 140 80 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Current server 137 92 140 80 Console 4 55 4 Command Line Interface clock timezone This command sets the time zone for the switch s internal clock Syntax clock timezone name hour hours minute minutes before utc after utc name Name of timezone usually an acronym Range 1 29 characters hours Number of hours before after UTC Range 0 12 hours e minutes Number of minutes before after UTC Range 0 59 minutes before utc Sets the local time zone before east of UTC e after utc Sets the local time zone after west of UTC Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the lo
185. alid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group Marker Received Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group LACPDUs Unknown Pkts Number of frames received that either 1 Carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain an unknown PDU or 2 are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address but do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type LACPDUs Illegal Pkts Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype Console show lacp internal Port channel 1 Oper Key 4 Admin Key 0 Eth 1 1 LACPDUs Internal 30 sec LACP System Priority 32768 LACP Port Priority 32768 Admin Key 4 Oper Key 4 Admin State defaulted aggregation long timeout LACP activity Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity 4 137 4 Command Line Interface Table 4 48 show lacp internal display description Field Description Oper Key Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port Admin Key Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port LACPDUs Internal Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU information LACP System Priority LACP system priority assigned to this port channel LACP Port Priority LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group Admin State Ad
186. also display a list of valid keywords for a specific command For example the command show displays a list of possible show commands Console show access group access list bridge ext calendar dot1ix garp gvrp history interfaces ip lacp line log logging mac address table management map port public key queue radius server running config snmp sntp spanning tree ssh startup config Access groups Access lists Bridge extension information Date and time information 802 1x content GARP properties GVRP interface information History information Interface information IP information LACP statistics TTY line information Login records Login setting Configuration of the address table anagement IP filter aps priority Port characteristics Public key information Priority queue information RADIUS server information Information on the running configuration Simple Network Management Protocol statistics Simple Network Time Protocol configuration Spanning tree configuration Secure shell server connections Startup system configuration system System information tacacs server TACACS server settings users Information about terminal lines version System hardware and software versions vlan Virtual LAN settings Console show The command show interfaces will display the following information Console show interfaces counters Interface counters information stat
187. ame The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned Range 1 32 characters Engine ID The engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where the remote user resides Note that the remote engine identifier must be specified before you configure a remote user See Specifying a Remote Engine ID on page 44 Model The user security model SNMP v1 v2c or v3 e Level The security level used for the user noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications This is the default for SNMPv3 AuthNoPriv SNMP communications use authentication but the data is not encrypted only available for the SNMPv3 security model AuthPriv SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption only available for the SNMPv3 security model Authentication The method used for user authentication Options MD5 SHA Default MD5 e Privacy The encryption algorithm use for data privacy only 56 bit DES is currently available Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Remote Users Click New to configure a user name In the New User page define a name and assign it to a group then click Add to save the configuration and return to the User Name list To delete a user check the box next to the user name then click Delete SNMPv3 Remote Users New Delete User Name Group Name Engine ID Model Level Authentication Privancy Figure 3 30 Configuring Remote SNM
188. an 3 Console config if 4 172 VLAN Commands 4 switchport allowed vlan This command configures VLAN groups on the selected interface Use the no form to restore the default Note Each port can only have one untagged VLAN If a second VLAN is defined for a port as untagged the other VLAN that had untagged status will automatically be changed to tagged Setting a VLAN untagged will also change the native VLAN of the port to this VLAN Syntax switchport allowed vlan add vian list tagged untagged remove vian list no switchport allowed vlan e add vian list List of VLAN identifiers to add remove vian list List of VLAN identifiers to remove e vian list Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs Do not enter leading zeros Range 1 4094 Default Setting All ports are assigned to VLAN 1 by default The default frame type is untagged Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage A port or a trunk with switchport mode set to hybrid must be assigned to a VLAN as untagged Ifa trunk has switchport mode set to trunk i e 1Q Trunk then you can only assign an interface to VLAN groups as a tagged member Frames are always tagged within the switch The tagged untagged parameter used when adding a VLAN to an interface tells the switch whether to keep or remove the tag from a frame on egress
189. an IP access list and enters configuration mode for standard or extended IP ACLs Use the no form to remove the specified ACL Syntax no access list ip standard extended acl_name standard Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source IP address extended Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source or destination IP address and other more specific criteria acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list To create an ACL you must add at least one rule to the list To remove a rule use the no permit or no deny command followed by the exact text of a previously configured rule e An ACL can contain up to 96 rules Example Console config access list ip standard david Console config std acl 4 90 Access Control List Commands 4 Related Commands permit deny 4 91 ip access group 4 93 show ip access list 4 93 permit deny Standard ACL This command adds a rule to a Standard IP ACL The rule sets a filter condition for packets emanating from the specified source Use the no form to remove a rule Syntax no permit deny any source bitmask host source any Any source IP address source Source IP
190. an address range Set any other required criteria such as VID Ethernet type or packet format Then click Add 3 72 Access Control Lists 3 MAC ACL Name Mac Source VID Ethernet Source Destination Destination Ethernet Packet Action MAC VID Bit Type Bit Remove Address Bit Mask MAC Address Bit Mask Mask ype Mask Format Action Permit Source Address Type An pe j Any Destination MAC Address Destination Bit Mask Ethernet Type Bit Mask Packet Format Any a Add Figure 3 46 Configuring MAC ACLs Binding a Port to an Access Control List After configuring the Access Control Lists ACL you can bind the ports that need to filter traffic to the appropriate ACLs You can assign one IP access list to any port Command Usage This switch supports ACLs for ingress filtering only Command Attributes Port Fixed port or SFP module Range 1 26 50 IP Specifies the IP ACL to bind to a port MAC Specifies the MAC ACL to bind to a port e IN ACL for ingress packets Web Click Security ACL Port Binding Click Edit to open the configuration page for the ACL type Mark the Enable field for the port you want to bind to an ACL for ingress or egress traffic select the required ACL from the drop down list then click Apply 3 73 3 Configuring the Switch ACL Port Binding 4 Port IP MAC IN OUT IN
191. an open a Telnet session by performing these steps 1 From the remote host enter the Telnet command and the IP address of the device you want to access 2 At the prompt enter the user name and system password The CLI will display the Vty n prompt for the administrator to show that you are using privileged access mode i e Privileged Exec or Vty n gt for the guest to show that you are using normal access mode i e Normal Exec where n indicates the number of the current Telnet session 3 Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks 4 When finished exit the session with the quit or exit command After entering the Telnet command the login screen displays Username admin Password CLI session with TigerSwitch 10 100 1000 is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Vty 0 Note You can open up to four sessions to the device via Telnet Entering Commands 4 Entering Commands This section describes how to enter CLI commands Keywords and Arguments A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments Keywords identify a command and arguments specify configuration parameters For example in the command show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 show interfaces and status are keywords ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type and 1 5 specifies the unit port You can enter commands as follows To enter a simple command enter the com
192. and sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Use the no form to restore the default Syntax dot1x max req count no dot1x max req count The maximum number of requests Range 1 10 Default 2 Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dotlx max req 2 Console config if dot1x port control This command sets the dot1x mode on a port interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax dot1x port control auto force authorized force unauthorized no dot1x port control e auto Requires a dot1x aware connected client to be authorized by the RADIUS server Clients that are not dot1x aware will be denied access force authorized Configures the port to grant access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise force unauthorized Configures the port to deny access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise 4 82 Authentication Commands 4 Default force authorized Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dotlx port control auto Console config if dot1x operation mode This command allows single or multiple hosts clients to connect to an 802 1X authorized port Use the no form with no keywords to restore the default to single host
193. ange 0 65535 Default 32768 Set Port Partner This menu sets the remote side of an aggregate link i e the ports on the attached device The command attributes have the same meaning as those used for the port actor However configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Web Click Port LACP Aggregation Port Set the System Priority Admin Key and Port Priority for the Port Actor You can optionally configure these settings for the Port Partner Be aware that these settings only affect the administrative state of the partner and will not take effect until the next time an aggregate link is formed with this device After you have completed setting the port LACP parameters click Apply Aggregation Port Set Port Actor Port System Priority Admin Key Port Priority 0 65535 0 65535 0 65535 1 3 120 32768 2 3 120 32768 3 3 120 32768 4 3 120 32768 5 3 120 32768 6 3 120 32768 7 3 120 32768 8 3 120 32768 Figure 3 53 LACP Port Configuration 3 85 3 Configuring the Switch CLI The following example configures LACP parameters for ports 1 4 Ports 1 4 are used as active members of the LAG Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 116 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 4 133 Console config if lacp actor admin key 120 4 134 Console
194. another rule for the address range 168 92 16 x 168 92 31 x using a bitmask Console config std acl permit host 10 1 1 21 4 91 Console config std acl permit 168 92 16 0 255 255 240 0 Console config std acl Configuring an Extended IP ACL Command Attributes Action An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules e Source Destination Address Type Specifies the source or destination IP address Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to specify a specific 3 69 3 Configuring the Switch host address in the Address field or IP to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields Options Any Host IP Default Any e Source Destination IP Address Source or destination IP address e Source Destination Subnet Mask Subnet mask for source or destination address e Service Type Packet priority settings based on the following criteria Precedence IP precedence level Range 0 7 TOS Type of Service level Range 0 15 DSCP DSCP priority level Range 0 63 Protocol Specifies the protocol type to match as TCP UDP or Others where others indicates a specific protocol number 0 255 Options TCP UDP Others Default TCP e Source Destination Port Source destination port number for the specified protocol type Range 0 65535 e Source Destination Port Bitmask Decimal number representing the port bits to matc
195. ard binding table with this command e Static bindings are processed as follows If there is no entry with same VLAN ID and MAC address a new entry is added to binding table using the type of static IP source guard binding If there is an entry with same VLAN ID and MAC address and the type of entry is static IP source guard binding then the new entry will replace the old one If there is an entry with same VLAN ID and MAC address and the type of the entry is dynamic DHCP snooping binding then the new entry will replace the old one and the entry type will be changed to static IP source guard binding Example This example configures a static source guard binding on port 5 Console config ip source guard binding 11 22 33 44 55 66 vlan 1 192 168 0 99 interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if Related Commands ip source guard 4 227 ip dhcp snooping 4 231 ip dhcp snooping vlan 4 233 show ip source guard This command shows whether source guard is enabled or disabled on each interface Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip source guard Interface Filter type Eth 1 1 DISABLED Eth 1 2 DISABLED Eth 1 3 DISABLED Eth 1 4 DISABLED Eth 1 5 SIP Eth 1 6 DISABLED show ip source guard binding This command shows the source guard binding table Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 230 DHCP Snooping Commands 4 Example Console show ip source guard binding MacAddress IpAd
196. ass of Service values i e Precedence value 0 maps to CoS value 0 and so forth Bits 6 and 7 are used for network control and the other bits for various application types ToS bits are defined in the following table Table 3 13 Mapping IP Precedence Priority Level Traffic Type Priority Level Traffic Type 7 Network Control 3 Flash Immediate 6 Internetwork Control 2 5 Critical 1 Priority 4 Flash Override 0 Routine Command Attributes IP Precedence Priority Table Shows the IP Precedence to CoS map e Class of Service Value Maps a CoS value to the selected IP Precedence value Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority 3 150 Class of Service Configuration 3 Web Click Priority IP Precedence Priority Select an entry from the IP Precedence Priority Table enter a value in the Class of Service Value field and then click Apply IP Precedence Priority IP Precedence 0 CoS0 IP Precedence 1 CoS1 IP Precedence 2 CoS2 IP Precedence 3 CoS3 IP Precedence 4 CoS 4 IP Precedence 5 CoS5 IP Precedence 6 CoS6 IP Precedence 7 CoS7 IP Precedence Priority Table Class of Service Value 0 7 Restore Default Figure 3 90 Mapping IP Precedence Priority Values CLI The following example globally enables IP Precedence service on the switch maps IP Precedence value 1 to CoS value 0 on port 1 and then displays the IP Precedence sett
197. assigned to the QinQ tunnel access port on the edge switch where the customer traffic enters the service provider s network Each customer requires a separate SPVLAN but this VLAN supports all of the customer s internal VLANs The QinQ tunnel uplink port that passes traffic from the edge switch into the service provider s metro network must also be added to this SPVLAN The uplink port can be added to multiple SPVLANs to carry inbound traffic for different customers onto the service provider s network When a double tagged packet enters another trunk port in an intermediate or core switch in the service provider s network the outer tag is stripped for packet processing When the packet exits another trunk port on the same core switch the same SPVLAN tag is again added to the packet When a packet enters the trunk port on the service provider s egress switch the outer tag is again stripped for packet processing However the SPVLAN tag is not added when it is sent out the tunnel access port on the edge switch into the customer s network The packet is sent as a normal IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame preserving the original VLAN numbers used in the customer s network Customer AN Fi N Customer A VLANs 1 10 N ___ VLANs 1 10 ye QinQ Tunneling IN Ko NS ServiceProvider ServiceProvider VLAN10 e n y VLAN10 i edge switch A edge switch B TunnelAccessPort teog 3 eee f Toren TunnelAccessPort i p TunnelA
198. ation If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can also use the Protocol Migration button to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format RSTP or STP compatible to send on the selected interfaces Default Disabled Web Click Spanning Tree STA Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Modify the required attributes then click Apply STA Port Configuration me Admin Path Admin Edge Spanning Puey Cost Admin Link Port Port Tres STA State rs 1 200000000 Type Fast Migration Trunk ps 0 Auto Forwarding 1 MEnabled Forwarding 128 0 Auto x Enabled 7I Enabled 2 MEnabled Discarding 128 0 Auto x Enabled Enabled 3 MEnabled Discarding 128 0 Auto yl Enabled Enabled 4 Enabled Discarding 128 0 Auto x Enabled Enabled 5 MEnabled Discarding 128 0 Auto il Enabled Enabled 6 MEnabled Discarding 128 0 Auto x Enabled Enabled Figure 3 67 Configuring Spanning Tree per Port CLI This example sets STA attributes for port 7 Console config interface ethernet 1 7 4 116 Console config if spanning tree port priority 0 4 155 Console config if spanning tree cost 50 4 154 Console config if spanning tree link type auto 4 157 Console config if no spanning tr
199. ation Timeout Specifies the time interval in seconds that the SSH server waits for a response from a client during an authentication attempt Range 1 120 seconds Default 120 seconds SSH Authentication Retries Specifies the number of authentication attempts that a client is allowed before authentication fails and the client has to restart the authentication process Range 1 5 times Default 3 SSH Server Key Size Specifies the SSH server key size Range 512 896 bits Default 768 The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch The host key is shared with the SSH client and is fixed at 1024 bits Web Click Security SSH Settings Enable SSH and adjust the authentication parameters as required then click Apply Note that you must first generate the host key pair on the SSH Host Key Settings page before you can enable the SSH server SSH Settings SSH Server Status Enabled SSH Authentication Timeout 1 120 120 SSH Authentication Retries 1 5 3 Figure 3 36 SSH Server Settings 3 56 User Authentication 3 CLI This example enables SSH sets the authentication parameters and displays the current configuration It shows that the administrator has made a connection via SHH and then disables this connection Console config ip ssh server 4 35 Console config ip ssh timeout 100 4 36 Console config ip ssh authentication retries 5 4 37 Console config ip ss
200. attached client is using a nonstandard 2 byte ethertype to identify 802 1Q tagged frames The default ethertype value is 0x8100 See Adding an Interface to a QinQ Tunne on page 3 138 Configure the QinQ tunnel access port to join the SPVLAN as an untagged member see Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index on page 3 129 Configure the SPVLAN ID as the native VID on the QinQ tunnel access port see Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces on page 3 132 Configure the QinQ tunnel uplink port to 802 1Q Tunnel Uplink mode see 3 136 Configuring IEEE 802 1 Tunneling lt 3 Adding an Interface to a QinQ Tunnel on page 3 138 8 Configure the QinQ tunnel uplink port to join the SPVLAN as a tagged member see Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index on page 3 129 Enabling QinQ Tunneling on the Switch The switch can be configured to operate in normal VLAN mode or IEEE 802 1Q QinQ tunneling mode which is used for passing Layer 2 traffic across a service provider s metropolitan area network Command Attributes 802 1Q Tunnel Sets the switch to QinQ mode and allows the QinQ tunnel port to be configured The default is for the switch to function in normal mode 802 1Q Ethernet Type The Tag Protocol Identifier TPID specifies the ethertype of incoming packets on a tunnel port Range hexadecimal 0800 FFFF Default 8100 Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN 802 1Q Tunnel Status Check the E
201. authentication requests to the RADIUS server Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server timeout number_of_seconds no radius server timeout number_of_seconds Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending a request Range 1 65535 Default Setting 5 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server timeout 10 Console config show radius server This command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show radius server Remote RADIUS server configuration Global settings Communication key with RADIUS server Server port number 1812 Retransmit times z Request timeout 5 Sever 1 Server IP address 192 168 1 1 Communication key with RADIUS server Server port number 1812 Retransmit times 2 Request timeout 5 Console 4 76 Authentication Commands 4 TACACS Client Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TACACS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to TACACS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch Table 4 30 TACACS Commands Command Function Mode Page tacacs se
202. ave a valid network connection to the switch and that the port you are using has not been disabled Be sure you have configured the VLAN interface through which the management station is connected with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway Be sure the management station has an IP address in the same subnet as the switch s IP interface to which it is connected e If you are trying to connect to the switch via the IP address for a tagged VLAN group your management station and the ports connecting intermediate switches in the network must be configured with the appropriate tag e Ifyou cannot connect using Telnet you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet SSH sessions permitted Try connecting again at a later time Cannot connect using Secure Shell e If you cannot connect using SSH you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet SSH sessions permitted Try connecting again at a later time Be sure the control parameters for the SSH server are properly configured on the switch and that the SSH client software is properly configured on the management station Be sure you have generated a public key on the switch and exported this key to the SSH client Be sure you have set up an account on the switch for each SSH user including user name authentication level and password Be sure you have imported the client s public key to the switch if public key authentication i
203. bal Configuration 4 218 mvr Interface Configuration 4 219 show mvr 4 221 IP Interface Commands 4 223 ip address 4 223 ip default gateway 4 224 ip dhcp restart 4 225 show ip interface 4 225 show ip redirects 4 226 ping 4 226 IP Source Guard Commands 4 227 ip source guard 4 227 ip source guard binding 4 229 show ip source guard 4 230 show ip source guard binding 4 230 DHCP Snooping Commands 4 231 ip dhcp snooping 4 231 ip dhcp snooping vlan 4 233 ip dhcp snooping trust 4 234 ip dhcp snooping verify mac address 4 235 ip dhcp snooping information option 4 235 ip dhcp snooping information policy 4 236 show ip dhcp snooping 4 237 show ip dhcp snooping binding 4 237 Switch Cluster Commands 4 237 xii Contents cluster 4 238 cluster commander 4 239 cluster ip pool 4 239 cluster member 4 240 rcommand 4 240 show cluster 4 241 show cluster members 4 241 show cluster candidates 4 242 Appendix A Software Specifications A 1 Software Features A 1 Management Features A 2 Standards A 2 Management Information Bases A 3 Appendix B Troubleshooting B 1 Problems Accessing the Management Interface B 1 Using System Logs B 2 Glossary Index xiii Contents xiv Tables Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 3 6 Table 3 7 Table 3 8 Table 3 9 Table 3 10 Table 3 11 Table 3 12 Table 3 13 Table 3 14 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 4 4 Table 4 5 Table 4 6 Table 4 7 Tab
204. bo frames to support data packets up to 9000 bytes in size Command Attributes Jumbo Packet Status Check the box to enable jumbo frames Web Click System Jumbo Frames Jumbo Frames Jumbo Packet Status l Enabled Figure 3 8 Bridge Extension Configuration CLI Enter the following command Console config Console config jumbo frame Console config Managing Firmware You can upload download firmware to or from a TFTP server or copy files to and from switch units in a stack By saving runtime code to a file on a TFTP server that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore operation You can also set the switch to use new firmware without overwriting the previous version You must specify the method of file transfer along with the file type and file names as required Command Attributes File Transfer Method The firmware copy operation includes these options file to file Copies a file within the switch directory assigning it a new name file to tftp Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server tftp to file Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch e TFTP Server IP Address The IP address of a TFTP server File Type Specify opcode operational code to copy firmware 3 17 3 Configuring the Switch e File Name The file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the
205. c Command Usage If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can also use the spanning tree protocol migration command at any time to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interfaces i e RSTP or STP compatible Example Console spanning tree protocol migration eth 1 5 Console show spanning tree This command shows the configuration for the common spanning tree CST or for an instance within the multiple spanning tree MST Syntax show spanning tree interface mst instance_id interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 50 port channel channel id Range 1 32 instance_id Instance identifier of the multiple spanning tree Range 0 4094 no leading zeroes Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 160 Spanning Tree Commands 4 Command Usage Use the show spanning tree command with no parameters to display the spanning tree configuration for the switch for the Common Spanning Tree CST and for every interface in the tree Use the show spanning tree interface command to display the spanning tree configuration for an interface within the Common Spanning Tree CST Use the show spanning tree mst instance_id command to display the spann
206. cal time zone relative to the Coordinated Universal Time UTC formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT based on the earth s prime meridian zero degrees longitude To display a time corresponding to your local time you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east before or west after of UTC Example Console config clock timezone Japan hours 8 minute 0 after UTC Console config Related Commands show sntp 4 55 calendar set This command sets the system clock It may be used if there is no time server on your network or if you have not configured the switch to receive signals from a time server Syntax calendar set hour min sec day month year month day year hour Hour in 24 hour format Range 0 23 e min Minute Range 0 59 sec Second Range 0 59 day Day of month Range 1 31 month january february march april may june july august september october november december year Year 4 digit Range 2001 2100 4 56 System Management Commands 4 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows how to set the system clock to 15 12 34 April 1st 2004 Console calendar set 15 12 34 1 April 2004 Console show calendar This command displays the system clock Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show calendar 15 12 43 April 1
207. cast VLAN Registration MVR A single network wide VLAN can be used to transmit multicast traffic such as television channels across a service provider s network Any multicast traffic entering an MVR VLAN is sent to all subscribers This can significantly reduce to processing overhead required to dynamically monitor and establish the distribution tree for a normal multicast VLAN Also note that MVR maintains the user isolation and data security provided by VLAN segregation by passing only multicast traffic into other VLANs to which the subscribers belong Table 4 72 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands Command Function Mode Page myr Globally enables MVR statically configures MVR group GC 4 218 address es or specifies the MVR VLAN identifier myr Configures an interface as an MVR receiver or source port IC 4 219 enables immediate leave capability or configures an interface as a static member of the MVR VLAN show mvr Shows information about the global MVR configuration PE 4 221 settings the interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN or the multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN 4 217 4 Command Line Interface mvr Global Configuration This command enables Multicast VLAN Registration MVR globally on the switch statically configures MVR multicast group IP address es using the group keyword or specifies the MVR VLAN identifier using the vlan keyword Use the no form of this command without any
208. cation string GC 4 103 prompt This command customizes the CLI prompt Use the no form to restore the default prompt Syntax prompt string no prompt string Any alphanumeric string to use for the CLI prompt Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting Console Command Mode Global Configuration 4 24 System Management Commands 4 Example Console config prompt RD2 RD2 config hostname This command specifies or modifies the host name for this device Use the no form to restore the default host name Syntax hostname name no hostname name The name of this host Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config hostname RD 1 Console config User Access Commands The basic commands required for management access are listed in this section This switch also includes other options for password checking via the console or a Telnet connection page 4 10 user authentication via a remote authentication server page 4 70 and host access authentication for specific ports page 4 81 Table 4 9 User Access Commands Command Function Mode Page username Establishes a user name based authentication system at login GC 4 25 enable password Sets a password to control access to the Privileged Exec level GC 4 26 username This command adds named users requires
209. ccessPort VLAN20 f VLAN2Q Tunnel Uplink Ports a CustomerB A Double Tagged Packets Xe Customer B VLANs 1 50 OuterTag Service Provider VID s VLANs 1 50 y InnerTag Customer VID w S Layer 2 Flow for Packets Coming into a Tunnel Access Port A QinQ tunnel port may receive either tagged or untagged packets No matter how many tags the incoming packet has it is treated as tagged packet The ingress process does source and destination lookups If both lookups are successful the ingress process writes the packet to memory Then the egress process transmits the packet Packets entering a QinQ tunnel port are processed in the following manner 1 New SPVLAN tags are added to all incoming packets no matter how many tags they already have The ingress process constructs and inserts the outer tag 3 134 Configuring IEEE 802 1 Tunneling lt 3 SPVLAN into the packet based on the default VLAN ID and Tag Protocol Identifier TPID that is the ether type of the tag This outer tag is used for learning and switching packets The priority of the inner tag is copied to the outer tag if it is a tagged or priority tagged packet After successful source and destination lookup the ingress process sends the packet to the switching process with two tags If the incoming packet is untagged the outer tag is an SPVLAN tag and the inner tag is a dummy tag 8100 0000 If the incoming packet is tagged the out
210. ce You can disable an interface due to abnormal behavior e g excessive collisions and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved You may also disable an interface for security reasons 3 78 Port Configuration 3 Speed Duplex Allows you to manually set the port speed and duplex mode i e with auto negotiation disabled Flow Control Allows automatic or manual selection of flow control Autonegotiation Port Capabilities Allows auto negotiation to be enabled disabled When auto negotiation is enabled you need to specify the capabilities to be advertised When auto negotiation is disabled you can force the settings for speed mode and flow control The following capabilities are supported 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 1000full Combo ports only Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation Default Autonegotiation enabled Advertised capabilities for 100BASE TX 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000BASE T 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full 10OOBASE SX LX ZX 1000full e Media Type Media type used for the combo ports 21 24 SMC8126L2 or 45 48 SMC8150L2 Options Coppper Forced SFP Forced or SFP Preferred Auto Default SFP Preferred Auto Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk
211. cess Range 1 64 characters Write View The configured view for write access Range 1 64 characters e Notify View The configured view for notifications Range 1 64 characters Table 3 4 Supported Notification Messages Object Label Object ID Description RFC 1493 Traps newRoot 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 The newRoot trap indicates that the sending agent has become the new root of the Spanning Tree the trap is sent by a bridge soon after its election as the new root e g upon expiration of the Topology Change Timer immediately subsequent to its election 3 41 3 Configuring the Switch Table 3 4 Supported Notification Messages Continued Object Label Object ID Description topologyChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 A topologyChange trap is sent by a bridge when any of its configured ports transitions from the Learning state to the Forwarding state or from the Forwarding state to the Discarding state The trap is not sent if a newRoot trap is sent for the same transition SNMPv2 Traps coldStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 A coldStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity acting in an agent role is reinitializing itself and that its configuration may have been altered warmStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 A warmStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity acting in an agent role is reinitializing itself such that its configuration is unaltered linkDown 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1
212. cess rights for any device that is plugged into the switch A user name and password is requested by the switch and then passed to an authentication server e g RADIUS for verification EAPOL is implemented as part of the IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication standard Glossary 1 Glossary GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP Defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register necessary VLAN members on ports along the Spanning Tree so that VLANs defined in each switch can work automatically over a Spanning Tree network Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP GARP is a protocol that can be used by endstations and switches to register and propagate multicast group membership information in a switched environment so that multicast data frames are propagated only to those parts of a switched LAN containing registered endstations Formerly called Group Address Registration Protocol Generic Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP GMRP allows network devices to register end stations with multicast groups GMRP requires that any participating network devices or end stations comply with the IEEE 802 1p standard Group Attribute Registration Protocol GARP See Generic Attribute Registration Protocol IEEE 802 1D Specifies a general method for the operation of MAC bridges including the Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 10 VLAN Tagging Defines Ethernet frame tags which carry VLAN information It all
213. ch complete the following steps 1 From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type interface vlan 1 to access the interface configuration mode Press lt Enter gt 2 Type ip address jp address netmask where ip address is the switch IP address and netmask is the network mask for the network Press lt Enter gt 3 Type exit to return to the global configuration mode prompt Press lt Enter gt 4 Tosetthe IP address of the default gateway for the network to which the switch belongs type ip default gateway gateway where gateway is the IP address of the default gateway Press lt Enter gt Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 5 255 255 255 0 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 192 168 1 254 Console config Dynamic Configuration If you select the bootp or dhcp option IP will be enabled but will not function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received You therefore need to use the ip dhcp restart command to start broadcasting service requests Requests will be sent periodically in an effort to obtain IP configuration information BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP address subnet mask and default gateway If the bootp or dhcp option is saved to the startup config file step 6 then the switch will start broadcasting service requests as soon as it i
214. ch bridging device except for the root device which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device Then it selects a designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device All ports connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports After determining the lowest cost spanning tree it enables all root ports and designated ports and 3 102 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 disables all other ports Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports eliminating any possible network loops Z Designated 2 Root Yy Designated KT Root i C Cyne e C X D L TT Y 1 o Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the Root Bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Maximum Age the bridge assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid network topology RSTP is designed as a general replacement for the slower legacy STP RSTP is also incorporated into MSTP RSTP achieves must faster reconfiguration i e around 1 to 3 seconds compared to 30 seconds or more for STP by reducing the number of state changes be
215. ch can access The following exchanges take place during this process a The client sends its public key to the switch b The switch compares the client s public key to those stored in memory c Ifa match is found the switch uses the public key to encrypt a random sequence of bytes and sends this string to the client d The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes and sends the decrypted bytes back to the switch e The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it sent If the two sets match this means that the client s private key corresponds to an authorized public key and the client is authenticated Notes 1 To use SSH with only password authentication the host public key must still be given to the client either during initial connection or manually entered into the known host file However you do not need to configure the client s keys 2 The SSH server supports up to four client sessions The maximum number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions 3 55 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring the SSH Server The SSH server includes basic settings for authentication Field Attributes SSH Server Status Allows you to enable disable the SSH server on the switch Default Disabled e Version The Secure Shell version number Version 2 0 is displayed but the switch supports management access via either SSH Version 1 5 or 2 0 clients e SSH Authentic
216. cket size 65 to 127 octets 139 Packet size 128 to 255 octets 49 Packet size 256 to 511 octets 0 Console Packet size 512 to 1023 octets 0 Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets 0 show interfaces switchport This command displays the administrative and operational status of the specified interfaces Syntax show interfaces switchport interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 26 50 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting Shows all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed 4 125 4 Command Line Interface Example This example shows the configuration setting for port 24 LACP status Ingress Rate Limit Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 24 Broadcast threshold Enabled 500 packets second Enabled Disabled 100000 Kbits per second Egress Rate Limit Disabled 100000 Kbits per second VLAN membership mode Hybrid Ingress rule Enabled Acceptable frame type All frames Native VLAN si Priority for untagged traffic 0 Gvrp status Disabled Allowed Vlan Iiu Forbidden Vlan Private VLAN mode NONE Private VLAN host association NONE Private VLAN mapping NONE Console Table 4 43 Interfaces Switchport Statistics Field Description Broadcast threshold Shows if broadcast storm suppression is enabl
217. class map command to designate a class map and enter the Class Map configuration mode Then use the match command to specify the fields within ingress packets that must match to qualify for this class map Only one match command can be entered per class map Example This example creates a class map called rd_class 1 and sets it to match packets marked for DSCP service value 3 Console config class map rd_class 1l_ match any Console config cmap match ip dscp 3 Console config cmap This example creates a class map call rd_class 2 and sets it to match packets marked for IP Precedence service value 5 Console config class map rd_class 2 match any Console config cmap match ip precedence 5 Console config cmap This example creates a class map call rd_class 3 and sets it to match packets marked for VLAN 1 Console config class map rd_class 3 match any Console config cmap match vlan 1 Console config cmap policy map This command creates a policy map that can be attached to multiple interfaces and enters Policy Map configuration mode Use the no form to delete a policy map and return to Global configuration mode Syntax no policy map policy map name policy map name Name of the policy map Range 1 16 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 195 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage Use the policy map
218. col vlan protocol group Configuring Interfaces This command maps a protocol group to a VLAN for the current interface Use the no form to remove the protocol mapping for this interface Syntax protocol vian protocol group group id vlan vian id no protocol vian protocol group group id vlan group id Group identifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 e vian id VLAN to which matching protocol traffic is forwarded Range 1 4094 Default Setting No protocol groups are mapped for any interface Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e When creating a protocol based VLAN only assign interfaces via this command If you assign interfaces using any of the other VLAN commands such as vlan on page 4 168 these interfaces will admit traffic of any protocol type into the associated VLAN e When a frame enters a port that has been assigned to a protocol VLAN it is processed in the following manner If the frame is tagged it will be processed according to the standard rules applied to tagged frames If the frame is untagged and the protocol type matches the frame is forwarded to the appropriate VLAN 4 182 VLAN Commands 4 Ifthe frame is untagged but the protocol type does not match the frame is forwarded to the default VLAN for this interface Example The following example maps the traffic entering Port 1 which matches the protocol type specified in protocol group 1 to
219. command sets the time that an interface on the switch waits during an authentication session before re transmitting an EAP packet Use the no form to reset to the default value Syntax dot1x timeout tx period seconds no dot1x timeout tx period seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 30 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration 4 85 4 Command Line Interface Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dotlx timeout tx period 300 Console config if show dot1x This command shows general port authentication related settings on the switch or a specific interface Syntax show dot1x statistics interface interface e statistics Displays dot1x status for each port e interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 26 50 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the following information Global 802 1X Parameters Shows whether or not 802 1X port authentication is globally enabled on the switch 802 1X Port Summary Displays the port access control parameters for each interface including the following items Status Administrative state for port access control Operation Mode Dot1x port control operation mode page 4 83 Mode Dot1x port control mode page 4 82 Authorized Authorization status yes or n a not authorized 4 86 Authentication Commands
220. community strings and related trap functions 3 33 Agent Status Enables or disables SNMP Agent Status 3 35 SNMPv3 3 36 3 4 Navigating the Web Browser Interface 3 Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page Engine ID Sets the SNMP v3 engine ID on this switch 3 36 Remote Engine ID Sets the SNMP v3 engine ID for a remote device 3 37 Users Configures SNMP v3 users on this switch 3 37 Remote Users Configures SNMP v3 users from a remote device 3 40 Groups Configures SNMP v3 groups 3 41 Views Configures SNMP v3 views 3 45 Security 3 46 User Accounts Assigns a new password for the current user 3 46 Authentication Settings Configures authentication sequence RADIUS and TACACS 3 48 HTTPS Settings Configures secure HTTP settings 3 52 SSH 3 54 Settings Configures Secure Shell server settings 3 59 Host Key Settings Generates the host key pair public and private 3 57 Port Security Configures per port security including status response for 3 59 security breach and maximum allowed MAC addresses 802 1X Port authentication 3 60 Information Displays global configuration settings 3 62 Configuration Configures the global configuration setting 3 62 Port Configuration Sets parameters for individual ports 3 63 Statistics Displays protocol statistics for the selected port 3 66 ACL 3 67 Configuration Configures packet filtering based on IP or M
221. config enable password level 15 0 admin Console config Related Commands enable 4 19 authentication enable 4 72 IP Filter Commands Table 4 11 IP Filter Commands Command Function Mode Page management Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access GC 4 27 show management Displays the switch to be monitored or configured from a PE 4 28 browser management This command specifies the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch through various protocols Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax no management all client http client snmp client telnet client start address end address all client Adds IP address es to the SNMP web and Telnet groups e http client Adds IP address es to the web group e snmp client Adds IP address es to the SNMP group 4 27 4 Command Line Interface telnet client Adds IP address es to the Telnet group e start address A single IP address or the starting address of a range end address The end address of a range Default Setting All addresses Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Ifanyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid address the switch will reject the connection enter an event message in the system log and send a trap message to the trap manager e IP address can be configured for SNMP web and Telnet access
222. config if lacp actor port priority 128 4 136 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 4 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 Console config if lacp actor admin key 120 Console config if lacp actor port priority 512 Console config if end Console show lacp sysid 4 136 Port Channel System Priority System MAC Address 1 3 00 12 CF 31 31 31 2 32768 00 12 CF 31 31 31 3 32768 00 12 CF 31 31 31 4 32768 00 12 CF 31 31 31 Console show lacp 1 internal 4 136 Port channel 1 Oper Key 120 Admin Key 0 Eth 1 1 LACPDUs Internal 30 sec LACP System Priority 3 LACP Port Priority 128 Admin Key 120 Oper Key 120 Admin State defaulted aggregation long timeout LACP activity Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity Displaying LACP Port Counters You can display statistics for LACP protocol messages Table 3 7 LACP Port Counters Field Description LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group Marker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group Marker Received Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group 3 86 Port Configuration 3 Table 3 7 LACP Port Counters Continued Field Description Marker Unknown Pkts Number of frames received that either 1 Carry the Slow Prot
223. configure the STA interface settings for an MST Instance using the MSTP Port Configuration and MSTP Trunk Configuration pages Field Attributes The following attributes are read only and cannot be changed e STA State Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree See Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 111 for additional information 3 120 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Configuration only The following interface attributes can be configured MST Instance ID Instance identifier to configure Default 0 e Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority i e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Protocol is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority th
224. copy a public key used by SSH from a TFTP server Note that public key authentication via SSH is only supported for users configured locally on the switch Console copy tftp public key TFTP server IP address 192 168 1 19 Choose public key type 1 RSA 2 DSA lt 1 2 gt 1 Source file name steve pub Username steve TFTP Download Success Write to FLASH Programming Success Console delete This command deletes a file or image Syntax delete unit filename filename Name of the configuration file or image name unit Stack unit Always unit 1 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e Ifthe file type is used for system startup then this file cannot be deleted e Factory_Default_Config cfg cannot be deleted A colon is required after the specified unit number Example This example shows how to delete the test2 cfg configuration file from flash memory for unit 1 Console delete l test2 cfg Console Related Commands dir 4 68 delete public key 4 38 4 67 4 Command Line Interface dir This command displays a list of files in flash memory Syntax dir unit boot rom config opcode filename The type of file or image to display includes boot rom Boot ROM or diagnostic image file config Switch configuration file opcode Run time operation code image file filename Name of the configuration file or code image
225. covery by allowing two or more redundant connections to be created between a pair of LAN segments When there are multiple physical paths between segments this protocol will choose a single path and disable all others to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network This prevents the creation of network loops However if the chosen path should fail for any reason an alternate path will be activated to maintain the connection Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w This protocol reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to 3 to 5 seconds compared to 30 1 3 4 Introduction seconds or more for the older IEEE 802 1D STP standard It is intended as a complete replacement for STP but can still interoperate with switches running the older standard by automatically reconfiguring ports to STP compliant mode if they detect STP protocol messages from attached devices Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 1s This protocol is a direct extension of RSTP It can provide an independent spanning tree for different VLANs It simplifies network management provides for even faster convergence than RSTP by limiting the size of each region and prevents VLAN members from being segmented from the rest of the group as sometimes occurs with IEEE 802 1D STP Virtual LANs The switch supports up to 256 VLANs A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision do
226. ction Aging Time The time after which a learned entry is discarded Range 10 630 seconds Default 300 seconds Web Click Address Table Address Aging Specify the new aging time click Apply Address Aging Aging Status 7 Enabled Aging Time 10 1000000 300 seconds Figure 3 63 Setting the Address Aging Time CLI This example sets the aging time to 300 seconds Console config mac address table aging time 300 4 142 Console config Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration The Spanning Tree Algorithm STA can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STA compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions e STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w e MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s Note MSTP is not supported in the current software STP uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device STP compliant switch bridge or router that serves as the root of the spanning tree network It selects a root port on ea
227. ction should be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch Example Console config bridge ext gvrp Console config show bridge ext This command shows the configuration for bridge extension commands Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage See Displaying Basic VLAN Information on page 3 126 and Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities on page 3 13 for a description of the displayed items Example Console show bridge ext Max support vlan numbers 299 Max support vlan ID 4094 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning SVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic classes Enabled Global GVRP status Enabled GMRP Disabled Console 4 164 VLAN Commands 4 switchport gvrp This command enables GVRP for a port Use the no form to disable it Syntax no switchport gvrp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example Console config interface ethernet 1 6 Console config if switchport gvrp Console config if show gvrp configuration This command shows if GVRP is enabled Syntax show gvrp configuration interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 26 50 port channel channel id Range
228. ctos aes128 cbc hmac md5 stoc aes128 cbc hmac md5 Console Table 4 16 show ssh display description Field Description Session The session number Range 0 3 Version The Secure Shell version number State The authentication negotiation state Values Negotiation Started Authentication Started Session Started Username The user name of the client 4 40 System Management Commands 4 Table 4 16 show ssh display description Continued Field Description Encryption The encryption method is automatically negotiated between the client and server Options for SSHv1 5 include DES 3DES Options for SSHv2 0 can include different algorithms for the client to server ctos and server to client stoc aes128 cbc hmac sha1 aes192 cbc hmac sha1 aes256 cbc hmac sha1 3des cbc hmac sha1 blowfish cbc hmac sha1 aes128 cbc hmac md5 aes192 cbc hmac md5 aes256 cbc hmac md5 3des cbc hmac md5 blowfish cbc hmac md5 Terminology DES Data Encryption Standard 56 bit key 3DES Triple DES Uses three iterations of DES 112 bit key aes Advanced Encryption Standard 160 or 224 bit key blowfish Blowfish 32 448 bit key cbc cypher block chaining sha Secure Hash Algorithm 1 160 bit hashes md5 Message Digest algorithm number 5 128 bit hashes show public key This command shows the public key for the specified user or for the host Syntax show public key user username host use
229. current state of this port within the Spanning Tree Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses The rules defining port status are A port on a network segment with no other STA compliant bridging device is always forwarding If two ports of a switch are connected to the same segment and there is no other STA device attached to this segment the port with the smaller ID forwards packets and the other is discarding All ports are discarding when the switch is booted then some of them change state to learning and then to forwarding Forward Transitions The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding state Designated Cost The cost for a packet to travel from this port to the root in the current Spanning Tree configuration The slower the media the higher the cost Designated Bridge The bridge priority and MAC address of the device through which this port must communicate to reach the root of the Spanning Tree Designated Port The port priority and number of the port on the designated bridging device through which this switch must communicate with the r
230. d and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ Note The maximum number of user defined configuration files is limited only by available flash memory space Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server You can download the configuration file under a new file name and then set it as the startup file or you can specify the current startup configuration file as the destination file to directly replace it Note that the file Factory_Default_Config cfg can be copied to the TFTP server but cannot be used as the destination on the switch Web Click System File Copy Operation Select tftp to startup config or tftp to file and enter the IP address of the TFTP server Specify the name of the file to download and select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name then click Apply Copy Figure 3 12 Downloading Configuration Settings for Startup If you download to a new file name using tftp to startup config or tftp to file the file is automatically set as the start up configuration file To use the new settings reboot the system via the System Reset menu 3 20 Basic Configuration 3 Note You can also select any configuration file as the start up configuration by using the System File Set Start Up page Set Start Up Name Type Sta
231. d Forces the port to deny access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise Re authen Sets the client to be re authenticated after the interval specified by the Re authentication Period Re authentication can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port Default Disabled Max Regq Sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Range 1 10 Default 2 Quiet Period Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Range 1 65535 seconds Default 60 seconds Re authen Period Sets the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Range 1 65535 seconds Default 3600 seconds Tx Period Sets the time period during an authentication session that the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet Range 1 65535 Default 30 seconds Authorized Yes Connected client is authorized No Connected client is not authorized Blank Displays nothing when dot1x is disabled on a port Supplicant Indicates the MAC address of a connected client Trunk Indicates if the port is configured as a trunk port Web Click Security 802 1X Port Configuration Modify the parameters required and click Apply 3 63 3 Configuring the Switch 802 1X
232. d perform these steps 1 To initiate your console connection press lt Enter gt The User Access Verification procedure starts 2 Atthe Username prompt enter admin At the Password prompt also enter admin The password characters are not displayed on the console screen 4 The session is opened and the CLI displays the Console prompt indicating you have access at the Privileged Exec level 2 Initial Configuration Setting Passwords Note If this is your first time to log into the CLI program you should define new passwords for both default user names using the username command record them and put them in a safe place Passwords can consist of up to 8 alphanumeric characters and are case sensitive To prevent unauthorized access to the switch set the passwords as follows 1 Open the console interface with the default user name and password admin to access the Privileged Exec level 2 Type configure and press lt Enter gt 3 Type username guest password 0 password for the Normal Exec level where password is your new password Press lt Enter gt 4 Type username admin password 0 password for the Privileged Exec level where password is your new password Press lt Enter gt Note 0 specifies the password in plain text 7 specifies the password in encrypted form Username admin Password CLI session with the TigerSwitch 10 100 1000 is
233. d port If the received packet is a DHCP ACK message a dynamic DHCP snooping entry is also added to the binding table If DHCP snooping is enabled globally and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received but the port is not trusted it is processed as follows If the DHCP packet is a reply packet from a DHCP server including OFFER ACK or NAK messages the packet is dropped If the DHCP packet is from a client such as a DECLINE or RELEASE message the switch forwards the packet only if the corresponding entry is found in the binding table If the DHCP packet is from client such as a DISCOVER REQUEST INFORM DECLINE or RELEASE message the packet is forwarded if MAC address verification is disabled as specified by the ip dhcp snooping verify mac address command page 4 235 However if MAC address verification is enabled then the packet will only be forwarded if the client s hardware address stored in the DHCP packet is the same as the source MAC address in the Ethernet header If the DHCP packet is not a recognizable type it is dropped Ifa DHCP packet from a client passes the filtering criteria above it will only be forwarded to trusted ports in the same VLAN Ifa DHCP packet is from server is received on a trusted port it will be forwarded to both trusted and untrusted ports in the same VLAN If the DHCP snooping is globally disabled all dynamic bindings are removed from the binding table Add
234. d Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show policy map Policy Map rd_policy class rd_class set ip dscp 3 Console show policy map rd_policy class rd_class Policy Map rd_policy class rd_class set ip dscp 3 Console show policy map interface This command displays the service policy assigned to the specified interface Syntax show policy map interface interface input interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 26 50 port channel channel id Range 1 32 4 200 Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console Console show policy Service policy rd_policy input map interface ethernet 1 5 Multicast Filtering Commands This switch uses IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol to query for any attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service It identifies the ports containing hosts requesting a service and sends data out to those ports only It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Table 4 67 Multicast Filtering Commands Command Groups Function Page IGMP Snooping Configures multicast groups via IGMP snooping or static assignment 4 201 sets the IGMP version displays current snooping and query settings and displays the multicast service and group members
235. d as trunk members the trunk uses the settings applied to the first port member in the trunk IGMP throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port the switch can take one of two actions either deny or replace If the action is set to deny any new IGMP join reports will be dropped If the action is set to replace the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group Command Attributes Profile Selects an existing profile number to assign to an interface Max Multicast Groups Sets the maximum number of multicast groups an interface can join at the same time Range 0 256 Default 256 Current Multicast Groups Displays the current number of multicast groups the interface has joined Throttling Action Mode Sets the action to take when the maximum number of multicast groups for the interface has been exceeded Default Deny e deny The new multicast group join report is dropped e replace The new multicast group replaces an existing group Throttling Status Indicates if the throttling action has been implemented on the interface Options True or False Trunk Indicates if a port is a trunk member 3 171 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Filter Throttling Port Configuration or IGMP Filter Throttling Trunk Config
236. d by the exec timeout command for vty sessions Example Console config ip ssh timeout 60 Console config Related Commands exec timeout 4 13 show ip ssh 4 40 4 36 System Management Commands 4 ip ssh authentication retries This command configures the number of times the SSH server attempts to reauthenticate a user Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh authentication retries count no ip ssh authentication retries count The number of authentication attempts permitted after which the interface is reset Range 1 5 Default Setting 3 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip ssh authentication retires 2 Console config Related Commands show ip ssh 4 40 ip ssh server key size This command sets the SSH server key size Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh server key size key size no ip ssh server key size key size The size of server key Range 512 896 bits Default Setting 768 bits Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch e The host key is shared with the SSH client and is fixed at 1024 bits Example Console config ip ssh server key size 512 Console config 4 37 4 Command Line Interface delete public key This command deletes the specified user s public key Syntax delete
237. d to filter Ethernet II formatted packets A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060 A few of the more common types include the following 0800 IP 0806 ARP 8137 IPX Example This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address 00 e0 29 94 34 de where the Ethernet type is 0800 Console config mac acl permit any host 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 Console config mac acl Related Commands access list mac 4 95 show mac access list This command displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs Syntax show mac access list ac _name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac access list MAC access list jerry permit any 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 Console Related Commands permit deny 4 96 mac access group 4 98 4 97 4 Command Line Interface mac access group This command binds a port to a MAC ACL Use the no form to remove the port Syntax mac access group acl_name in acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e in Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage A port can only be bound to one ACL e Ifa port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL the switch will replace the old binding
238. dcast storm threshold 3 91 4 122 Cc Class of Service See CoS CLI showing commands 4 4 command line interface See CLI community string 2 6 3 33 3 37 3 40 3 41 3 45 4 102 community VLANs 4 179 configuration settings saving or restoring 2 8 3 19 4 64 console port required connections 2 2 CoS configuring 3 144 4 184 4 192 DSCP 3 152 4 189 IP precedence 3 150 layer 3 4 priorities 3 149 4 189 queue mapping 3 145 4 187 queue mode _ 3 147 4 185 traffic class weights 3 148 4 186 D default gateway configuration 3 14 4 224 default priority ingress port 3 144 4 185 default settings system 1 6 DHCP 3 16 4 223 client 3 14 dynamic configuration 2 5 DHCP snooping global configuration 4 231 4 238 4 239 specifying trusted interfaces 4 234 verifying MAC addresses 4 235 4 236 VLAN configuration 4 233 Differentiated Code Point Service See DSCP Differentiated Services See DiffServ DiffServ 3 155 4 192 binding policy to interface 3 161 4 199 class map 3 155 4 194 4 196 policy map 3 158 4 195 service policy 3 161 4 199 DNS default domain name 3 181 displaying the cache 3 185 domain name list 3 181 enabling lookup 3 181 name server list 3 181 static entries 3 183 Domain Name Service See DNS downloading software 3 18 4 64 DSCP enabling 3 149 4 189 mapping priorities 3 152 4 190 dynamic addresses displaying 3 100 4 141 E edge port STA 3 112 3 115 4 156 event logging 4 43 Index 1 In
239. dded to this trunk Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage When configuring static trunks the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard Use no channel group to remove a port group from a trunk Use no interfaces port channel to remove a trunk from the switch 4 131 4 Command Line Interface Example The following example creates trunk 1 and then adds port 11 Console config interface port channel 1 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if channel group 1 Console config if lacp This command enables 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP for the current interface Use the no form to disable it Syntax no lacp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage The ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex and auto negotiation Atrunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned the next available port channel ID e Ifthe target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports the trunk will be activated automatically If more than eight ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled the additional ports will be placed in standby mode and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails 4 132 Link Aggregation Commands 4 Example The following shows LACP enabled on
240. de files and configuration files as available flash memory space allows In the system flash memory one file of each type must be set as the start up file During a system boot the diagnostic and operation code files set as the start up file are run and then the start up configuration file is loaded Note that configuration files should be downloaded using a file name that reflects the contents or usage of the file settings If you download directly to the running config the system will reboot and the settings will have to be copied from the running config to a permanent file 2 Initial Configuration 2 10 Chapter 3 Configuring the Switch Using the Web Interface This switch provides an embedded HTTP web agent Using a web browser you can configure the switch and view statistics to monitor network activity The web agent can be accessed by any computer on the network using a standard web browser Internet Explorer 5 0 or above or Netscape 6 2 or above Note You can also use the Command Line Interface CLI to manage the switch over a serial connection to the console port or via Telnet For more information on using the CLI refer to Chapter 4 Command Line Interface Prior to accessing the switch from a web browser be sure you have first performed the following tasks 1 Configure the switch with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway using an out of band serial connection BOOTP or DHCP protocol See
241. dent SNMP agent that resides either on this switch or on a remote device This engine protects against message replay delay and redirection The engine ID is also used in combination with user passwords to generate the security keys for authenticating and encrypting SNMPVv3 packets A remote engine ID is required when using SNMPv3 informs See snmp server host on page 4 104 The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the authoritative agent For informs the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent You therefore need to configure the remote agent s SNMP engine ID before you can send proxy requests or informs to it An engine ID can be specified by entering 5 to 32 octets of hexadecimal characters that is 9 to 64 hexadecimal characters If an odd number of hexadecimal characters are specified a trailing zero is added to the value to 4 107 4 Command Line Interface fill the octet For example entering the value 123456789 results in an engine ID of 1234567890 A local engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the switch This is referred to as the default engine ID If the local engine ID is deleted or changed all SNMP users will be cleared You will need to reconfigure all existing users page 4 113 Example Console config snmp server engine id l
242. dex F firmware displaying version 3 11 4 62 upgrading 3 18 4 64 G GARP VLAN Registration Protocol See GVRP gateway default 3 14 4 224 GVRP global setting 3 125 4 164 interface configuration 4 165 H hardware version displaying 3 11 4 62 HTTPS 3 52 4 30 HTTPS secure server 3 52 4 30 l IEEE 802 1D 3 102 4 145 IEEE 802 1s 4 145 IEEE 802 1w 3 102 4 145 IEEE 802 1X 3 60 3 67 4 81 IGMP filtering and throttling 3 169 groups displaying 3 167 4 205 Layer 2 3 162 4 201 query 3 162 4 206 query Layer 2 3 163 4 206 snooping 3 162 4 202 snooping configuring 3 163 4 201 ingress filtering 3 132 4 171 IP address BOOTP DHCP 3 16 4 223 4 225 setting 2 4 3 14 4 223 IP precedence enabling 3 149 mapping priorities 3 150 IP source guard configuring static entries 4 229 setting filter criteria 4 227 J jumbo frame 4 63 Index 2 L LACP local parameters 4 136 partner parameters 4 136 protocol message statistics 4 136 link type STA 3 113 3 115 3 117 3 119 3 122 4 157 logging syslog traps 4 46 to syslog servers 4 45 log in Web interface 3 2 logon authentication 3 46 4 70 RADIUS client 4 73 RADIUS server 4 73 TACACS client 3 48 4 77 TACACS server 3 48 4 77 logon authentication sequence 3 49 4 71 4 72 M main menu 3 4 Management Information Bases MIBs A 3 mirror port configuring 3 93 4 127 MSTP 4 145 global settings 4 144 interface settings 4 144 multicast filt
243. dge ports Cc 4 156 spanning tree portfast Sets an interface to fast forwarding Cc 4 156 spanning tree link type Configures the link type for RSTP MSTP Cc 4 157 spanning tree mst cost Configures the path cost of an instance in the MST 0 4 158 spanning tree mst Configures the priority of an instance in the MST Cc 4 159 port priority spanning tree Re checks the appropriate BPDU format PE 4 160 protocol migration show spanning tree Shows spanning tree configuration for the common PE 4 160 spanning tree i e overall bridge a selected interface or an instance within the multiple spanning tree show spanning tree mst Shows the multiple spanning tree configuration PE 4 162 configuration 4 144 Spanning Tree Commands 4 spanning tree This command enables the Spanning Tree Algorithm globally for the switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no spanning tree Default Setting Spanning tree is enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The Spanning Tree Algorithm STA can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STA compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down Example This example shows h
244. dress or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the CLI program Command Attributes Management VLAN ID of the configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading zeroes By default all ports on the switch are members of VLAN 1 However the management station can be attached to a port belonging to any VLAN as long as that VLAN has been assigned an IP address IP Address Mode Specifies whether IP functionality is enabled via manual configuration Static Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP or Boot Protocol BOOTP If DHCP BOOTP is enabled IP will not function until a reply has been received from the server Requests will be broadcast periodically by the switch for an IP address DHCP BOOTP values can include the IP address subnet mask and default gateway IP Address Address of the VLAN interface that is allowed management access Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Default 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets Default 255 0 0 0 Gateway IP address IP address of the gateway router between this device and management stations that exist on other network segments Default 0 0 0 0 MAC Address The physical layer address for this switch Restart DHCP
245. dress Lease sec Type VLAN Interface 11 22 33 44 55 66 192 168 0 99 0 Static 1 Eth 1 5 Console DHCP Snooping Commands DHCP snooping allows a switch to protect a network from rogue DHCP servers or other devices which send port related information to a DHCP server This information can be useful in tracking an IP address back to a physical port This section describes commands used to configure DHCP snooping Table 4 78 DHCP Snooping Commands Command Function Mode Page ip dhcp snooping Enables DHCP snooping globally GC 4 231 ip dhcp snooping vlan Enables DHCP snooping on the specified VLAN GC 4 233 ip dhcp snooping trust Configures the specified interface as trusted IC 4 234 ip dhcp snooping verify Verifies the client s hardware address stored in the DHCP GC 4 235 mac address packet against the source MAC address in the Ethernet header ip dhcp snooping Enables or disables DHCP Option 82 information relay GC 4 235 information option ip dhcp snooping Sets the information option policy for DHCP client packets that GC 4 236 information policy include Option 82 information show ip dhcp snooping Shows the DHCP snooping configuration settings PE 4 237 show ip dhcp snooping Shows the DHCP snooping binding table entries PE 4 237 binding ip dhcp snooping This command enables DHCP snooping globally Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax no ip dhcp snooping Default
246. dynamic address assignment via DHCP or BOOTP see Setting an IP Address on page 2 4 Note This switch supports four concurrent Telnet SSH sessions After configuring the switch s IP parameters you can access the onboard configuration program from anywhere within the attached network The onboard configuration program can be accessed using Telnet from any computer attached to the network The switch can also be managed by any computer using a web browser Internet Explorer 5 0 or above or Netscape 6 2 or above or from a network computer using SNMP network management software Note The onboard program only provides access to basic configuration functions To access the full range of SNMP management functions you must use SNMP based network management software Basic Configuration Console Connection The CLI program provides two different command levels normal access level Normal Exec and privileged access level Privileged Exec The commands available at the Normal Exec level are a limited subset of those available at the Privileged Exec level and allow you to only display information and use basic utilities To fully configure the switch parameters you must access the CLI at the Privileged Exec level Access to both CLI levels are controlled by user names and passwords The switch has a default user name and password for each level To log into the CLI at Jthe Privileged Exec level using the default user name and passwor
247. e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to the discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Example Console config spanning tree forward time 20 Console config spanning tree hello time This command configures the spanning tree bridge hello time globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree hello time time no spanning tree hello time time Time in seconds Range 1 10 seconds The maximum value is the lower of 10 or max age 2 1 Default Setting 2 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the time interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Example Console config spanning tree hello time 5 Console config Related Commands spanning tree forward time 4 146 spanning tree max age 4 147 4 147 A Command Line Interface spanning tree max age This command configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree max age seconds no spanning tree max age seconds Time in seconds Range 6 40 seconds The minimum value is the higher of 6 or 2 x he
248. e console vty console Console terminal line e vty Virtual terminal for remote console access i e Telnet Default Setting Shows all lines Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 18 Example General Commands 4 To show all lines enter this command Interactive Console show line Console configuration Password threshold 3 times timeout Disabled Login timeout Disabled Silent time Disabled Baudrate 9600 Databits 8 Parity none Stopbits 1 VTY configuration Password threshold 3 times Interactive timeout 600 sec Login timeout 300 sec console General Commands Table 4 6 General Commands Command Function Mode Page enable Activates privileged mode NE 4 19 disable Returns to normal mode from privileged mode PE 4 20 configure Activates global configuration mode PE 4 21 show history Shows the command history buffer NE PE 4 21 reload Restarts the system PE 4 22 end Returns to Privileged Exec mode any 4 22 config mode ext Returns to the previous configuration mode or exits the CLI any 4231 quit Exits a CLI session NE PE 4 23 help Shows how to use help any NA Shows options for command completion context sensitive any NA enable This command activates Privileged Exec mode In privileged mode additional commands are available and certain commands display additional information See Understanding Command Modes on pa
249. e otherwise temporary data loops might result Default 15 Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum 30 Configuration Settings for RSTP The following attributes apply to both RSTP and MSTP Path Cost Method The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned to each interface Long Specifies 32 bit based values that range from 1 200 000 000 This is the default Short Specifies 16 bit based values that range from 1 65535 Transmission Limit The maximum transmission rate for BPDUs is specified by setting the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive protocol messages Range 1 10 Default 3 Configuration Settings for MSTP Max Instance Numbers The maximum number of MSTP instances to which this switch can be assigned e Region Revision The revision for this MSTI Range 0 65535 Default 0 Region Name The name for this MSTI Maximum length 32 characters Maximum Hop Count The maximum number of hops allowed in the MST region before a BPDU is discarded Range 1 40 Default 20 Note The MST name and revision number are both required to uniquely identify an MST region 3 109 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Spanning Tree STA Configuration Modify the required attributes and click Apply STA Configuration Switch Spanni
250. e 3 1 Configuration Options Button Action Revert Cancels specified values and restores current values prior to pressing Apply Apply Sets specified values to the system Help Links directly to webhelp Notes 1 To ensure proper screen refresh be sure that Internet Explorer 5 x is configured as follows Under the menu Tools Internet Options General Temporary Internet Files Settings the setting for item Check for newer versions of stored pages should be Every visit to the page 2 When using Internet Explorer 5 0 you may have to manually refresh the screen after making configuration changes by pressing the browser s refresh button Panel Display The web agent displays an image of the switch s ports The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports including Active i e up or down Duplex i e half or full duplex or Flow Control i e with or without flow control Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Configuration page as described on page 3 78 SMC8126L2 Cluster Commander ya Unit 1 a SMC Mode Acive P tink vof ink Domn SMC8150L2 Cluster Commander w Unit 1 Mode Active x P u vof Link Down Figure 3 2 Panel Display 3 Configuring the Switch Main Menu Using the onboard web agent you can define system parameters manage and control the switch and all its ports or monitor network c
251. e 3 129 But you can still enable GVRP on these edge switches as well as on the core switches in the network 3 124 VLAN Configuration 3 Forwarding Tagged Untagged Frames If you want to create a small port based VLAN for devices attached directly to a single switch you can assign ports to the same untagged VLAN However to participate in a VLAN group that crosses several switches you should create a VLAN for that group and enable tagging on all ports Ports can be assigned to multiple tagged VLANs but are only allowed one untagged VLAN Each port on the switch is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that contains any VLAN aware devices the switch should include VLAN tags When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that does not contain any VLAN aware devices including the destination host the switch must first strip off the VLAN tag before forwarding the frame When the switch receives a tagged frame it will pass this frame onto the VLAN s indicated by the frame tag However when this switch receives an untagged frame from a VLAN unaware device it first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID Enabling or Disabling GVRP Global Setting GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the n
252. e MIB tree The predefined view defaultview includes access to the entire MIB tree Command Attributes View Name The name of the SNMP view Range 1 64 characters View OID Subtrees Shows the currently configured object identifiers of branches within the MIB tree that define the SNMP view Edit OID Subtrees Allows you to configure the object identifiers of branches within the MIB tree Wild cards can be used to mask a specific portion of the OID string e Type Indicates if the object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree is included or excluded from the SNMP view Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Views Click New to configure a new view In the New View page define a name and specify OID subtrees in the switch MIB to be included or excluded in the view Click Back to save the new view and return to the SNMPv3 Views list For a specific view click on View OID Subtrees to display the current configuration or click on Edit OID Subtrees to make changes to the view settings To delete a view check the box next to the view name then click Delete SNMPv3 Views New Delete Name OID Subtrees Actions F defaultview View OID Subtrees Edit OID Subtrees _ w defaultview OID Subtree Type Included Back SNMPVv3 View Edit View Name defaultview urrent New 1 included D Subtree lt lt Add Type cluded Remove Back Figure 3 32 Configuring SNMPv3 Views 3 4
253. e Page interface Configures an interface type and enters interface configuration GC 4 116 mode description Adds a description to an interface configuration IC 4 117 speed duplex Configures the speed and duplex operation of a given interface IC 4 117 when autonegotiation is disabled negotiation Enables autonegotiation of a given interface IC 4 118 capabilities Advertises the capabilities of a given interface for use in IC 4 119 autonegotiation flowcontrol Enables flow control on a given interface IC 4 120 shutdown Disables an interface IC 4 121 switchport broadcast Configures the broadcast storm control threshold IC 4 122 packet rate clear counters Clears statistics on an interface PE 4 122 show interfaces status Displays status for the specified interface NE PE 4 123 show interfaces Displays statistics for the specified interfaces NE PE 4 124 counters show interfaces Displays the administrative and operational status of an NE PE 4 125 switchport interface interface This command configures an interface type and enter interface configuration mode Use the no form to remove a trunk Syntax interface interface no interface port channel channel id interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 26 50 port channel channel id Range 1 32 e vlan vian id Range 1 4094 Default Setting None 4 116 Interface Commands 4 Command Mode Global Co
254. e access tools SSH can also provide remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet When a client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol the switch uses a public key that the client must match along with a local user name and password for access authentication SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and SSH enabled management station clients and ensures that data traveling over the network arrives unaltered This section describes the commands used to configure the SSH server However note that you also need to install a SSH client on the management station when using this protocol to configure the switch Note The switch supports both SSH Version 1 5 and 2 0 Table 4 15 SSH Commands Command Function Mode Page ip ssh server Enables the SSH server on the switch GC 4 35 ip ssh timeout Specifies the authentication timeout for the SSH server GC 4 36 ip ssh Specifies the number of retries allowed by a client GC 4 37 authentication retries ip ssh server key size Sets the SSH server key size GC 4 37 4 Command Line Interface Table 4 15 SSH Commands Continued Command Function Mode Page copy tftp public key Copies the user s public key from a TFTP server to the switch PE 4 64 delete public key Deletes the public key for the specified user PE 4 38 ip ssh crypto host key Generates the host key PE 4 38 generate ip
255. e all other Member switches in the cluster The management station uses Telnet to communicate directly with the Commander throught its IP address and the Commander manages Member switches using cluster internal IP addresses There can be up to 16 Member switches in one cluster Cluster switches are limited to within a single IP subnet Table 4 79 Switch Cluster Commands Command Function Mode Page cluster Configures clustering on the switch GC 4 238 cluster commander Configures the switch as a cluster Commander GC 4 239 4 237 4 Command Line Interface Table 4 79 Switch Cluster Commands Command Function Mode Page cluster ip pool Sets the cluster IP address pool for Members GC 4 239 cluster member Sets Candidate switches as cluster members GC 4 240 rcommand Provides configuration access to Member switches GC 4 240 show cluster Displays the switch clusteringsttus PE 4 241 show cluster members Displays current cluster Members PE 4 241 show cluster candidates Displays current cluster Candidates in the network PE 4 242 cluster This command enables clustering on the switch Use the no form to disable clustering Syntax no cluster Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage To create a switch cluster first be sure that clustering is enabled on the switch the default is enabled then set the switch as a Clust
256. e configures port 11 to use autonegotiation Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if negotiation Console config if Related Commands capabilities 4 119 speed duplex 4 117 capabilities This command advertises the port capabilities of a given interface during autonegotiation Use the no form with parameters to remove an advertised capability or the no form without parameters to restore the default values Syntax no capabilities 1000full 100full 100half 10full 10half flowcontrol symmetric 1000full Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation e 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation e 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation flowcontrol Supports flow control symmetric Gigabit only When specified the port transmits and receives pause frames when not specified the port will auto negotiate to determine the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames The current switch ASIC only supports symmetric pause frames Default Setting 100BASE TX 10half 10full 100half 100full e 1000BASE T 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full e SFP 1000full Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage When auto negotiation is enabled with the negotiation command the switch will negotiate the best settings for a
257. e forwarded If DHCP snooping is enabled globally and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received all DHCP packets are forwarded for a trusted port If the received packet is a DHCP ACK message a dynamic DHCP snooping entry is also added to the binding table If DHCP snooping is enabled globally and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received but the port is not trusted it is processed as follows Ifthe DHCP packet is a reply packet from a DHCP server including OFFER ACK or NAK messages the packet is dropped Ifthe DHCP packet is from a client such as a DECLINE or RELEASE message the switch forwards the packet only if the corresponding entry is found in the binding table Ifthe DHCP packet is from a client such as a DISCOVER REQUEST INFORM DECLINE or RELEASE message the packet is forwarded if MAC address verification is disabled However if MAC address verification is enabled then 3 186 DHCP Snooping 3 the packet will only be forwarded if the clients hardware address stored in the DHCP packet is the same as the source MAC address in the Ethernet header Ifthe DHCP packet is not a recognizable type it is dropped Ifa DHCP packet from a client passes the filtering criteria above it will only be forwarded to trusted ports in the same VLAN Ifa DHCP packet is from server is received on a trusted port it will be forwarded to both trusted and untrusted ports in the
258. e no form to restore the default IP address Syntax ip address ip address netmask bootp dhcp no ip address jp address IP address e netmask Network mask for the associated IP subnet This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets bootp Obtains IP address from BOOTP e dhcp Obtains IP address from DHCP Default Setting DHCP Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage e You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management access over the network You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the configuration program 4 223 4 Command Line Interface e If you select the bootp or dhcp option IP is enabled but will not function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received Requests will be broadcast periodically by this device in an effort to learn its IP address BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP address default gateway and subnet mask e You can start broadcasting BOOTP or DHCP requests by entering an ip dhcp restart command or by rebooting the switch Note Only one VLAN interface can be assigned an IP address the default is VLAN 1 This defines the management VLAN the only VLAN through which you can gain management access to the switc
259. e port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 MST Path Cost This parameter is used by the MSTP to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Note that when the Path Cost Method is set to short page 3 63 the maximum path cost is 65 535 Range Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 Default Ethernet Half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 Fast Ethernet Half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet Full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 3 121 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Spanning Tree MSTP Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Enter the priority and path cost for an interface and click Apply MSTP Port Configuration MST Instance ID 0 Priority Admin MST Path Cost Port STA State 9 540 in steps of 16 1 200000000 0 Auto 1 Discarding fize Trunk 2 Discarding fiz8 _ 3 Discarding fi28 4 Discarding 128 5 Forwardir Jha 6 Discardingfize 7 Discarding 128 8 Discarding 128 9 Discarding 128 Figure 3 70 Displaying MSTP Interface Settings CLI This example sets the MSTP attributes for port 4 Console
260. ect any of the switch ports from the scroll down port list and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply LACP Configuration Member List Current New Uniti Pom Uniti Port2 Unit Port3 Unit Port4 lt lt Add FEFA pr Uniti Port5 Remove panie Figure 3 52 LACP Trunk Configuration 3 83 3 Configuring the Switch CLI The following example enables LACP for ports 1 to 6 Just connect these ports to LACP enabled trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if lacp Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 6 Console config if lacp Console config if end Console show interfaces status port channel 1 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type 100TX ac address 00 12 CF 12 34 89 Configuration ame Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full Flow control status Disabled Port security Disabled ax MAC count 0 Current status Created by Lacp Link status Up Port operation status Up Operation speed duplex 100full Flow control type None ember Ports Eth1 1 Ethi 2 Eth1 3 Eth1 4 Eth1 5 Eth1 6 Console 4 116 4 132 4 123 Configuring LACP Parameters Dynamically Creating a Port Channel Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria Ports must have the same LACP
261. ecure port which receives messages from outside the network or firewall and therefore may be subject to traffic attacks caused by a host trying to use the IP address of a neighbor When enabled traffic is filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping or static addresses configured in the source guard binding table An inbound packet s IP address sip option or both its IP address and corresponding MAC address sip mac option are checked against the binding table If no matching entry is found the packet is dropped 3 191 3 Configuring the Switch Command Attributes Filter Type Configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based source IP address or source IP address and corresponding MAC address Default None e None Disables IP source guard filtering on the port e SIP Enables traffic filtering based on IP addresses stored in the binding table e SIP MAC Enables traffic filtering based on IP addresses and corresponding MAC addresses stored in the binding table Web Click IP Source Guard Port Configuration IP Source Guard Port Configuration 7 Port Filter Type 1 None E J 2 None i a None 5 None xj 6 None 7 None x 8 None j J Figure 3 119 IP Source Guard Port Configuration CLI This example shows how to enable IP source guard on port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if ip source guard sip 4 227 Console co
262. ed If an end station or its network adapter supports the IEEE 802 1Q VLAN protocol it can be configured to broadcast a message to your network indicating the VLAN groups it wants to join When this switch receives these messages it will automatically place the receiving port in the specified VLANs and then forward the message to all other ports When the message arrives at another switch that supports GVRP it will also place the receiving port in the specified VLANs and pass the message on to all other ports VLAN requirements are propagated in this way throughout the network This allows GVRP compliant devices to be automatically configured for VLAN groups based solely on endstation requests To implement GVRP in a network first add the host devices to the required VLANs using the operating system or other application software so that these VLANs can be propagated onto the network For both the edge switches attached directly to these hosts and core switches in the network enable GVRP on the links between these devices You should also determine security boundaries in the network and disable GVRP on the boundary ports to prevent advertisements from being propagated or forbid those ports from joining restricted VLANs Note If you have host devices that do not support GVRP you should configure static or untagged VLANs for the switch ports connected to these devices as described in Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index on pag
263. ed by settings for each port Console show spanning tree mst 2 Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode MSTP Spanning tree enable disable enable Instance 2 Vlans configuration 2 Priority 4096 Bridge Hello Time sec 2 Bridge Max Age sec 20 Bridge Forward Delay sec 15 Root Hello Time sec 2 Root Max Age sec 20 Root Forward Delay sec 15 Max hops 20 Remaining hops 20 Designated Root 4096 2 0000E9313131 Current root port 0 Current root cost 0 Number of topology changes 0 Last topology changes time sec 646 Transmission limit 3 Path Cost Method long Admin status enable Role disable State discarding External path cost 10000 Internal path cost 10000 Priority 128 Designated cost 0 Designated port 128 7 Designated root 4096 2 0000E9313131 Designated bridge 4096 2 0000E9313131 Fast forwarding enable Forward transitions 0 Admin edge port enable Oper edge port enable Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to point Spanning Tree Status enable Displaying Interface Settings for MSTP The MSTP Port Information and MSTP Trunk Information pages display the current status of ports and trunks in the selected MST instance Command Attributes e MST Instance ID Instance identifier to configure Default 0 Note The other attributes are described under Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 111 3 118 Spann
264. ed or disabled if enabled it also shows the threshold level page 4 122 Lacp status Shows if Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled or disabled page 4 132 Ingress rate limit Shows if ingress rate limiting is enabled and the current rate limit page 4 129 Egress rate limit Shows if egress rate limiting is enabled and the current rate limit page 4 129 VLAN membership mode Indicates membership mode as Trunk or Hybrid page 4 170 Ingress rule Shows if ingress filtering is enabled or disabled page 4 171 Note Ingress filtering is always enabled Acceptable frame type Shows if acceptable VLAN frames include all types or tagged frames only page 4 171 Native VLAN Indicates the default Port VLAN ID page 4 172 Priority for untagged traffic Indicates the default priority for untagged frames page 4 184 Gvrp status Shows if GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is enabled or disabled page 4 165 host association Private VLAN mapping Allowed Vlan Shows the VLANs this interface has joined where u indicates untagged and t indicates tagged page 4 173 Forbidden Vian Shows the VLANs this interface can not dynamically join via GVRP page 4 174 Private VLAN mode Shows the private VLAN mode as host promiscuous or none 4 182 Private VLAN Shows the secondary or community VLAN with which this port is associated 4 183 Shows
265. ee edge port 4 156 Console config if 3 115 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees MSTP generates a unique spanning tree for each instance This provides multiple pathways across the network thereby balancing the traffic load preventing wide scale disruption when a bridge node in a single instance fails and allowing for faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree MST Instance 0 that connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region This switch supports up to 65 instances You should try to group VLANs which cover the same general area of your network However remember that you must configure all bridges within the same MSTI Region page 4 152 with the same set of instances and the same instance on each bridge with the same set of VLANs Also note that RSTP treats each MSTI region as a single node connecting all regions to the Common Spanning Tree To use multiple spanning trees 1 Set the spanning tree type to MSTP STA Configuration page 3 102 2 Enter the spanning tree priority for the selected MST instance MSTP VLAN Configuration 3 Add the VLANs that will share this MSTI MSTP VLAN Configuration Note All VLANs are automatically added to the IST Instance 0 To ensure that the MSTI maintains connectivity across the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTI settin
266. efined SNTP Clock Synchronization Disabled DHCP Snooping Status Disabled IP Source Guard Status Disabled all ports Switch Clustering Status Enabled Commander Disabled Chapter 2 Initial Configuration Connecting to the Switch Configuration Options The switch includes a built in network management agent The agent offers a variety of management options including SNMP RMON Groups 1 2 3 9 anda web based interface A PC may also be connected directly to the switch for configuration and monitoring via a command line interface CLI Note The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default To change this address see Setting an IP Address on page 2 4 The switch s HTTP web agent allows you to configure switch parameters monitor port connections and display statistics using a standard web browser such as Netscape version 6 2 and higher or Microsoft IE version 5 0 and higher The switch s web management interface can be accessed from any computer attached to the network The CLI program can be accessed by a direct connection to the RS 232 serial console port on the switch or remotely by a Telnet connection over the network The switch s management agent also supports SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol This SNMP agent permits the switch to be managed from any system in the network using network management software such as HP OpenView The switch s web inter
267. egotiations Range 0 65535 Default Setting 32768 4 133 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e Port must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG e System priority is combined with the switch s MAC address to form the LAG identifier This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP negotiations with other systems Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 Console config if lacp admin key Ethernet Interface This command configures a port s LACP administration key Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner admin key key no lacp actor partner admin key e actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link e key The port admin key must be set to the same value for ports that belong to the same link aggregation group LAG Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e Ports are only allowed to join
268. el specified for flash memory must be a higher priority i e numerically lower than that specified for RAM Example Console config logging history ram 0 Console config 4 44 System Management Commands 4 logging host This command adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging messages Use the no form to remove a syslog server host Syntax no logging host host_ip_address host_ip_address The IP address of a syslog server Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e By using this command more than once you can build up a list of host IP addresses The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five Example Console config logging host 10 1 0 3 Console config logging facility This command sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages Use the no form to return the type to the default Syntax no logging facility type type A number that indicates the facility used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service Range 16 23 Default Setting 23 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages See RFC 3164 This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch However it may be used by the syslog server to sort messages or to store messages in the corresponding database Example
269. electing the root bridge and alternate bridge of the specified instance The device with the highest priority i e lowest numerical value becomes the MSTI root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device e You can set this switch to act as the MSTI root device by specifying a priority of 0 or as the MSTI alternate device by specifying a priority of 16384 Example Console config mstp mst 1 priority 4096 Console config mstp name This command configures the name for the multiple spanning tree region in which this switch is located Use the no form to clear the name Syntax name name name Name of the spanning tree Default Setting Switch s MAC address Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage The MST region name and revision number page 4 153 are used to designate a unique MST region A bridge i e spanning tree compliant device such as this switch can only belong to one MST region And all bridges in the same region must be configured with the same MST instances Example Console config mstp name R amp D Console config mstp Related Commands revision 4 153 4 152 Spanning Tree Commands 4 revision This command configures the revision number for this multiple spanning tree configuration of this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax revision number number Revision number
270. elsewhere on the network Servers or other network devices may support one or more connections via multiple IP addresses If more than one IP address is associated with a host name in the static table or via information returned from a name server a DNS client can try each address in succession until it establishes a connection with the target device Field Attributes Host Name Name of a host device that is mapped to one or more IP addresses Range 1 64 characters IP Address Internet address es associated with a host name Range 1 8 addresses Alias Displays the host names that are mapped to the same address es as a previously configured entry 3 183 3 Configuring the Switch Web Select DNS Static Host Table Enter a host name and one or more corresponding addresses then click Apply Static Host Table Host Name IP Address Alias Delete Edit rd5 192 168 1 55 rd6 10 1 0 55 Add Static Host Host Name P Address 1 P Address 2 _ P Address 3 P Address 4 P Address 5 P Address 6 P Address 7 P Address 8 Add Figure 3 112 DNS Static Host Table CLI This example maps two address to a host name and then configures an alias host name for the same addresses Console config ip host rd5 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 4 233 Console config ip host rd6 10 1 0 55 Console show hosts 4 237 Hostname rd5 Inet address 10 1 0 55 192 168 1 55 Alias 1 rd6 Console
271. emoved from the table 3 190 IP Source Guard 3 Web Click DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping Binding Information DHCP Snooping Binding Information Store DHCP snooping binding entry to flash No Unit Port VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address IP Address Type Lease Time Seconds Figure 3 118 DHCP Snooping Binding Information CLI This example shows how to display the DHCP Snooping binding table entries Console show ip dhcp snooping binding 4 237 MacAddress IpAddress Lease sec Type VLAN Interface 11 22 33 44 55 66 192 168 0 99 0 Dynamic 1 Eth 1 5 Console IP Source Guard IP Source Guard is a security feature that filters IP traffic on network interfaces based on manually configured entries in the IP Source Guard table or static and dynamic entries in the DHCP Snooping table when enabled see DHCP Snooping on page 3 186 IP source guard can be used to prevent traffic attacks caused when a host tries to use the IP address of a neighbor to access the network This section describes commands used to configure IP Source Guard Note Due to a chip limitation IP source guard and Quality of Service only for IP related QoS function cannot be enabled at the same time Thus if the user has already enabled the IP source guard function it needs to be disabled first in order for the QoS function to work and vice versa IP Source Guard Port Configuration IP Source Guard is used to filter traffic on an uns
272. ending authentication requests GC 4 76 show radius server Shows the current RADIUS settings PE 4 76 4 73 4 Command Line Interface radius server host This command specifies primary and backup RADIUS servers and authentication parameters that apply to each server Use the no form to restore the default values Syntax no radius server index host host_ip_address host_alias auth port auth_port timeout timeout retransmit retransmit key key index Allows you to specify up to five servers These servers are queried in sequence until a server responds or the retransmit period expires host_ip_address IP address of server host_alias Symbolic name of server Maximum length 20 characters port_number RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 timeout Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending a request Range 1 65535 retransmit Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server Range 1 30 key Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Default Setting auth port 1812 timeout 5 seconds retransmit 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server 1 host 192 168 1 20 auth port 181 timeout 10 retransmit 5 key green Console config radius
273. entication If password authentication is specified by the SSH client then the password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS remote authentication server as specified on the Authentication Settings page 3 48 If public key authentication is specified by the client then you must configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the following section Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password authentication you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch SSH Host Key Settings and enable the SSH server Authentication Settings To use the SSH server complete these steps 1 Generate a Host Key Pair On the SSH Host Key Settings page create a host public private key pair 2 Provide Host Public Key to Clients Many SSH client programs automatically import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch Otherwise you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management station and place the host public key in it An entry for a public key in the known hosts file would appear similar to the following example 10 1 0 54 1024 35 156849954018676692593339467 7505461732531 3674890836547254 15020245593 199868544358361651999923329781766065830956 10825913212890233 7654680172627257 141342876294 1301196195566782 595664 10486957427888146206 5194174677298486546861571773939016477935594230357 74 13098022737087794545 2408397 1752646
274. entication via the user name and password specified by the username command i e default setting When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE or Privileged Exec PE mode depending on the user s privilege level 0 or 15 respectively no login selects no authentication When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE mode e This command controls login authentication via the switch itself To configure user names and passwords for remote authentication servers you must use the RADIUS or TACACS software installed on those servers Example Console config line login local Console config line Related Commands username 4 25 password 4 12 password This command specifies the password for a line Use the no form to remove the password Syntax password 0 7 password no password 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password password Character string that specifies the line password Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting No password is specified Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt You can use the password thresh command to set the number of times a user can enter an incorrect password before the system te
275. er Commander Set a Cluster IP Pool that does not conflict with any other IP subnets in the network Cluster IP addresses are assigned to switches when they become Members and are used for communication between Member switches and the Commander e Switch clusters are limited to a single IP subnet Layer 2 domain A switch can only be a Member of one cluster Configured switch clusters are maintained across power resets and network changes Example Console config cluster Console config 4 238 Switch Cluster Commands 4 cluster commander This command enables the switch as a cluster Commander Use the no form to disable the switch as cluster Commander Syntax no cluster commander Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Once a switch has been configured to be a cluster Commander it automatically discovers other cluster enabled switches in the network These Candidate switches only become cluster Members when manually selected by the administrator through the management station Cluster Member switches can be managed through only using a Telnet connection to the Commander From the Commander CLI prompt use the rcommand id command to connect to the Member switch Example Console config cluster commander Console config cluster ip pool This command sets the cluster IP address pool Use the no form to reset to the default addres
276. er specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different customers use the same internal VLAN IDs This is accomplished by inserting Service Provider VLAN SPVLAN tags into the customer s frames when they enter the service provider s network and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network A service provider s customers may have specific requirements for their internal VLAN IDs and number of VLANs supported VLAN ranges required by different customers in the same service provider network might easily overlap and traffic passing through the infrastructure might be mixed Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer configurations require intensive processing of VLAN mapping tables and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN limit of 4096 QinQ tunneling uses a single Service Provider VLAN SPVLAN for customers who have multiple VLANs Customer VLAN IDs are preserved and traffic from different customers is segregated within the service provider s network even when they use the same customer specific VLAN IDs QinQ tunneling expands VLAN space by 3 133 3 Configuring the Switch using a VLAN in VLAN hierarchy preserving the customer s original tagged packets and adding SPVLAN tags to each frame also called double tagging A port configured to support QinQ tunneling must be set to tunnel port mode The Service Provider VLAN SPVLAN ID for the specific customer must be
277. er tag is an SPVLAN tag and the inner tag is a CVLAN tag After packet classification through the switching process the packet is written to memory with one tag an outer tag or with two tags both an outer tag and inner tag 4 The switch sends the packet to the proper egress port If the egress port is an untagged member of the SPVLAN the outer tag will be stripped If it is a tagged member the outgoing packets will have two tags Layer 2 Flow for Packets Coming into a Tunnel Uplink Port An uplink port receives one of the following packets e Untagged One tag CVLAN or SPVLAN Double tag CVLAN SPVLAN The ingress process does source and destination lookups If both lookups are successful the ingress process writes the packet to memory Then the egress process transmits the packet Packets entering a QinQ uplink port are processed in the following manner 1 2 If incoming packets are untagged the PVID VLAN native tag is added If the ether type of an incoming packet single or double tagged is not equal to the TPID of the uplink port the VLAN tag is determined to be a Customer VLAN CVLAN tag The uplink port s PVID VLAN native tag is added to the packet This outer tag is used for learning and switching packets within the service provider s network The TPID must be configured on a per port basis and the verification cannot be disabled If the ether type of an incoming packet single or double tagged
278. erational state for the remote side of port channel 1 Console show lacp 1 neighbors 4 136 Port channel 1 neighbors Eth 1 1 Partner Admin System ID 32768 00 00 00 00 00 00 Partner Oper System ID 3 00 12 CF CE 2A 20 Partner Admin Port Number 5 Partner Oper Port Number 3 Port Admin Priority 32768 Port Oper Priority 128 Admin Key 0 Oper Key 120 Admin State defaulted distributing collecting synchronization long timeout Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds Broadcast storms may occur when a device on your network is malfunctioning or if application programs are not well designed or properly configured If there is too much broadcast traffic on your network performance can be severely degraded or everything can come to complete halt You can protect your network from broadcast storms by setting a threshold for broadcast traffic Any broadcast packets exceeding the specified threshold will then be dropped Command Usage Broadcast Storm Control is enabled by default Broadcast control does not effect IP multicast traffic Command Attributes Port Port number e Type Indicates the port type 100OBASE TX 1000BASE T or SFP e Protect Status Shows whether or not broadcast storm control has been enabled Default Enabled e Threshold Threshold as percentage of port bandwidth Opti
279. erface Configuration Command Usage The IGMP filtering profile must first be created with the ip igmp profile command before being able to assign it to an interface Only one profile can be assigned to an interface e A profile can also be assigned to a trunk interface When ports are configured as trunk members the trunk uses the filtering profile assigned to the first port member in the trunk Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if ip igmp filter 19 Console config if ip igmp max groups This command sets the IGMP throttling number for an interface on the switch Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip igmp max groups number no ip igmp max groups number The maximum number of multicast groups an interface can join at the same time Range 0 64 Default Setting 64 Command Mode Interface Configuration Command Usage IGMP throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port the switch can take one of two actions either deny or replace If the action is set to deny any new IGMP join reports will be dropped If the action is set to replace the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group IGMP throttling can also be set on a trunk interface When ports are configured as trunk members the trunk uses the throt
280. erface Settings Globally Enabling GVRP Displaying Basic VLAN Information Displaying Current VLANs Configuring a VLAN Static List Configuring a VLAN Static Table VLAN Static Membership by Port Configuring VLANs per Port 802 1Q Tunnel Status Tunnel Port Configuration Private VLAN Status Private VLAN Link Status Protocol VLAN Configuration Protocol VLAN Port Configuration Port Priority Configuration Traffic Classes Enable Traffic Classes Queue Mode 3 68 3 69 3 71 3 73 3 74 3 75 3 77 3 79 3 81 3 83 3 85 3 87 3 89 3 90 3 92 3 93 3 94 3 98 3 100 3 101 3 102 3 106 3 110 3 113 3 115 3 117 3 119 3 122 3 125 3 126 3 127 3 129 3 131 3 131 3 133 3 137 3 139 3 141 3 142 3 143 3 143 3 145 3 146 3 147 3 148 Figure 3 88 Figure 3 89 Figure 3 90 Figure 3 91 Figure 3 92 Figure 3 93 Figure 3 94 Figure 3 95 Figure 3 96 Figure 3 97 Figure 3 98 Figure 3 99 Figure 3 100 Figure 3 101 Figure 3 102 Figure 3 103 Figure 3 104 Figure 3 105 Figure 3 106 Figure 3 107 Figure 3 108 Figure 3 109 Figure 3 110 Figure 3 111 Figure 3 112 Figure 3 113 Figure 3 114 Figure 3 115 Figure 3 116 Figure 3 117 Figure 3 118 Figure 3 119 Figure 3 120 Figure 3 121 Figure 3 122 Figure 3 123 Figure 3 124 Figure 3 125 Figure 3 126 Configuring Queue Scheduling IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status Mapping IP Precedence Priority Values Mapping IP DSCP Priority Values IP Port Priority Status IP Port Priority Co
281. ering 3 162 3 174 3 194 4 201 multicast groups 3 167 4 205 displaying 4 205 static 3 167 4 202 4 203 4 205 multicast services configuring 3 168 3 175 3 176 3 179 4 202 4 203 displaying 3 167 4 205 multicast static router port 3 166 4 209 MVR setting interface type 4 219 setting multicast groups 4 218 specifying a VLAN 4 218 using immediate leave 4 219 P password line 4 12 4 13 passwords 2 4 administrator setting 3 46 4 25 path cost 3 105 3 112 method 3 109 4 149 STA 3 105 3 112 4 149 port authentication 3 60 3 67 port priority configuring 3 144 4 184 4 192 default ingress 3 144 4 185 STA 3 112 4 155 port security configuring 3 59 4 79 port statistics 3 95 4 124 ports autonegotiation 3 79 4 118 broadcast storm threshold 3 91 4 122 capabilities 3 79 4 119 duplex mode 3 79 4 117 flow control 3 79 4 120 speed 3 79 4 117 ports configuring 3 76 4 116 ports mirroring 3 93 4 127 priority default port ingress 3 144 4 185 problems troubleshooting B 1 profiles IGMP filter 3 172 protocol migration 3 115 4 160 PVLAN interface configuration 3 142 3 143 Q QoS 3 154 4 192 Quality of Service See QoS queue weights 3 148 4 186 R RADIUS logon authentication 4 73 rate limits setting 3 94 4 129 remote logging 4 46 restarting the system 3 30 4 22 RSTP 3 102 4 145 global configuration 3 105 4 145 Index S secure shell 3 54 4 33 configuration 3 54 4 3
282. ernet Port Channel Command Usage To force operation to the speed and duplex mode specified in a speed duplex command use the no negotiation command to disable auto negotiation on the selected interface e When using the negotiation command to enable auto negotiation the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command To set the speed duplex mode under auto negotiation the required mode must be specified in the capabilities list for an interface Example The following example configures port 5 to 100 Mbps half duplex operation Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 5 config if speed duplex 100half config if no negotiation config if Related Commands negotiation 4 118 capabilities 4 119 negotiation This command enables autonegotiation for a given interface Use the no form to disable autonegotiation Syntax no negotiation Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e When auto negotiation is enabled the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilities command When auto negotiation is disabled you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed duplex and flowcontrol commands 4 118 Interface Commands 4 e If autonegotiation is disabled auto MDI MDI X pin signal configuration will also be disabled for the RJ 45 ports Example The following exampl
283. ess filtering only You can only bind one IP ACL to any port for ingress filtering In other words only one ACL can be bound to an interface Ingress IP ACL The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows 1 User defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports 2 Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports 3 If no explicit rule is matched the implicit default is permit all Table 4 33 Access Control Lists Command Groups Function Page IP ACLs Configures ACLs based on IP addresses TCP UDP port number and 4 90 protocol type MAC ACLs Configures ACLs based on hardware addresses packet format and 4 95 Ethernet type ACL Information Displays ACLs and associated rules shows ACLs assigned to each port 4 99 4 89 4 Command Line Interface IP ACLs Table 4 34 IP ACLs Command Function Mode Page access list ip Creates an IP ACL and enters configuration mode GC 4 90 permit deny Filters packets matching a specified source IP address STD ACL 4 91 permit deny Filters packets meeting the specified criteria including EXT ACL 4 91 source and destination IP address TCP UDP port number and protocol type show ip access list Displays the rules for configured IP ACLs PE 4 93 ip access group Adds a port to an IP ACL IC 4 93 show ip access group Shows port assignments for IP ACLs PE 4 93 access list ip This command adds
284. estore the switch configuration settings Authentication This switch authenticates management access via the console port Telnet or web browser User names and passwords can be configured locally or can be verified via a remote authentication server i e RADIUS or TACACS Port based authentication is also supported via the IEEE 802 1X protocol This protocol uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol over LANs EAPOL to request user credentials from the 802 1X client and then verifies the client s right to access the network via an authentication server Other authentication options include HTTPS for secure management access via the web SSH for secure management access over a Telnet equivalent connection IP address filtering for SNMP web Telnet management access and MAC address filtering for port access Access Control Lists ACLs provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol or TCP UDP port number or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type ACLs can be used to improve performance by blocking unnecessary network traffic or to implement security controls by restricting access to specific network resources or protocols Port Configuration You can manually configure the speed duplex mode and flow control used on specific ports or use auto negotiation to detect the connection settings used by the attached device Use the full duplex mode on ports whenever possible to double the throughput of
285. et information with the switch s relay information Default Setting replace Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage When the switch receives DHCP packets from clients that already include DHCP Option 82 information the switch can be configured to set the action policy for these packets Either the switch can drop the DHCP packets keep the existing information or replace it with the switch s relay information Example Console config ip dhcp snooping information policy drop Console config 4 236 Switch Cluster Commands 4 show ip dhcp snooping This command shows the DHCP snooping configuration settings Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip dhcp snooping Global DHCP Snooping status disable DHCP Snooping is configured on the following VLANs 1 Verify Source Mac Address enable Interface Trusted Eth 1 1 No Eth 1 2 No Eth 1 3 No Eth 1 4 No Eth 1 5 Yes show ip dhcp snooping binding This command shows the DHCP snooping binding table entries Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip dhcp snooping binding MacAddress IpAddress Lease sec Type VLAN Interface 11 22 33 44 55 66 192 168 0 99 0 Static 1 Eth 1 5 Console Switch Cluster Commands Switch Clustering is a method of grouping switches together to enable centralized management through a single unit A switch cluster has a Commander unit that is used to manag
286. etwork VLANs are dynamically configured based on join messages issued by host devices and propagated throughout the network GVRP must be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch Default Disabled Note GVRP is not supported in the current software Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN GVRP Status Enable or disable GVRP click Apply GVRP Status GVRP Enabled Figure 3 71 Globally Enabling GVRP CLI This example enables GVRP for the switch Console config bridge ext gvrp 4 168 Console config 3 125 3 Configuring the Switch Displaying Basic VLAN Information The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type supported by the switch Field Attributes VLAN Version Number The VLAN version used by this switch as specified in the IEEE 802 1Q standard Maximum VLAN ID Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this switch Maximum Number of Supported VLANs Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on this switch Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Basic Information VLAN Basic Information VLAN Version Number 1 Maximum VLAN ID 4094 Maximum Number of Supported VLANs 256 Figure 3 72 Displaying Basic VLAN Information CLI Enter the following command Console show bridge ext 4 164 Max support vlan numbers 256 Max support vlan ID 4094 Extended multicast filter
287. exceed action set ip dscp 0 4 202 Console config pmap c 3 160 Quality of Service 3 Attaching a Policy Map to Ingress Queues This function binds a policy map to the ingress queue of a particular interface Command Usage e You must first define a class map then define a policy map and finally bind the service policy to the required interface You can only bind one policy map to an interface The current firmware does not allow you to bind a policy map to an egress queue Command Attributes e Ports Specifies a port Ingress Applies the rule to ingress traffic Enabled Check this to enable a policy map on the specified port e Policy Map Select the appropriate policy map from the scroll down box Web Click QoS DiffServ Service Policy Settings Check Enabled and choose a Policy Map for a port from the scroll down box then click Apply Service Policy Settings Ports Ingress Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled WlLOIN A Ul Alw N amp Figure 3 96 Service Policy Settings CLI This example applies a service policy to an ingress interface Console config interface ethernet 1 5 4 120 Console config if service policy input rd_policy 3 4 203 Console config if 3 161 3 Configuring the Switch Multicast Filtering Multicasting is
288. f configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading zeroes e VLAN Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters e Status Web Enables or disables the specified VLAN Enabled VLAN is operational Disabled VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets State CLI Enables or disables the specified VLAN Active VLAN is operational Suspend VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets Add Adds a new VLAN group to the current list Remove Removes a VLAN group from the current list If any port is assigned to this group as untagged it will be reassigned to VLAN group 1 as untagged 3 128 VLAN Configuration 3 Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static List To create a new VLAN enter the VLAN ID and VLAN name mark the Enable checkbox to activate the VLAN and then click Add VLAN Static List Current New VLAN ID 1 4094 3 VLAN Name R amp D Status Enabled K Figure 3 74 Configuring a VLAN Static List CLI This example creates a new VLAN Console config vlan database Console config vlan vlan 2 name R amp D media ethernet state active Console config vlan end Console show vlan Vlan ID 1 Type Static Name DefaultVlan Status Active Ports Port channel Ethi 1 S Ethi 2 S Ethi 3 S Ethi 4 S 5 S Ethl 6 S Eth1 7 S Eth1 8 S Eth1 9 S 10 S Eth1 11 S Eth1 12 S Eth1 13 S Eth1 14 S 15 S Eth1 16 S Eth1 17 S Eth1 18 S Eth1 19 S
289. f the view is included or excluded Storage Type The storage type for this entry Row Status The row status of this entry snmp server group This command adds an SNMP group mapping SNMP users to SNMP views Use the no form to remove an SNMP group Syntax snmp server group groupname v1 v2c v3 auth noauth priv read readview write writeview notify notifyview no snmp server group groupname groupname Name of an SNMP group Range 1 32 characters v1 v2c v3 Use SNMP version 1 2c or 3 auth noauth priv This group uses SNMPv3 with authentication no authentication or with authentication and privacy See Simple Network Management Protocol on page 5 1 for further information about these authentication and encryption options e readview Defines the view for read access 1 64 characters e writeview Defines the view for write access 1 64 characters notifyview Defines the view for notifications 1 64 characters 4 110 SNMP Commands 4 Default Setting Default groups public17 read only private18 read write readview Every object belonging to the Internet OID space 1 3 6 1 writeview Nothing is defined notifyview Nothing is defined Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage A group sets the access policy for the assigned users When authentication is selected the MD5 or SHA algorithm is used as specified in the snmp server user command When
290. face CLI configuration program and SNMP agent allow you to perform the following management functions Set user names and passwords Set an IP interface for a management VLAN Configure SNMP parameters e Enable disable any port Set the speed duplex mode for any port e Configure the bandwidth of any port by limiting input rates Control port access through IEEE 802 1X security or static address filtering e Filter packets using Access Control Lists ACLs e Configure up to 256 IEEE 802 1Q VLANs Enable GVRP automatic VLAN registration e Configure IGMP multicast filtering Upload and download system firmware via TFTP Upload and download switch configuration files via TFTP e Configure Spanning Tree parameters e Configure Class of Service CoS priority queuing 2 Initial Configuration Configure up to 32 static or LACP trunks e Enable port mirroring Set broadcast storm control on any port Display system information and statistics Required Connections The switch provides an RS 232 serial port that enables a connection to a PC or terminal for monitoring and configuring the switch A null modem console cable is provided with the switch Attach a VT100 compatible terminal or a PC running a terminal emulation program to the switch You can use the console cable provided with this package or use a null modem cable that complies with the wiring assignments shown in the Installation Guide To connect a termina
291. faces that are propagating this multicast service IP Multicast Registration Table VLAN ID 1 yl Multicast IP Address 224 1 1 12 x Multicast Group Port List Unit1 Port1 User Figure 3 101 IP Multicast Registration Table CLI This example displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1 along with the ports propagating the corresponding services The Type field shows if this entry was learned dynamically or was statically configured Console show bridge 1 multicast vlan 1 4 205 VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type 1 wie D ETE AP Eth1 12 USER J 224 1 2 3 Eth1 12 IGMP Console Assigning Ports to Multicast Services Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured using IGMP Snooping and IGMP Query messages as described in 3 163 For certain applications that require tighter control you may need to statically configure a multicast service on the switch First add all the ports attached to participating hosts to a common VLAN and then assign the multicast service to that VLAN group Command Usage e Static multicast addresses are never aged out e When a multicast address is assigned to an interface in a specific VLAN the corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports within that VLAN Command Attributes e Interface Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list e VLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast
292. fferentiate them from any other currently available commands or parameters You can use the Tab key to complete partial commands or enter a partial command followed by the character to display a list of possible matches You can also use the following editing keystrokes for command line processing Table 4 3 Command Line Processing Keystroke Function Ctrl A Shifts cursor to start of command line Ctrl B Shifts cursor to the left one character Ctrl C Terminates the current task and displays the command prompt Ctrl E Shifts cursor to end of command line Ctrl F Shifts cursor to the right one character Ctrl K Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the line Ctrl L Repeats current command line on a new line Ctrl N Enters the next command line in the history buffer Ctrl P Enters the last command Ctrl R Repeats current command line on a new line Ctrl U Deletes from the cursor to the beginning of the line Ctrl W Deletes the last word typed Esc B Moves the cursor back one word Esc D Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word Esc F Moves the cursor forward one word Delete key or backspace key Erases a mistake when entering a command Command Groups 4 Command Groups The system commands can be broken down into the functional groups shown below Table 4 4 Command Groups Command Group Description
293. fig if show ip igmp snooping This command shows the IGMP snooping configuration Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage See Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters on page 3 163 for a description of the displayed items 4 204 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 Example The following shows the current IGMP snooping configuration Console show ip igmp snooping Service status Enabled Querier status Enabled Leave proxy status Disabled Query count 10 Query interval 100 sec Query max response time 20 sec Router port expire time 300 sec Immediate Leave Processing Disabled on all VLAN IGMP snooping version Version 2 Console show mac address table multicast This command shows known multicast addresses Syntax show mac address table multicast vlan vian id user igmp snooping e vian id VLAN ID 1 to 4094 e user Display only the user configured multicast entries igmp snooping Display only entries learned through IGMP snooping Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Member types displayed include IGMP or USER depending on selected options Example The following shows the multicast entries learned through IGMP snooping for VLAN 1 Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 igmp snooping VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type Console 4 205 4 Command Line Interface IGMP Query
294. fig if negotiation Console config if capabilities 100half 4 119 Console config if capabilities 100full Console config if capabilities flowcontrol Creating Trunk Groups You can create multiple links between devices that work as one virtual aggregate link A port trunk offers a dramatic increase in bandwidth for network segments where bottlenecks exist as well as providing a fault tolerant link between two devices You can create up to 32 trunks at a time The switch supports both static trunking and dynamic Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Static trunks have to be manually configured at both ends of the link and the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard On the other hand LACP configured ports can automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP configured ports on another device You can configure any number of ports on the switch as LACP as long as they are not already configured as part of a static trunk If ports on another device are also configured as LACP the switch and the other device will negotiate a trunk link between them If an LACP trunk consists of more than eight ports all other ports will be placed in a standby mode Should one link in the trunk fail one of the standby ports will automatically be activated to replace it Command Usage Besides balancing the load across each port in the trunk the other ports provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk fails
295. figuration Command Usage The maximum number of cluster Members is 16 The maximum number of switch Candidates is 100 Example Console config cluster member mac address 00 12 34 56 78 9a id 5 Console config rcommand This command provides access to a cluster Member CLI for configuration Syntax rcommand id lt member id gt member id The ID number of the Member switch Range 1 16 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command only operates through a Telnet connection to the Commander switch Managing cluster Members using the local console CLI on the 4 240 Switch Cluster Commands 4 Commander is not supported e There is no need to enter the username and password for access to the Member switch CLI Example Vty O rcommand id 1 CLI session with the TigerSwitch 10 100 1000 is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Vty 0 show cluster This command shows the switch clustering configuration Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show cluster Role commander Interval heartbeat 30 Heartbeat loss count 3 Number of Members 1 Number of Candidates 2 Console show cluster members This command shows the current switch cluster members Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show cluster members Cluster Members ID 1 Role Active member IP Address 10 254 254 2 MAC Address 00 12 cf 23 49 c0 Description TigerSwitc
296. figuring SNTP You can configure the switch to send time synchronization requests to time servers Command Attributes SNTP Client Configures the switch to operate as an SNTP client This requires at least one time server to be specified in the SNTP Server field Default Disabled SNTP Poll Interval Sets the interval between sending requests for a time update from a time server Range 16 16384 seconds Default 16 seconds e SNTP Server Sets the IP address for up to three time servers The switch attempts to update the time from the first server if this fails it attempts an update from the next server in the sequence Web Select SNTP Configuration Modify any of the required parameters and click Apply SNTP Configuration SNTP Client M Enabled SNTP Polling Interval 16 16384 60 SNTP Server fi0 1 0 19 fi37 82140 80 128 250 36 2 Figure 3 22 SNTP Configuration 3 31 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example configures the switch to operate as an SNTP unicast client and then displays the current time and settings Console config Console config Console config Console config SNTP server 10 Current server sntp server 10 1 0 19 137 82 140 80 128 250 36 2 4 54 sntp poll 60 4 55 sntp client 4 53 exit Console show sntp Current time Jan 6 14 56 05 2004 Poll interval 16 Current mode unicast SNTP status Enabled 0 19 137 82 140 80 128
297. for the trap function Console show logging trap Syslog logging Enable REMOTELOG status disable REMOTELOG facility type local use 7 REMOTELOG level type Debugging messages REMOTELOG server IP address 1 2 3 4 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 Console Table 4 20 show logging trap display description Field Description Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command REMOTELOG status Shows if remote logging has been enabled via the logging trap command REMOTELOG The facility type for remote logging of syslog messages as specified in the logging facility type facility command REMOTELOG level type The severity threshold for syslog messages sent to a remote server as specified in the logging trap command REMOTELOG server IP address The address of syslog servers as specified in the logging host command Related Commands show logging sendmail 4 52 show log This command displays the system and event messages stored in memory Syntax show log flash ram login tail e flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset e tail Shows event history starting from the most recent entry login Shows the login record only Defa
298. fore active ports start learning predefining an alternate route that can be used when a node or port fails and retaining the forwarding database for ports insensitive to changes in the tree structure when reconfiguration occurs MSTP When using STP or RSTP it may be difficult to maintain a stable path between all VLAN members Frequent changes in the tree structure can easily isolate some of the group members MSTP which is based on RSTP for fast convergence is designed to support independent spanning trees based on VLAN groups Using multiple spanning trees can provide multiple forwarding paths and enable load balancing One or more VLANs can be grouped into a Multiple Spanning Tree Instance MSTI MSTP builds a separate Multiple Spanning Tree MST for each instance to maintain connectivity among each of the assigned VLAN groups MSTP then builds a Internal Spanning Tree IST for the Region containing all commonly configured MSTP bridges gt IST MST1 for this Region _ Region R 3 103 3 Configuring the Switch An MST Region consists of a group of interconnected bridges that have the same MST Configuration Identifiers including the Region Name Revision Level and Configuration Digest V see 3 116 An MST Region may contain multiple MSTP Instances An Internal Spanning Tree IST is used to connect all the MSTP switches within an MST region A Common Spanning Tree CST interconnects all adjacent MST Regions and acts as a v
299. g cfg Config File a 5197 Console boot system This command specifies the image used to start up the system Syntax boot system unit boot rom config opcode filename The type of file or image to set as a default includes boot rom Boot ROM config Configuration file opcode Run time operation code filename Name of the configuration file or code image e unit Specifies the unit number Always unit 1 The colon is required Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 69 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage e A colon is required after the specified unit number and file type e Ifthe file contains an error it cannot be set as the default file Example Console config boot system config startup Console config Related Commands dir 4 68 whichboot 4 69 Authentication Commands You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or RADIUS authentication methods You can also enable port based authentication for network client access using IEEE 802 1X Table 4 27 Authentication Commands Command Group Function Page Authentication Sequence Defines logon authentication method and precedence 4 70 RADIUS Client Configures settings for authentication via a RADIUS server 4 73 TACACS Client Configures settings for authentication via a TACACS
300. g specific values for IP Port Priority is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch Quality of Service The commands described in this section are used to configure Quality of Service QoS classification criteria and service policies Differentiated Services DiffServ provides policy based management mechanisms used for prioritizing network resources to meet the requirements of specific traffic types on a per hop basis Each packet is classified upon entry into the network based on access lists IP Precedence DSCP values or VLAN lists Using access lists allows you select traffic based on Layer 2 Layer 3 or Layer 4 information contained in each packet Based on configured network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding 3 154 Quality of Service 3 All switches or routers that access the Internet rely on class information to provide the same forwarding treatment to packets in the same class Class information can be assigned by end hosts or switches or routers along the path Priority can then be assigned based on a general policy or a detailed examination of the packet However note that detailed examination of packets should take place close to the network edge so that core switches and routers are not overloaded Switches and routers along the path can use class information to prioritize the resources allocated to d
301. g weights 1 2 4 8 for queues 0 through 3 respectively This is the default selection Strict Services the egress queues in sequential order transmitting all traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues 3 147 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Priority Queue Mode Select Strict or WRR then click Apply Queue Mode Queue Mode WRR x Figure 3 87 Queue Mode CLI The following sets the queue mode to WRR priority service mode Console config queue mode wrr 4 185 Console config exit Console show queue mode 4 188 Queue mode wrr Console Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes This switch uses the Weighted Round Robin WRR algorithm to determine the frequency at which it services each priority queue As described in Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues on page 3 145 the traffic classes are mapped to one of the eight egress queues provided for each port You can assign a weight to each of these queues and thereby to the corresponding traffic priorities This weight sets the frequency at which each queue will be polled for service and subsequently affects the response time for software applications assigned a specific priority value Command Attributes Interface Select port or trunk as an interface e WRR Setting Table Displays a list of weights for each traffic class i e queue Weight Value Set a new weight for
302. ge The switch must use IGMPv2 for this command to take effect Example The following shows how to configure the default timeout to 300 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping router port expire time 300 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping version 4 203 Static Multicast Routing Commands Table 4 70 Static Multicast Routing Commands Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping vian Adds a multicast router port GC 4 209 mrouter show ip igmp snooping Shows multicast router ports PE 4 210 mrouter ip igmp snooping vian mrouter This command statically configures a multicast router port Use the no form to remove the configuration Syntax no ip igmp snooping vlan vian id mrouter interface e vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 e interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 26 50 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting No static multicast router ports are configured Command Mode Global Configuration 4 209 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your router you can manually configure that interface to join all the current multicast groups Example The following shows
303. ge 4 5 Syntax enable evel level Privilege level to log into the device The device has two predefined privilege levels 0 Normal Exec 15 Privileged Exec Enter level 15 to access Privileged Exec mode 4 19 A Command Line Interface Default Setting Level 15 Command Mode Normal Exec Command Usage e super is the default password required to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec To set this password see the enable password command on page 4 26 The character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in privileged access mode Example Console gt enable Password privileged level password Console Related Commands disable 4 20 enable password 4 26 disable This command returns to Normal Exec mode from privileged mode In normal access mode you can only display basic information on the switch s configuration or Ethernet statistics To gain access to all commands you must use the privileged mode See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 5 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The gt character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in normal access mode Example Console disable Console gt Related Commands enable 4 19 4 20 General Commands 4 configure This command activates Global Configuration mode You must enter thi
304. ged member of the associated VLAN these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission Example The following example shows how to set a default priority on port 3 to 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport priority default 5 queue bandwidth This command assigns weighted round robin WRR weights to the four class of service CoS priority queues Use the no form to restore the default weights Syntax queue bandwidth weight7 weight4 no queue bandwidth weight1 weight4 The ratio of weights for queues 0 3 determines the weights used by the WRR scheduler Range 1 31 Default Setting Weights 1 2 4 8 are assigned to queues 0 3 respectively Command Mode Global Configuration 4 186 Priority Commands 4 Command Usage WRR controls bandwidth sharing at the egress port by defining scheduling weights Example This example shows how to assign WRR weights to priority queues 0 2 Console config queue bandwidth 6 9 12 Console config Related Commands show queue bandwidth 4 188 queue cos map This command assigns class of service CoS values to the priority queues i e hardware output queues 0 3 Use the no form set the CoS map to the default values Syntax queue cos map queue_id cos7 cosn no queue cos map queue_id The ID of the priority queue Ranges are 0 to 3 where 3 is the highest priority queue cos7 cosn
305. ged to a trusted port all the dynamic DHCP snooping bindings associated with this port are removed e Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client The port s through which it submits a client request to the DHCP server must be configured as trusted Example This example sets port 5 to untrusted Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if no ip dhcp snooping trust Console config if Related Commands ip dhcp snooping 4 231 ip dhcp snooping vlan 4 233 4 234 DHCP Snooping Commands 4 ip dhcp snooping verify mac address This command verifies the client s hardware address stored in the DHCP packet against the source MAC address in the Ethernet header Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip dhcp snooping verify mac address Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If MAC address verification is enabled and the source MAC address in the Ethernet header of the packet is not same as the clients hardware address in the DHCP packet the packet is dropped Example This example enables MAC address verification Console config ip dhcp snooping verify mac address Console config Related Commands ip dhcp snooping 4 231 ip dhcp snooping vlan 4 233 ip dhcp snooping trust 4 234 ip dhcp snooping information option This command enables the DHCP Option 82 information relay for the switch Use the no form
306. gement Access The switch can be configured to accept management commands from Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP applications such as HP OpenView You can configure the switch to 1 respond to SNMP requests or 2 generate SNMP traps When SNMP management stations send requests to the switch either to return information or to set a parameter the switch provides the requested data or sets the specified parameter The switch can also be configured to send information to SNMP managers without being requested by the managers through trap messages which inform the manager that certain events have occurred The switch includes an SNMP agent that supports SNMP version 1 2c and 3 clients To provide management access for version 1 or 2c clients you must specify a community string The switch provides a default MIB View i e an SNMPv3 construct for the default public community string that provides read access to the entire MIB tree and a default view for the private community string that provides read write access to the entire MIB tree However you may assign new views to version 1 or 2c community strings that suit your specific security requirements see page 3 45 Community Strings for SNMP version 1 and 2c clients Community strings are used to control management access to SNMP version 1 and 2c stations as well as to authorize SNMP stations to receive trap messages from the switch You therefore need to assign commu
307. greenpeace priv des56 einstien Console config snmp server user mark group r amp d remote 192 168 1 19 v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien Console config 4 114 SNMP Commands 4 show snmp user This command shows information on SNMP users Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show snmp user EngineId 800000ca030030f1d 9ca00000 User Name steve Authentication Protocol md5 Privacy Protocol des56 Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active SNMP remote user EngineId 80000000030004e2b316c54321 User Name mark Authentication Protocol mdt Privacy Protocol des56 Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console Table 4 41 show snmp user display description Field Description Engineld String identifying the engine ID User Name Name of user connecting to the SNMP agent Authentication Protocol The authentication protocol used with SNMPv3 Privacy Protocol The privacy protocol used with SNMPv3 Storage Type The storage type for this entry Row Status The row status of this entry SNMP remote user A user associated with an SNMP engine on a remote device 4 115 4 Command Line Interface Interface Commands These commands are used to display or set communication parameters for an Ethernet port aggregated link or VLAN Table 4 42 Interface Commands Command Function Mod
308. group is denied the IGMP join report is dropped IGMP filtering and throttling only applies to dynamically learned multicast groups it does not apply to statically configured groups 4 211 4 Command Line Interface e The IGMP filtering feature operates in the same manner when MVR is used to forward multicast traffic Example Console config ip igmp filter Console config ip igmp profile This command creates an IGMP filter profile number and enters IGMP profile configuration mode Use the no form to delete a profile number Syntax no ip igmp profile profile number profile number An IGMP filter profile number Range 1 4294967295 Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage A profile defines the multicast groups that a subscriber is permitted or denied to join The same profile can be applied to many interfaces but only one profile can be assigned to one interface Each profile has only one access mode either permit or deny Example Console config ip igmp profile 19 Console config igmp profile permit deny This command sets the access mode for an IGMP filter profile Use the no form to delete a profile number Syntax permit deny Default Setting Deny Command Mode IGMP Profile Configuration Command Usage e Each profile has only one access mode either permit or deny 4 212 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 e When the access mode is set
309. groups to identify the IP multicast group members It simply monitors the IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures the multicast filters accordingly IGMP Querier A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one router switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Note Multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet Command Attributes IGMP Status When enabled the switch will monitor network traffic to determine which hosts want to receive multicast traffic This is also referred to as IGMP Snooping Default Enabled Act as IGMP Querier When enabled the switch can serve as the Querier which is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic Default Enabled e IGMP Query Count Sets the maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the multicast group Range 2 10 Default 2 IGMP Query Interval Sets the frequency
310. gs Command Attributes MST Instance Instance identifier of this spanning tree Default 0 Priority The priority of a spanning tree instance Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Default 32768 e VLANs in MST Instance VLANs assigned this instance MST ID Instance identifier to configure Range 0 57 Default 0 e VLAN ID VLAN to assign to this selected MST instance Range 1 4094 3 116 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 Web Click Spanning Tree MSTP VLAN Configuration Select an instance identifier from the list set the instance priority and click Apply To add the VLAN members to an MSTI instance enter the instance identifier the VLAN identifier and click Add MSTP VLAN Configuration MST Instance ID 0 panning Tree Sta Hello Ti Forward Delay Priority 0 6 1440 32768 MSTP VLAN Configuration VLAN in MST Instance Remove f osoa vean o Waa Figure 3 68 Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees CLI This example sets the priority for MSTI 1 and adds VLANs 1 5 to this MSTI Console Console Console Console config spanning tree mst configuration config mst mst 1 priority 4096 config mstp mst 1 vlan 1 5 config mst 3 117 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example sets STA attributes for port 1 follow
311. h Range 0 65535 Control Code Decimal number representing a bit string that specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header Range 0 63 e Control Code Bit Mask Decimal number representing the code bits to match The control bitmask is a decimal number for an equivalent binary bit mask that is applied to the control code Enter a decimal number where the equivalent binary bit 1 means to match a bit and 0 means to ignore a bit The following bits may be specified 1 fin Finish 2 syn Synchronize 4 rst Reset 8 psh Push 16 ack Acknowledgement 32 urg Urgent pointer For example use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the following flags set SYN flag valid use control code 2 control bitmask 2 Both SYN and ACK valid use control code 18 control bitmask 18 SYN valid and ACK invalid use control code 2 control bitmask 18 Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Specify the source and or destination addresses Select the address type Any Host or IP If you select Host enter a specific address If you select IP enter a subnet address and the mask for an address range Set any other required criteria such as service type protocol type or TCP control code Then click Add 3 70 Access Control Lists 3 Extended ACL Name Extended ACL lncton Suanet paprom Subnet roS Precedence DSCP Pro
312. h If you assign an IP address to any other VLAN the new IP address overrides the original IP address and this becomes the new management VLAN Example In the following example the device is assigned an address in VLAN 1 Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 5 255 255 255 0 Console config if Related Commands ip dhcp restart 4 225 ip default gateway This command establishes a static route between this switch and devices that exist on another network segment Use the no form to remove the static route Syntax ip default gateway gateway no ip default gateway gateway IP address of the default gateway Default Setting No static route is established Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage A gateway must be defined if the management station is located in a different IP segment Example The following example defines a default gateway for this device Console config ip default gateway 10 1 1 254 Console config Related Commands show ip redirects 4 226 4 224 IP Interface Commands 4 ip dhcp restart This command submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command issues a BOOTP or DHCP client request for any IP interface that has been set to BOOTP or DHCP mode via the ip address command DHCP requires the server to reassign the client s last address if availab
313. h 10 100 1000 SPORT MANAGE Console 4 241 4 Command Line Interface show cluster candidates This command shows the discovered Candidate switches in the network Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show cluster candidates Cluster Candidates Role Mac Description ACTIVE MEMBER 00 12 cf 23 49 c0 TigerSwitch 10 100 1000 SPORT MANAGE CANDIDATE 00 12 cf 0b 47 a0 TigerSwitch 10 100 1000 SPORT MANAGE Console 4 242 Appendix A Software Specifications Software Features Authentication Local RADIUS TACACS Port 802 1X HTTPS SSH Port Security Access Control Lists 128 ACLS 96 MAC rules 96 IP rules DHCP Client Port Configuration 100BASE TX 10 100 Mbps half full duplex 1000BASE T 10 100 Mbps at half full duplex 1000 Mbps at full duplex 1000BASE SX LX ZX 1000 Mbps at full duplex SFP Flow Control Full Duplex IEEE 802 3 2002 Half Duplex Back pressure Broadcast Storm Control Traffic throttled above a critical threshold Port Mirroring Multiple source ports one destination port Rate Limits Input limit Output limit Port Trunking Static trunks Cisco EtherChannel compliant Dynamic trunks Link Aggregation Control Protocol Spanning Tree Algorithm Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w Multiple Spanning Trees MSTP VLAN Support Up to 256 groups port based or tagged 802 1Q Private VLANs Protocol based VL
314. h server key size 512 4 37 Console config end Console show ip ssh 4 40 SSH Enabled version 2 0 Negotiation timeout 120 secs Authentication retries 5 Server key size 512 bits Console show ssh 4 40 Connection Version State Username Encryption 0 2 20 Session Started admin ctos aes128 cbc hmac md5 stoc aes128 cbc hmac md5 Console disconnect 0 4 18 Console Generating the Host Key Pair A host public private key pair is used to provide secure communications between an SSH client and the switch After generating this key pair you must provide the host public key to SSH clients and import the client s public key to the switch as described in the proceeding section Command Usage Field Attributes Public Key of Host Key The public key for the host e RSA Version 1 The first field indicates the size of the host key e g 1024 the second field is the encoded public exponent e g 65537 and the last string is the encoded modulus e DSA Version 2 The first field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard DSS The last string is the encoded modulus Host Key Type The key type used to generate the host key pair i e public and private keys Range RSA Version 1 DSA Version 2 Both Default RSA The SSH server uses RSA or DSA for key exchange when the client first establishes a connection with the switch and then negotiates with the clie
315. he access level and password for a user Console config username bob access level 15 Console config username bob password 0 smith Console config enable password After initially logging onto the system you should set the Privileged Exec password Remember to record it in a safe place This command controls access to the Privileged Exec level from the Normal Exec level Use the no form to reset the default password Syntax enable password level evel 0 7 password no enable password level evel level evel Level 15 for Privileged Exec Levels 0 14 are not used 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password 4 26 System Management Commands 4 password password for this privilege level Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting The default is level 15 The default password is super Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You cannot set a null password You will have to enter a password to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec with the enable command page 4 19 The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example Console
316. he no form to disable it Syntax no jumbo frame Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e This switch provides more efficient throughput for large sequential data transfers by supporting jumbo frames up to 9216 bytes Compared to standard Ethernet frames that run only up to 1 5 KB using jumbo frames significantly reduces the per packet overhead required to process protocol encapsulation fields To use jumbo frames both the source and destination end nodes such as a computer or server must support this feature Also when the connection is operating at full duplex all switches in the network between the two end nodes must be able to accept the extended frame size And for half duplex connections all devices in the collision domain would need to support jumbo frames 4 63 4 Command Line Interface e Enabling jumbo frames will limit the maximum threshold for broadcast storm control to 64 packets per second See the switchport broadcast command on page 4 122 e The current setting for jumbo frames can be displayed with the show system command page 4 61 Example Console config jumbo frame Console config Flash File Commands These commands are used to manage the system code or configuration files Table 4 25 Flash File Commands Command Function Mode Page copy Copies a code image or a switch configuration to or from flash PE
317. he output queues in the following manner The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port Priority IP Precedence or DSCP Priority and then Default Port Priority IP Precedence and DSCP Priority cannot both be enabled Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other Selecting IP Precedence DSCP Priority The switch allows you to choose between using IP Precedence or DSCP priority Select one of the methods or disable this feature Command Attributes Disabled Disables both priority services This is the default setting IP Precedence Maps layer 3 4 priorities using IP Precedence IP DSCP Maps layer 3 4 priorities using Differentiated Services Code Point Mapping 3 149 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Priority IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status Select Disabled IP Precedence or IP DSCP from the scroll down menu then click Apply IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status Figure 3 89 IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status CLI The following example enables IP Precedence service on the switch Console config map ip precedence 4 204 Console config Mapping IP Precedence The Type of Service ToS octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control packets to lowest priority for routine traffic The default IP Precedence values are mapped one to one to Cl
318. he query count defines how long the querier waits for a response from a multicast client before taking action If a querier has sent a number of queries defined by this command but a client has not responded a countdown timer is started using the time defined by ip igmp snooping query max response time If the countdown finishes and the client still has not responded then that client is considered to have left the multicast group Example The following shows how to configure the query count to 10 Console config ip igmp snooping query count 10 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 208 ip igmp snooping query interval This command configures the query interval Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query interval seconds no ip igmp snooping query interval seconds The frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host query messages Range 60 125 Default Setting 125 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following shows how to configure the query interval to 100 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping query interval 100 Console config 4 207 4 Command Line Interface ip igmp snooping query max response time This command configures the query report delay Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query max response time seconds no ip igmp snooping query max response time sec
319. he show line command from the Normal Exec level Console config line vty Console config line login local Console config line password 0 secret Console config line timeout login response 300 Console config line exec timeout 600 Console config line password thresh 3 Console config line end Console show line Console configuration Password threshold 3 times Interactive timeout Disabled Login timeout Disabled Silent time Disabled Baudrate 9600 Databits 8 Parity none Stopbits 1 VTY configuration Password threshold 3 times Interactive timeout 600 sec Login timeout 300 sec Console 4 11 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 13 4 14 Configuring Event Logging The switch allows you to control the logging of error messages including the type of events that are recorded in switch memory logging to a remote System Log syslog server and displays a list of recent event messages Displaying Log Messages The Logs page allows you to scroll through the logged system and event messages The switch can store up to 2048 log entries in temporary random access memory RAM i e memory flushed on power reset and up to 4096 entries in permanent flash memory Web Click System Log Logs Logs error number 1 Ini error number 1 Int error number 1 Ini error number Inform error number Infor error number Infon error number Information error number Informatio number Information Vi
320. hing configuration changes you can display the VLAN settings by entering the show vlan command e Use the interface vlan command mode to define the port membership mode and add or remove ports from a VLAN The results of these commands are written to the running configuration file and you can display this file by entering the show running config command Example Console config vlan database Console config vlan Related Commands show vlan 4 175 vlan This command configures a VLAN Use the no form to restore the default settings or delete a VLAN Syntax vlan vlan id name vlan name media ethernet state active suspend no vlan vlan id name state e vian id ID of configured VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes name Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name vilan name ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters media ethernet Ethernet media type state Keyword to be followed by the VLAN state active VLAN is operational suspend VLAN is suspended Suspended VLANs do not pass packets Default Setting By default only VLAN 1 exists and is active Command Mode VLAN Database Configuration Command Usage no vlan vian id deletes the VLAN no vlan vian id name removes the VLAN name e no vlan vian id state returns the VLAN to the default state i e active e You can configure up to 255 VLANs on the switch 4 168 VLAN Commands 4 Example The following example adds a
321. how to configure port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1 11 Console config show ip igmp snooping mrouter This command displays information on statically configured and dynamically learned multicast router ports Syntax show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan vian id vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 Default Setting Displays multicast router ports for all configured VLANs Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Multicast router port types displayed include Static Example The following shows that port 11 in VLAN 1 is attached to a multicast router Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 VLAN M cast Router Ports Type 1 Eth 1 11 Static 2 Eth 1 12 Static Console 4 210 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 IGMP Filtering and Throttling Commands In certain switch applications the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users For example an IP TV service based on a specific subscription plan The IGMP filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port and IGMP throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join Table 4 71 IGMP Filtering and Throttling Commands Command Function Mode Page ip igmp filter Enables IGMP filtering and throttling on the switch GC 4
322. ic This command adds a port to a multicast group Use the no form to remove the port Syntax no ip igmp snooping vlan vian id static ip address interface e vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 jp address IP address for multicast group interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 26 50 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following shows how to statically configure a multicast group on a port Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224 0 0 12 ethernet 1 5 Console config 4 202 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 ip igmp snooping version This command configures the IGMP snooping version Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping version 1 2 no ip igmp snooping version 1 IGMP Version 1 2 IGMP Version 2 Default Setting IGMP Version 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage All systems on the subnet must support the same version If there are legacy devices in your network that only support Version 1 you will also have to configure this switch to use Version 1 Some commands are only enabled for IGMPv2 including ip igmp query max response time and ip igmp query timeout Example The following configures the switch to use IGMP Version 1 Console config ip igmp snooping version 1 Console config
323. ic on network interfaces based on manually configured entries in the IP Source Guard table or static and dynamic entries in the DHCP Snooping table when enabled see DHCP Snooping Commands on page 4 231 IP source guard can be used to prevent traffic attacks caused when a host tries to use the IP address of a neighbor to access the network This section describes commands used to configure IP Source Guard Note Due to a chip limitation IP source guard and Quality of Service only for IP related QoS function cannot be enabled at the same time Thus if the user has already enabled the IP source guard function it needs to be disabled first in order for the QoS function to work and vice versa Table 4 77 IP Source Guard Commands Command Function Mode Page ip source guard Configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based on source IP IC 4 227 address or source IP address and corresponding MAC address ip source guard Adds a static address to the source guard binding table GC 4 229 binding show ip Shows whether source guard is enabled or disabled on each PE 4 230 source guard interface show ip Shows the source guard binding table PE 4 230 source guard binding ip source guard This command configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based source IP address or source IP address and corresponding MAC address Use the no form to disable this function 4 227 A Command Line Interface S
324. ices connected in the same network to the same values Otherwise GVRP may not operate successfully Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if garp timer join 100 Console config if Related Commands show garp timer 4 166 show garp timer This command shows the GARP timers for the selected interface 4 166 VLAN Commands 4 Syntax show garp timer interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 26 50 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting Shows all GARP timers Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show garp timer ethernet 1 1 Eth 1 1 GARP timer status Join timer 100 centiseconds Leave timer 60 centiseconds Leaveall timer 1000 centiseconds Console Related Commands garp timer 4 166 Editing VLAN Groups Table 4 55 Editing VLAN Groups Command Function Mode Page vlan database Enters VLAN database mode to add change and delete GC 4 167 VLANs vlan Configures a VLAN including VID name and state VC 4 168 vlan database This command enters VLAN database mode All commands in this mode will take effect immediately Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 167 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage e Use the VLAN database command mode to add change and delete VLANs After finis
325. id bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask no permit deny untagged eth2 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask no permit deny tagged 802 3 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid vid vid bitmask no permit deny untagged 802 3 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask tagged eth2 Tagged Ethernet II packets untagged eth2 Untagged Ethernet II packets tagged 802 3 Tagged Ethernet 802 3 packets untagged 802 3 Untagged Ethernet 802 3 packets any Any MAC source or destination address host A specific MAC address source Source MAC address destination Destination MAC address range with bitmask e address bitmask Bitmask for MAC address in hexidecimal format e vid VLAN ID Range 1 4093 vid bitmask VLAN bitmask Range 1 4093 e protocol A specific Ethernet protocol number Range 600 fff hex protocol bitmask Protocol bitmask Range 600 fff hex 16 For all bitmasks 1 means care and 0 means ignore 4 96 Access Control List Commands 4 Default Setting None Command Mode MAC ACL Command Usage e New rules are added to the end of the list The ethertype option can only be use
326. ifferent traffic classes The manner in which an individual device handles traffic in the DiffServ architecture is called per hop behavior All devices along a path should be configured in a consistent manner to construct a consistent end to end QoS solution Notes 1 You can configure up to 16 rules per Class Map You can also include multiple classes in a Policy Map 2 You should create a Class Map before creating a Policy Map Otherwise you will not be able to select a Class Map from the Policy Rule Settings screen see 3 160 3 Due to a chip limitation IP source guard and Quality of Service only for IP related QoS function cannot be enabled at the same time Thus if the user has already enabled the IP source guard function it needs to be disabled first in order for the QoS function to work and vice versa Configuring Quality of Service Parameters To create a service policy for a specific category or ingress traffic follow these steps 1 Use the Class Map to designate a class name for a specific category of traffic Edit the rules for each class to specify a type of traffic based on an access list a DSCP or IP Precedence value or a VLAN 3 Use the Policy Map to designate a policy name for a specific manner in which ingress traffic will be handled 4 Add one or more classes to the Policy Map Assign policy rules to each class by setting the QoS value to be assigned to the matching traffic class The policy
327. ify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion This switch supports CoS with four priority queues for each port Data packets in a port s high priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower priority queues You can set the default priority for each interface the relative weight of each queue and the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch s priority queues Table 4 61 Priority Commands Command Groups Function Page Priority Layer 2 Configures default priority for untagged frames sets queue weights 4 184 and maps class of service tags to hardware queues Priority Layer 3 and 4 Maps IP DSCP tags to class of service values 4 189 Priority Commands Layer 2 Table 4 62 Priority Commands Layer 2 Command Function Mode Page queue mode Sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted GC 4 185 Round Robin WRR switchport priority default Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames IC 4 185 queue bandwidth Assigns round robin weights to the priority queues GC 4 186 queue cos map Assigns class of service values to the priority queues IC 4 187 show queue mode Shows the current queue mode PE 4 188 show queue bandwidth Shows round robin weights assigned to the priority queues PE 4 188 show queue cos map Shows the class of service map PE 4 189 show interfaces switchport Displays the administrative and operational statu
328. ig cluster 4 238 Console config cluster commander 4 239 Console config cluster ip pool 10 2 3 4 4 239 Console config Cluster Member Configuration Adds Candidate switches to the cluster as Members Command Attributes Member ID Specify a Member ID number for the selected Candidate switch Range 1 16 MAC Address Select a discoverd switch MAC address from the Candidate Table or enter a specific MAC address of a known switch 3 196 Switch Clustering Web Click Cluster Member Configuration 3 Cluster Member Configuration Current Cluster Member New Cluster Member List Member ID 1 16 none O Candidate Table none Add MAC Address OX XX XX XX XX XX Figure 3 124 Cluster Member Configuration CLI This example creates a new cluster Member by specifying the Candidate switch MAC address and setting a Member ID Console config Console config cluster member mac address 00 12 34 56 78 9a id 5 4 240 Cluster Member Information Displays current cluster Member switch information Command Attributes Member ID The ID number of the Member switch Range 1 16 e Role Indicates the current status of the switch in the cluster IP Address The internal cluster IP address assigned to the Member switch MAC Address The MAC address of the Member switch Description The system description string of the Member switch
329. ig sntp server 10 1 0 19 Console config sntp poll 60 Console config sntp client Console config end Console show sntp Current time Dec 23 02 52 44 2002 Poll interval 60 Current mode unicast SNTP status Enabled SNTP server 10 1 0 19 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Current server 10 1 0 19 Console Related Commands sntp server 4 54 sntp poll 4 55 show sntp 4 55 snip server This command sets the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time requests are issued Use the this command with no arguments to clear all time servers from the current list Syntax sntp server ip7 ip2 ip3 ip IP address of a time server NTP or SNTP Range 1 3 addresses Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command specifies time servers from which the switch will poll for time updates when set to SNTP client mode The client will poll the time servers in the order specified until a response is received It issues time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command Example Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 Related Commands sntp client 4 53 sntp poll 4 55 show sntp 4 55 4 54 System Management Commands 4 sntp poll This command sets the interval between sending time requests when the switch is set to SNTP client mode Use the no form to restore to the default Syntax sntp poll seconds no sntp poll seconds Interv
330. igns ports that are attached to a neighboring multicast router 3 166 Configuration IP Multicast Registration Displays all multicast groups active on this switch including 3 167 Table multicast IP addresses and VLAN ID IGMP Member Port Table Indicates multicast addresses associated with the selected 3 168 VLAN IGMP Filter Profile Configures IGMP filter profile controlled groups and access 3 169 Configuration mode IGMP Filter Throttling Port Assigns IGMP filter profiles to port interfaces and sets throttling 3 171 Configuration settings IGMP Filter Throttling Trunk Assigns IGMP filter profiles to trunk interfaces and sets throttling 3 171 Configuration settings MVR 3 174 Configuration Globally enables MVR sets the MVR VLAN adds multicast 3 175 stream addresses Port Information Displays MVR interface type MVR operational and activity 3 176 status and immediate leave status Trunk Information Displays MVR interface type MVR operational and activity 3 176 status and immediate leave status Group IP Information Displays the ports attached to an MVR multicast stream 3 178 3 8 Navigating the Web Browser Interface 3 Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page Port Configuration Configures MVR interface type and immediate leave status 3 179 Trunk Configuration Configures MVR interface type and immediate leave status 3 179 Group Member Configuration Sta
331. iguration Example Console config snmp server community alpha rw Console config snmp server contact This command sets the system contact string Use the no form to remove the system contact information Syntax snmp server contact string no snmp server contact string String that describes the system contact information Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server contact Paul Console config Related Commands snmp server location 4 103 snmp server location This command sets the system location string Use the no form to remove the location string Syntax snmp server location text no snmp server location text String that describes the system location Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None 4 103 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server location WC 19 Console config Related Commands snmp server contact 4 103 snmp server host This command specifies the recipient of a Simple Network Management Protocol notification operation Use the no form to remove the specified host Syntax snmp server host host addr inform retry retries timeout seconds community string version 1 2c 3 auth noauth priv udp port port no snmp server host host addr host adadr Internet addre
332. iguration 3 191 Static IP Source Guard Binding Configuration 3 192 Dynamic IP Source Guard Binding Information 3 193 Switch Clustering 3 194 Cluster Configuration 3 195 Cluster Member Configuration 3 196 Cluster Member Information 3 197 Cluster Candidate Information 3 198 Chapter 4 Command Line Interface 4 1 Using the Command Line Interface 4 1 Accessing the CLI 4 1 Console Connection 4 1 Telnet Connection 4 2 Entering Commands 4 3 Keywords and Arguments 4 3 Minimum Abbreviation 4 3 Command Completion 4 3 Getting Help on Commands 4 3 Showing Commands 4 4 Partial Keyword Lookup 4 5 Negating the Effect of Commands 4 5 Using Command History 4 5 Understanding Command Modes 4 5 Exec Commands 4 6 Configuration Commands 4 7 Command Line Processing 4 8 Command Groups 4 9 Line Commands 4 10 line 4 11 login 4 11 password 4 12 timeout login response 4 13 exec timeout 4 13 password thresh 4 14 silent time 4 15 databits 4 15 parity 4 16 speed 4 17 stopbits 4 17 Contents disconnect 4 18 show line 4 18 General Commands 4 19 enable 4 19 disable 4 20 configure 4 21 show history 4 21 reload 4 22 end 4 22 exit 4 23 quit 4 23 System Management Commands 4 24 Device Designation Commands 4 24 prompt 4 24 hostname 4 25 User Access Commands 4 25 username 4 25 enable password 4 26 IP Filter Commands 4 27 management 4 27 show management 4 28 Web Server Commands 4 29 ip http port 4 29 ip http server 4 30 ip http secure server 4 30 i
333. igure 3 109 MVR Port Configuration CLI This example configures an MVR source port and receiver port and then enables immediate leave on the receiver port Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if mvr type source 4 219 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if mvr type receiver 4 219 Console config if mvr immediate 4 219 Console config if Assigning Static Multicast Groups to Interfaces For multicast streams that will run for a long term and be associated with a stable set of hosts you can statically bind the multicast group to the participating interfaces Command Usage e Any multicast groups that use the MVR VLAN must be statically assigned to it under the MVR Configuration menu see Configuring Global MVR Settings on page 3 175 The IP address range from 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 is used for multicast streams MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast address range of 224 0 0 x Command Attributes Interface Indicates a port or trunk Member Shows the IP addresses for MVR multicast groups which have been statically assigned to the selected interface Non Member Shows the IP addresses for all MVR multicast groups which have not been statically assigned to the selected interface 3 180 Configuring Domain Name Service 3 Web Click MVR Group Member Configuration Select a port
334. ilent time 4 15 exec timeout 4 14 exec timeout This command sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected Use the no form to restore the default 4 13 4 Command Line Interface Syntax exec timeout seconds no exec timeout seconds Integer that specifies the number of seconds Range 0 65535 seconds 0 no timeout Default Setting CLI No timeout Telnet 10 minutes Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e If user input is detected within the timeout interval the session is kept open otherwise the session is terminated e This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections e The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled e Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting Example To set the timeout to two minutes enter this command Console config line exec timeout 120 Console config line Related Commands silent time 4 15 timeout login response 4 13 password thresh This command sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts Use the no form to remove the threshold value Syntax password thresh threshold no password thresh threshold The number of allowed password attempts Range 1 120 0 no threshold Default Setting The default value is three attempts Command Mode Line Configuration 4 14 Line Commands 4 Command Usage When the logon atte
335. indicate the authentication sequence For example if you enter authentication login radius tacacs local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted on the TACACS server If the TACACS server is not available the local user name and password is checked Example Console config authentication login radius Console config Related Commands username for setting the local user names and passwords 4 25 4 71 4 Command Line Interface authentication enable This command defines the authentication method and precedence to use when changing from Exec command mode to Privileged Exec command mode with the enable command see page 4 19 Use the no form to restore the default Syntax authentication enable local radius tacacs no authentication enable e local Use local password only radius Use RADIUS server password only tacacs Use TACACS server password Default Setting Local Command Mode Global Configuration 4 72 Authentication Commands 4 Command Usage RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication a
336. ing IGMP Immediate Leave IGMP Immediate Leave VLANID 1 v Immediate Leave V Enabled Figure 3 98 IGMP Immediate Leave CLI This example enables IGMP immediate leave for VLAN 1 and then displays the current IGMP snooping status Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip igmp snooping immediate leave 4 204 Console config if end Console show ip igmp snooping 4 203 Service Status Enabled Querier Status Disabled Leave proxy status Enabled Query Count 2 Query Interval 125 sec Query Max Response Time 10 sec Router Port Expire Time 300 sec Immediate Leave Processing Enabled on VLAN 1 IGMP Snooping Version Version 2 Console Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router Multicast routers that are attached to ports on the switch use information obtained from IGMP along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet These routers may be dynamically discovered by the switch or statically assigned to an interface on the switch You can use the Multicast Router Port Information page to display the ports on this switch attached to a neighboring multicast router switch for each VLAN ID Command Attributes VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 Multicast Router List Multicast routers dynamically discovered by this switch or those that are statically assigned to an interface on this swi
337. ing Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 Web Click Spanning Tree MSTP Port or Trunk Information Select the required MST instance to display the current spanning tree values MSTP Port Information MST Instance ID 0 Oper Oper Oper STA Forward Designated Designated Designated Trunk Port Path Link Port Role Status Transitions Cost Bridge Pot Cost tye Edge Member 1 Discarding 0 0 32768 000035281003 128 1 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 2 Discarding 0 0 32768 000035281003 128 2 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 3 Discarding 0 0 32768 000035281003 128 3 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 4 Discarding 0 0 32768 000035281003 1284 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 5 Forwarding 1 0 32768 000035281003 1285 100000 Lined Enabled Designated 6 Discarding 0 0 32768 000035281003 1286 _ 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 7 Discarding 0 0 32768 000035281003 1287 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 8 Discarding 0 0 32768 000035281003 1288 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 9 Discarding 0 0 32768 000035281003 1289 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 10 Discarding 0 0 32768 000035281003 128 10 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 11 Discarding 0 0 32768 000035281003 128 11 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 12 Discarding 0 0 32768 000035281003 128 12 _ 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 13 Discarding 0 0 32768 000035281003 128 13 2000000 Shared
338. ing services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning SVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic classes Enabled Global GVRP status Enabled GMRP Disabled Console Displaying Current VLANs The VLAN Current Table shows the current port members of each VLAN and whether or not the port supports VLAN tagging Ports assigned to a large VLAN group that crosses several switches should use VLAN tagging However if you just want to create a small port based VLAN for one or two switches you can disable tagging Command Attributes Web e VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 Up Time at Creation Time this VLAN was created i e System Up Time 8 Web Only 3 126 VLAN Configuration 3 Status Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch Dynamic GVRP Automatically learned via GVRP Permanent Added as a static entry Egress Ports Shows all the VLAN port members Untagged Ports Shows the untagged VLAN port members Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Current Table Select any ID from the scroll down list VLAN Current Table VLAN ID 1 Up Time at Creation 0 d O h O min 0 s Status Permanent Egress Ports Ur ort Unit Por8 Figure 3 73 Displaying Current VLANs Command Attributes CLI VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading zeroes Type Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch Dynamic Au
339. ing tree configuration for an instance within the Multiple Spanning Tree MST For a description of the items displayed under Spanning tree information see Configuring Global Settings on page 3 128 For a description of the items displayed for specific interfaces see Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 132 Example Console show spanning tree Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode MSTP Spanning tree enable disable enable Instance 0 Vlans configuration 4094 Priority 32768 Bridge Hello Time sec 2 Bridge Max Age sec 20 Bridge Forward Delay sec 5 Root Hello Time sec 2 Root Max Age sec 20 Root Forward Delay sec 5 Max hops 20 Remaining hops 20 Designated Root 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 Current root port Current root cost 0000 Number of topology changes Last topology changes time sec 22 Transmission limit 3 Path Cost Method Long 4 161 4 Command Line Interface Eth 1 1 information Admin status enable Role root State forwarding External admin path cost 10000 Internal admin cost 0000 External oper path cost 0000 Internal oper path cost 0000 Priority 28 Designated cost 200000 Designated port 28 24 Designated root 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 Designated bridge 32768 0 0030F1552000 Fast forwarding disable Forward transitions Admin edge port enable Oper edge port disable Admin Link type auto Oper Link type p
340. ings Console config map ip precedence 4 204 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 131 Console config if map ip precedence 1 cos 0 4 206 Console config if end Console show map ip precedence ethernet 1 1 4 209 Precedence mapping status enabled Port Precedence COS Eth 1 1 0 0 Eth 1 1 1 0 Eth 1 1 2 2 Eth 1 1 3 3 Eth 1 1 4 4 Eth 1 1 5 5 Eth 1 1 6 6 Eth 1 1 7 7 Console Note Mapping specific values for IP Precedence is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch 3 151 3 Configuring the Switch Mapping DSCP Priority The DSCP is six bits wide allowing coding for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors The DSCP retains backward compatibility with the three precedence bits so that non DSCP compliant will not conflict with the DSCP mapping Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding The DSCP default values are defined in the following table Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0 Table 3 14 Mapping DSCP Priority Values IP DSCP Value CoS Value 0 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 48 46 56 NP OD mo AJ wl N oO Command Attributes DSCP Priority Table Shows the DSCP Priority to CoS map e Class of Service Value Maps a CoS value
341. interface as a QinQ tunnel port IC 4 177 mode switchport dot1q tunnel tpid Sets the Tag Protocol Identifier TPID value of a tunnel port IC 4 178 show dot1q tunnel Displays the configuration of QinQ tunnel ports PE 4 178 show interfaces switchport Displays port QinQ operational status PE 4 125 General Configuration Guidelines for QinQ 1 Configure the switch to QinQ mode dot1q tunnel system tunnel control page 4 176 Create a SPVLAN vlan page 4 168 Configure the QinQ tunnel access port to dot1Q tunnel access mode switchport dot1q tunnel mode page 4 177 Set the Tag Protocol Identifier TPID value of the tunnel access port This step is required if the attached client is using a nonstandard 2 byte ethertype to identify 802 1Q tagged frames The standard ethertype value is 0x8100 See switchport dot1q tunnel tpid page 4 178 Configure the QinQ tunnel access port to join the SPVLAN as an untagged member switchport allowed vian page 4 173 Configure the SPVLAN ID as the native VID on the QinQ tunnel access port switchport native vlan page 4 172 Configure the QinQ tunnel uplink port to dot1Q tunnel uplink mode switchport dot1q tunnel mode page 4 177 Configure the QinQ tunnel uplink port to join the SPVLAN as a tagged member switchport allowed vian page 4 173 dotiq tunnel system tunnel control This command sets the switch to operate in QinQ mode Use the no form to disable QinQ operating mode
342. interfaces see Assigning Static Multicast Groups to Interfaces on page 3 180 Configuring Global MVR Settings The global settings for Multicast VLAN Registration MVR include enabling or disabling MVR for the switch selecting the VLAN that will serve as the sole channel for common multicast streams supported by the service provider and assigning the multicast group address for each of these services to the MVR VLAN Command Attributes MVR Status When MVR is enabled on both the switch any multicast data associated an MVR group is sent from all designated source ports and to all receiver ports that have registered to receive data from that multicast group Default Disabled MVR Running Status Indicates whether or not all necessary conditions in the MVR environment are satisfied MVR VLAN Identifier of the VLAN that serves as the channel for streaming multicast services using MVR Range 1 4094 Default 1 MVR Group IP IP address for an MVR multicast group The IP address range of 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 is used for multicast streams MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast address range of 224 0 0 x Range 224 0 1 0 239 255 255 255 Default no groups are assigned to the MVR VLAN Count The number of contiguous MVR group addresses Range 1 255 Default 0 3 175 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click MVR Configuration Enable MVR globally on the switch select the
343. ion Username admin Password CLI session with TigerSwitch 10 100 1000 is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console 4 Command Line Interface Telnet Connection Telnet operates over the IP transport protocol In this environment your management station and any network device you want to manage over the network must have a valid IP address Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Each address consists of a network portion and host portion For example the IP address assigned to this switch 10 1 0 1 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 consists of a network portion 10 1 0 and a host portion 1 Note The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default To access the switch through a Telnet session you must first set the IP address for the Master unit and set the default gateway if you are managing the switch from a different IP subnet For example Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 10 1 0 254 255 255 255 0 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 10 1 0 254 If your corporate network is connected to another network outside your office or to the Internet you need to apply for a registered IP address However if you are attached to an isolated network then you can use any IP address that matches the network segment to which you are attached After you configure the switch with an IP address you c
344. ip igmp snooping leave proxy This command enables IGMP leave proxy on the switch Use the no form to disable the feature Syntax no ip igmp snooping leave proxy Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The IGMP snooping leave proxy feature suppresses all unnecessary IGMP leave messages so that the non querier switch forwards an IGMP leave packet only when the last dynamic member port leaves a multicast group 4 203 4 Command Line Interface The leave proxy feature does not function when a switch is set as the querier Example Console config ip igmp snooping leave proxy Console config ip igmp snooping immediate leave This command enables IGMP immediate leave for specific VLAN Use the no form to disable the feature for a VLAN Syntax no ip igmp snooping immediate leave Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage The IGMP snooping immediate leave feature enables a Layer 2 LAN interface to be removed from the multicast forwarding table without first sending an IGMP group specific query to the interface Upon receiving a group specific IGMPv2 leave message the switch immediately removes the interface from the Layer 2 forwarding table entry for that multicast group unless a multicast router was learned on the port Example Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip igmp snooping immediate leave Console con
345. irtual bridge node for communications with STP or RSTP nodes in the global network Region 1 Region 1 e Region 3 Sc ae MSTP connects all bridges and LAN segments with a single Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST The CIST is formed as a result of the running spanning tree algorithm between switches that support the STP RSTP MSTP protocols Once you specify the VLANs to include in a Multiple Spanning Tree Instance MSTI the protocol will automatically build an MSTI tree to maintain connectivity among each of the VLANs MSTP maintains contact with the global network because each instance is treated as an RSTP node in the Common Spanning Tree CST 3 104 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 Displaying Global Settings You can display a summary of the current bridge STA information that applies to the entire switch using the STA Information screen Field Attributes Spanning Tree State Shows if the switch is enabled to participate in an STA compliant network Bridge ID A unique identifier for this bridge consisting of the bridge priority and MAC address where the address is taken from the switch system Max Age The maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in
346. itch also supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3 4 traffic to meet application requirements Traffic can be prioritized based on the DSCP field in the IP frame When these services are enabled the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the switch and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue Quality of Service Differentiated Services DiffServ provides policy based management mechanisms used for prioritizing network resources to meet the requirements of specific traffic types on a per hop basis Each packet is classified upon entry into the network based on access lists IP Precedence or DSCP values or VLAN lists Using access lists allows you select traffic based on Layer 2 Layer 3 or Layer 4 information contained in each packet Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding 1 4 Description of Software Features 4 Multicast Filtering Specific multicast traffic can be assigned to its own VLAN to ensure that it does not interfere with normal network traffic and to guarantee real time delivery by setting the required priority level for the designated VLAN The switch uses IGMP Snooping and Query to manage multicast group registration It also supports Multicast VLAN Registration MVR which allows common multicast traffic such as television channels to be transmitted across a single network wide multicast VLAN shared by hosts residing
347. itchport acceptable frame types This command configures the acceptable frame types for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport acceptable frame types all tagged no switchport acceptable frame types all The port accepts all frames tagged or untagged tagged The port only receives tagged frames Default Setting All frame types Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage When set to receive all frame types any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN Example The following example shows how to restrict the traffic received on port 1 to tagged frames Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport acceptable frame types tagged Console config if Related Commands switchport mode 4 170 switchport ingress filtering This command enables ingress filtering for an interface Note Although the ingress filtering command is available the switch has ingress filtering permanently set to enable Therefore trying to disable the filtering with the no switchport ingress filtering command will produce this error message Note Failed to ingress filtering on ethernet interface Syntax switchport ingress filtering no switchport ingress filtering Default Setting Enabled 4 171 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage
348. ite 5197 peration_ Code 161044 mf Operation_Code 761944 Figure 3 10 Setting the Startup Code 3 18 Basic Configuration 3 To delete a file select System File Delete Select the file name from the given list by checking the tick box and click Apply Note that the file currently designated as the startup code cannot be deleted Delete Name Type Startup Size fbytes Factory Default Cortig clg Config Fie 5197 peraton_Code iN 1761944 7377 pendon 1751944 Figure 3 11 Deleting Files CLI To download new firmware form a TFTP server enter the IP address of the TFTP server select opcode as the file type then enter the source and destination file names When the file has finished downloading set the new file to start up the system and then restart the switch To start the new firmware enter the reload command or reboot the system Console copy tftp file 4 64 TFTP server ip address 192 168 1 23 Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode lt 1 2 gt 2 Source file name V2 2 7 1 bix Destination file name V2271 F Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console config Console config bhoot system opcode V2271 F 4 69 Console config exit Console reload 4 22 Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings You can upload download configuration settings to from a TFTP server The configuration files can be later downloaded to restore the switch s settings
349. itional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client The port s through which the switch submits a client request to the DHCP server must be configured as trusted ip dhcp snooping trust page 4 234 Note that the switch will not add a dynamic entry for itself to the binding table when it DHCP Snooping Commands 4 receives an ACK message from a DHCP server Also when the switch sends out DHCP client packets for itself no filtering takes place However when the switch receives any messages from a DHCP server any packets received from untrusted ports are dropped Example This example enables DHCP snooping globally for the switch Console config ip dhcp snooping Console config Related Commands ip dhcp snooping vlan 4 233 ip dhcp snooping trust 4 234 ip dhcp snooping vian This command enables DHCP snooping on the specified VLAN Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax no ip dhcp snooping vlan vian id vlan id ID of a configured VLAN Range 1 4094 Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage When DHCP snooping enabled globally using the ip dhcp snooping command page 4 231 and enabled on a VLAN with this command DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN as specified by the ip dhcp snooping trust command page 4 234 When the DHCP snooping is globally disabled DHCP snooping can still be configu
350. ivileged Exec Example Console dotlx re authenticate Console dot1x re authentication This command enables periodic re authentication globally for all ports Use the no form to disable re authentication Syntax no dot1x re authentication Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1lx re authentication Console config if dot1x timeout quiet period This command sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Use the no form to reset the default Syntax dot1x timeout quiet period seconds no dot1x timeout quiet period seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 60 seconds 4 84 Authentication Commands 4 Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dotlx timeout quiet period 350 Console config if dot1x timeout re authperiod This command sets the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Syntax dot1x timeout re authperiod seconds no dot1x timeout re authperiod seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 3600 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dotlx timeout re authperiod 300 Console config if dot1x timeout tx period This
351. kets from a client that already includes DHCP Option 82 information The switch can be configured to set the action policy for these packets Either the switch can discard the DHCP information keep the existing information or replace it with the switch s relay information Note DHCP snooping must be enabled on the switch for the DHCP Option 82 information to be inserted into packets 3 188 DHCP Snooping 3 Command Attributes DHCP Snooping Information Option Status Enables or disables DHCP Option 82 information relay DHCP Snooping Information Option Policy Sets the DHCP snooping information option policy for DHCP client packets that include Option 82 information e Replace Overwrites the DHCP client packet information with the switch s relay information Keep Retains the client s DHCP information Drop Discards the Option 82 information in a packet and then floods it to the entire VLAN Web Click DHCP Snooping Information Option Configuration DHCP Snooping Information Option Configuration DHCP Snooping Information Option Status C Enabled DHCP Snooping Information Option Policy Replace Figure 3 116 DHCP Snooping Information Option Configuration CLI This example enables DHCP Snooping Information Option and sets the policy as replace Console config ip dhcp snooping information option 4 235 Console config ip dhcp snooping information policy replace 4 236 Cons
352. keywords to globally disable MVR Use the no form with the group keyword to remove a specific address or range of addresses Or use the no form with the vlan keyword restore the default MVR VLAN Syntax no mvr group ip address count vlan vlan id jp address IP address for an MVR multicast group Range 224 0 1 0 239 255 255 255 count The number of contiguous MVR group addresses Range 1 255 e vlan id MVR VLAN ID Range 1 4094 Default Setting e MVR is disabled e No MVR group address is defined The default number of contiguous addresses is 0 e MVR VLAN ID is 1 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Use the mvr group command to statically configure all multicast group addresses that will join the MVR VLAN Any multicast data associated an MVR group is sent from all source ports and to all receiver ports that have registered to receive data from that multicast group The IP address range from 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 is used for multicast streams MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast address range of 224 0 0 x IGMP snooping must be enabled to a allow a subscriber to dynamically join or leave an MVR group see ip igmp snooping on page 4 202 Note that only IGMP version 2 or 3 hosts can issue multicast join or leave messages Example The following example enables MVR globally and configures a range of MVR group addresses Console config mvr Con
353. l Configuration Example Console config ip http server Console config Related Commands ip http port 4 29 ip http secure server This command enables the secure hypertext transfer protocol HTTPS over the Secure Socket Layer SSL providing secure access i e an encrypted connection to the switch s web interface Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip http secure server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Both HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch However you cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same UDP port e If you enable HTTPS you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your browser https device port_number 4 30 System Management Commands 4 When you start HTTPS the connection is established in this way The client authenticates the server using the server s digital certificate The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data e The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5 x and Netscape Navigator 6 2 or later versions The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS Table 4 13 HTTPS System Support Web Browser Operating S
354. l password super page 4 26 To enter Privileged Exec mode enter the following user names and passwords Username admin Password admin login password CLI session with TigerSwitch 10 100 1000 is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console Username guest Password guest login password CLI session with TigerSwitch 10 100 1000 is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console gt enable Password privileged level password Console 4 6 Entering Commands 4 Configuration Commands Configuration commands are privileged level commands used to modify switch settings These commands modify the running configuration only and are not saved when the switch is rebooted To store the running configuration in non volatile storage use the copy running config startup config command The configuration commands are organized into different modes Global Configuration These commands modify the system level configuration and include commands such as hostname and snmp server community e Access Control List Configuration These commands are used for packet filtering Interface Configuration These commands modify the port configuration such as speed duplex and negotiation e Line Configuration These commands modify the console port and Telnet configuration and include command such as parity and databits e VLAN Configuration Includes the command to create VLAN groups To ente
355. l to the console port complete the following steps 1 Connect the console cable to the serial port on a terminal or a PC running terminal emulation software and tighten the captive retaining screws on the RS 232 connector 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RS 232 serial port on the switch 3 Make sure the terminal emulation software is set as follows e Select the appropriate serial port COM port 1 or COM port 2 e Set the baud rate to 9600 bps e Set the data format to 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity e Set flow control to none e Set the emulation mode to VT100 e When using HyperTerminal select Terminal keys not Windows keys Notes 1 Refer to Line Commands on page 4 10 for a complete description of console configuration options 2 Once you have set up the terminal correctly the console login screen will be displayed For a description of how to use the CLI see Using the Command Line Interface on page 4 1 For a list of all the CLI commands and detailed information on using the CLI refer to Command Groups on page 4 9 Basic Configuration 2 Remote Connections Prior to accessing the switch s onboard agent via a network connection you must first configure it with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway using a console connection DHCP or BOOTP protocol The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default To manually configure this address or enable
356. lay INACTIVE if MVR is globally disabled Members Shows the interfaces with subscribers for multicast services provided through the MVR VLAN Also shows if an interface has dynamically joined a multicast group d or if a multicast group has been statically bound to the interface s 4 222 IP Interface Commands 4 IP Interface Commands An IP addresses may be used for management access to the switch over your network The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server when it is powered on You may also need to a establish a default gateway between this device and management stations or other devices that exist on another network segment Table 4 76 IP Interface Commands Command Function Mode Page ip address Sets the IP address for the current interface IC 4 223 ip default gateway Defines the default gateway through which this switch can reach GC 4 224 other subnetworks ip dhcp restart Submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request PE 4 225 show ip interface Displays the IP settings for this device PE 4 225 show ip redirects Displays the default gateway configured for this device PE 4 226 ping Sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the NE 4 226 network PE ip address This command sets the IP address for the currently selected VLAN interface Use th
357. laying the device name location and contact information Field Attributes System Name Name assigned to the switch system Object ID MIB II object ID for switch s network management subsystem Location Specifies the system location Contact Administrator responsible for the system System Up Time Length of time the management agent has been up These additional parameters are displayed for the CLI MAC Address The physical layer address for this switch Web server Shows if management access via HTTP is enabled Web server port Shows the TCP port number used by the web interface Web secure server Shows if management access via HTTPS is enabled Web secure server port Shows the TCP port used by the HTTPS interface Telnet server Shows if management access via Telnet is enabled Telnet port Shows the TCP port used by the Telnet interface Jumbo Frame Shows if jumbo frames are enabled POST result Shows results of the power on self test Web Click System System Information Specify the system name location and contact information for the system administrator then click Apply This page also includes a Telnet button that allows access to the Command Line Interface via Telnet I lt gt Apply Revert Help a Home fad a System TigerSwitch 10 100 1000 26 50 PORT MANAGED SWITCH SNTP f SNMP Manager Security G Port System Name Address Table Object
358. lays 4 140 current entries clears the table or sets the aging time Spanning Tree Configures Spanning Tree settings for the switch 4 144 VLANs Configures VLAN settings and defines port membership for VLAN 4 163 groups also enables or configures private VLANs and protocol VLANs Class of Service Sets port priority for untagged frames selects strict priority or weighted 4 184 round robin relative weight for each priority queue also sets priority for TCP UDP traffic types and DSCP Quality of Service Configures Differentiated Services 4 197 Multicast Filtering Configures IGMP multicast filtering query parameters specifies ports 4 201 attached to a multicast router and enables multicast VLAN registration IP Interface Configures IP address for the switch 4 223 DHCP Snooping Configures DHCP snooping 4 231 IP Source Guard Configures IP source guard security 4 227 IP Cluster Configures switch clustering 4 237 4 Command Line Interface The access mode shown in the following tables is indicated by these abbreviations ACL Access Control List Configuration CM Class Map Configuration NE Normal Exec GC Global Configuration IC Interface Configuration LC Line Configuration PE Privileged Exec Line Commands MST Multiple Spanning Tree PM Policy Map Configuration vc VLAN Database Configuration You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100 co
359. le Ifthe BOOTP or DHCP server has been moved to a different domain the network portion of the address provided to the client will be based on this new domain Example In the following example the device is reassigned the same address Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address dhcp Console config if end Console ip dhcp restart Console show ip interface IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode DHCP Console Related Commands ip address 4 223 show ip interface This command displays the settings of an IP interface Default Setting All interfaces Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip interface IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode User specified Console Related Commands show ip redirects 4 226 4 225 4 Command Line Interface show ip redirects This command shows the default gateway configured for this device Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip redirects IP default gateway 10 1 0 254 Console Related Commands ip default gateway 4 224 ping This command sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network Syntax ping host size size count count host IP address or IP alias of the host size Number of bytes in a packet Range 32 512 default 32 The actual packet size
360. le 4 8 Table 4 9 Table 4 10 Table 4 11 Table 4 12 Table 4 13 Table 4 14 Table 4 15 Table 4 16 Table 4 17 Table 4 18 Table 4 19 Table 4 20 Table 4 21 Table 4 22 Table 4 23 Table 4 24 Table 4 25 Table 4 26 Key Features System Defaults Configuration Options Main Menu Logging Levels Supported Notification Messages HTTPS System Support 802 1X Statistics LACP Port Counters LACP Internal Configuration Information LACP Neighbor Configuration Information Port Statistics Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues CoS Priority Levels Mapping IP Precedence Mapping DSCP Priority Values Command Modes Configuration Modes Command Line Processing Command Groups Line Commands General Commands System Management Commands Device Designation Commands User Access Commands Default Login Settings IP Filter Commands Web Server Commands HTTPS System Support Telnet Server Commands SSH Commands show ssh display description Event Logging Commands Logging Levels show logging flash ram display description show logging trap display description SMTP Alert Commands Time Commands System Status Commands Frame Size Commands Flash File Commands File Directory Information 1 1 1 6 3 3 3 4 3 26 3 41 3 52 3 66 3 86 3 88 3 90 3 95 3 145 3 146 3 150 3 152 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 19 4 24 4 24 4 25 4 26 4 27 4 29 4 31 4 32 4 33 4 40 4 43 4 44 4 47 4 48 4 49 4 53 4 57 4 63 4 64 4 68
361. les are included in ACL and you attempt to bind the ACL to an interface for egress checking the bind operation will fail The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows 1 User defined rules in the Egress IP ACL for egress ports 2 User defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports 3 67 3 Configuring the Switch 3 Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports 4 If no explicit rule is matched the implicit default is permit all Setting the ACL Name and Type Use the ACL Configuration page to designate the name and type of an ACL Command Attributes e Name Name of the ACL Maximum length 15 characters Type There are three filtering modes Standard IP ACL mode that filters packets based on the source IP address Extended IP ACL mode that filters packets based on source or destination IP address as well as protocol type and protocol port number MAC MAC ACL mode that filters packets based on the source or destination MAC address and the Ethernet frame type RFC 1060 Web Select Security ACL Configuration Enter an ACL name in the Name field select the list type IP Standard IP Extended or MAC and click Add to open the configuration page for the new list ACL Configuration Type Name Remove Edit Name Type Standard Ad Figure 3 43 Selecting ACL Type CLI This example creates a standard IP ACL named david C
362. lick IGMP Snooping Static Multicast Router Port Configuration Specify the interfaces attached to a multicast router indicate the VLAN which will forward all the corresponding multicast traffic and then click Add After you have finished adding interfaces to the list click Apply Static Multicast Router Port Configuration Current Viant Unit Portl1 New Interface Port VLAN ID 1__ Trunk Figure 3 100 Static Multicast Router Port Configuration CLI This example configures port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1 11 4 209 Console config exit Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 4 210 VLAN M cast Router Port Type 1 Eth 1 11 Static Console Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services You can display the port members associated with a specified VLAN and multicast service Command Attributes VLAN ID Selects the VLAN for which to display port members Multicast IP Address The IP address for a specific multicast service Multicast Group Port List Shows the interfaces that have already been assigned to the selected VLAN to propagate a specific multicast service 3 167 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click IGMP Snooping IP Multicast Registration Table Select a VLAN ID and the IP address for a multicast service from the scroll down lists The switch will display all the inter
363. ll be sent to the remote server Range 0 7 Default 6 Host IP List Displays the list of remote server IP addresses that receive the syslog messages The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five 3 27 3 Configuring the Switch Host IP Address Specifies a new server IP address to add to the Host IP List Web Click System Log Remote Logs To add an IP address to the Host IP List type the new IP address in the Host IP Address box and then click Add To delete an IP address click the entry in the Host IP List and then click Remove Current Remote Logs Host IP Address 4 38 Fare New Figure 3 18 Remote Logs CLI Enter the syslog server host IP address choose the facility type and set the logging trap Console co Syslog log REMOTELOG REMOTELOG REMOTELOG REMOTELOG REMOTELOG REMOTELOG REMOTELOG REMOTELOG Console Console config logging host 192 168 1 15 nfig logging facility 23 ging status facility type level type server server server server server ip ip ip ip ip address address address address address Console config logging trap 4 Console config end Console show logging trap Enabled Enabled local use 7 Warning conditions 168 1 15 0 192 0 0 0 0 0 ooo 0 0 0 0 0 s0 0 4 45 4 45 4 46 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol i
364. llo time 1 The maximum value is the lower of 40 or 2 x forward time 1 Default Setting 20 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network Example Console config spanning tree max age 40 Console config Related Commands spanning tree forward time 4 146 spanning tree hello time 4 147 spanning tree priority This command configures the spanning tree priority globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree priority priority no spanning tree priority priority Priority of the bridge Range 0 65535 Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 4 148 Spanning Tree Commands 4 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest prio
365. logy changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result e Transmission limit The minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive RSTP MSTP BPDUs Path Cost Method The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned to each interface Web Click Spanning Tree STA Information STA Information Spanning Tree Spanning Tree State Disabled Designated Root 32768 123412341234 Bridge ID 32768 123412341234 Root Port 0 Max Age 20 Root Path Cost 0 Hello Time Z Configuration Changes 0 Forward Delay 15 Last Topology Change 0 d 5 h 10 min 2 s Figure 3 64 Displaying Spanning Tree Information 3 106 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 CLI This command displays global STA settings followed by settings for each port Console show spanning tree 4 160 Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode RSTP Spanning tree enabled disabled enabled Priority 32768 Bridge Hello Time sec 2 Bridge Max Age sec 20 Bridge Forward Delay sec 5 Root Hello Time sec 2 Root Max Age sec 20 Root Forward Delay sec 5 Designated Root 32768 0012CFOBOD00 Current root port 0 Current root cost 0 Number of topology changes Last top
366. lticast routing is not supported on other switches in your network you can use IGMP Snooping and Query page 3 163 to monitor IGMP service requests passing between multicast clients and servers and dynamically configure the switch ports which need to forward multicast traffic Static IGMP Router Interface If IGMP snooping cannot locate the IGMP querier you can manually designate a known IGMP querier i e a multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface on your switch page 3 166 This interface will then join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router switch to ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all appropriate interfaces within the switch Static IGMP Host Interface For multicast applications that you need to control more carefully you can manually assign a multicast service to specific interfaces on the switch page 3 168 3 162 Multicast Filtering 3 Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters You can configure the switch to forward multicast traffic intelligently Based on the IGMP query and report messages the switch forwards traffic only to the ports that request multicast traffic This prevents the switch from broadcasting the traffic to all ports and possibly disrupting network performance Command Usage IGMP Snooping This switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query and Report packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast host
367. ly used to configure these devices for proper operation in a network environment as well as to monitor them to evaluate performance or detect potential problems The switch includes an onboard SNMP agent that continuously monitors the status of its hardware as well as the traffic passing through its ports A network management station can access this information using software such as HP OpenView Access rights to the onboard agent are controlled by community strings To communicate with the switch the management station must first submit a valid community string for authentication The options for configuring community strings trap functions and restricting access to clients with specified IP addresses are described in the following sections Setting Community Access Strings You may configure up to five community strings authorized for management access All community strings used for IP Trap Managers should be listed in this table For security reasons you should consider removing the default strings Command Attributes SNMP Community Capability Indicates that the switch supports up to five community strings Community String A community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol Default strings public read only private read write Range 1 32 characters case sensitive Access Mode Read Only Specifies read only access Authorized management stations are only able t
368. m This command displays system information Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage For a description of the items shown by this command refer to Displaying System Information on page 3 10 The POST results should all display PASS If any POST test indicates FAIL contact your distributor for assistance Example Console show system System Description TigerSwitch 10 100 1000 26 50 PORT MANAGED SWITCH System OID String 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 68 System Information System Up Time 0 days 0 hours 1 minutes and 32 18 seconds System Name NONE System Location NONE System Contact NONE MAC Address Unit1 00 00 35 28 10 03 Web Server Enabled Web Server Port 80 Web Secure Server Enabled Web Secure Server Port 443 Telnet Server Enable Telnet Server Port 23 Jumbo Frame Disabled POST Result DUMMY Test I cee ere cst sersceters eras PASS UART Loopback Test PASS DRAM TOSE chee Sahai ad fe Nis khara PASS Titer LSSity ory dereeessawieadeese ar beder ace PASS Switch Int Loopback Test PASS Done All Pass Console show users Shows all active console and Telnet sessions including user name idle time and IP address of Telnet client Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 61 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage The session used to execute this command is indicated
369. m to remove a recipient Syntax no logging sendmail destination email email address email address The source email address used in alert messages Range 1 41 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You can specify up to five recipients for alert messages However you must enter a separate command to specify each recipient Example Console config logging sendmail destination email ted this company com Console config 4 51 4 Command Line Interface logging sendmail This command enables SMTP event handling Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no logging sendmail Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config logging sendmail Console config show logging sendmail This command displays the settings for the SMTP event handler Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show logging sendmail SMTP servers 1 192 168 1 200 SMTP minimum severity level 4 SMTP destination email addresses 1 geoff acme com SMTP source email address john acme com SMTP status Enabled Console 4 52 System Management Commands 4 Time Commands The system clock can be dynamically set by polling a set of specified time servers NTP or SNTP Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for
370. main regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network The switch supports tagged VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard Members of VLAN groups can be dynamically learned via GVRP or ports can be manually assigned to a specific set of VLANs This allows the switch to restrict traffic to the VLAN groups to which a user has been assigned By segmenting your network into VLANs you can Eliminate broadcast storms which severely degrade performance in a flat network e Simplify network management for node changes moves by remotely configuring VLAN membership for any port rather than having to manually change the network connection e Provide data security by restricting all traffic to the originating VLAN e Use private VLANs to restrict traffic to pass only between data ports and the uplink ports thereby isolating adjacent ports within the same VLAN and allowing you to limit the total number of VLANs that need to be configured Use protocol VLANs to restrict traffic to specified interfaces based on protocol type Traffic Prioritization This switch prioritizes each packet based on the required level of service using four priority queues with strict or Weighted Round Robin Queuing It uses IEEE 802 1p and 802 1Q tags to prioritize incoming traffic based on input from the end station application These functions can be used to provide independent priorities for delay sensitive data and best effort data This sw
371. mand Attributes Authentication Select the authentication or authentication sequence required Local User authentication is performed only locally by the switch Radius User authentication is performed using a RADIUS server only TACACS User authentication is performed using a TACACS server only authentication sequence User authentication is performed by up to three authentication methods in the indicated sequence e RADIUS Settings Global Provides globally applicable RADIUS settings Serverlndex Specifies one of five RADIUS servers that may be configured The switch attempts authentication using the listed sequence of servers The process ends when a server either approves or denies access to a user Server Port Number Network UDP port of authentication server used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default 1812 Secret Text String Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Number of Server Transmits Number of times the switch tries to authenticate logon access via the authentication server Range 1 30 Default 2 Timeout for a reply The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply from the RADIUS server before it resends the request Range 1 65535 Default 5 TACACS Settings Server IP Address Address of the TACACS server Default 10 11 12 13 Server
372. mand keyword To enter multiple commands enter each command in the required order For example to enable Privileged Exec command mode and display the startup configuration enter Console gt enable Console show startup config To enter commands that require parameters enter the required parameters after the command keyword For example to set a password for the administrator enter Console config username admin password 0 smith Minimum Abbreviation The CLI will accept a minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a command For example the command configure can be entered as con If an entry is ambiguous the system will prompt for further input Command Completion If you terminate input with a Tab key the CLI will print the remaining characters of a partial keyword up to the point of ambiguity In the logging history example typing log followed by a tab will result in printing the command up to logging Getting Help on Commands You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help command You can also display command syntax by using the character to list keywords or parameters 4 Command Line Interface Showing Commands If you enter a at the command prompt the system will display the first level of keywords for the current command class Normal Exec or Privileged Exec or configuration class Global ACL Interface Line or VLAN Database You can
373. mation LACP System Priority LACP system priority assigned to this port channel LACP Port Priority LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group Admin State Administrative or operational values of the actor s state parameters Oper State Expired The actor s receive machine is in the expired state Defaulted The actor s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner information administratively configured for the partner Distributing If false distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled i e distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Collecting Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled i e collection is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Synchronization The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC i e it has been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator and the identity of the Link Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted Aggregation The system considers this link to be aggregatable i e a potential candidate for aggregation Long timeout Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission ra
374. me lt private key file name gt Private password lt password for private key gt Note The switch must be reset for the new certificate to be activated To reset the switch type console reload 3 53 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring the Secure Shell The Berkley standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix systems Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows and other environments These tools including commands such as rlogin remote login rsh remote shell and rcp remote copy are not secure from hostile attacks The Secure Shell SSH includes server client applications intended as a secure replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools SSH can also provide remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet When the client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol the switch generates a public key that the client uses along with a local user name and password for access authentication SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and SSH enabled management station clients and ensures that data traveling over the network arrives unaltered Note You need to install an SSH client on the management station to access the switch for management via the SSH protocol Note The switch supports both SSH Version 1 5 and 2 0 clients Command Usage The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key auth
375. me e es Group Name Security Model M z Security Level noAuthNoPrv User Authentication Authentication P Mos z Authentication Pa j Data Privacy Beck Add SNMPVv3 Users Edit User Name Matt Group Name e Group Name p pubic E Back Change Figure 3 29 Configuring SNMPv3 Users CLI Use the snmp server user command to configure a new user name and assign it to a group Console config snmp server user chris group r d v3 auth md5 greenpeacepriv des56 einstien 4 113 Console config exit Console show snmp user 4 113 EngineId 83010000030000352810030000 User Name chris Authentication Protocol md5Privacy Protocol des56 Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console 3 39 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a unique name Users must be configured with a specific security level and assigned to a group The SNMPv3 group restricts users to a specific read write and notify view To send inform messages to an SNMPv3 user on a remote device you must first specify the engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where the user resides The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host Command Attributes e User Name The name of user connecting to the SNMP agent Range 1 32 characters Group N
376. memory Use the show logging command to display the current settings Console config logging on 4 43 Console config logging history ram 0 4 44 Console config end Console show logging flash 4 47 Syslog logging Enabled History logging in FLASH level emergencies Console Remote Log Configuration The Remote Logs page allows you to configure the logging of messages that are sent to syslog servers or other management stations You can also limit the error messages sent to only those messages below a specified level Command Attributes Remote Log Status Enables disables the logging of debug or error messages to the remote logging process Default Enabled e Logging Facility Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages There are eight facility types specified by values of 16 to 23 The facility type is used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service The attribute specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages See RFC 3164 This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch However it may be used by the syslog server to process messages such as sorting or storing messages in the corresponding database Range 16 23 Default 23 Logging Trap Limits log messages that are sent to the remote syslog server for all levels up to the specified level For example if level 3 is specified all messages from level 0 to level 3 wi
377. ministrative or operational values of the actor s state parameters Oper State Expired The actor s receive machine is in the expired state Defaulted The actor s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner information administratively configured for the partner Distributing If false distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled i e distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Collecting Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled i e collection is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Synchronization The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC i e it has been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator and the identity of the Link Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted Aggregation The system considers this link to be aggregatable i e a potential candidate for aggregation Long timeout Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate LACP Activity Activity control value with regard to this link 0 Passive 1 Active Console show la Port channel 1 Partner Admin Partner Oper Partner Admin Partner Oper Port Admin Pr
378. mmand Attributes IGMP Filter Enables IGMP filtering and throttling globally for the switch Default Disabled IGMP Profile Creates IGMP profile numbers Range 1 4294967295 Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Filter Configuration Create a profile number by entering the number in text box and clicking Add Enable the IGMP filter status then click Apply IGMP Filter Status IGMP Filter H Enabled IGMP Profile Configuration Current New 19 4 IGMP Profile 1 4294967295 Figure 3 103 Enabling IGMP Filtering and Throttling CLI This example enables IGMP filtering and creates a profile number then displays the current status and the existing profile numbers Console config ip igmp filter 4 221 Console config ip igmp profile 19 4 222 Console config igmp profile end Console show ip igmp filter 4 225 IGMP filter enable Console show ip igmp profile 4 226 IGMP Profile 19 IGMP Profile 50 Console 3 170 Multicast Filtering 3 Configuring IGMP Filtering and Throttling for Interfaces Once you have configured IGMP profiles you can then assign them to interfaces on the switch Also you can set the IGMP throttling number to limit the number of multicast groups an interface can join at the same time Command Usage Only one profile can be assigned to an interface An IGMP profile or throttling setting can be applied to a trunk interface When ports are configure
379. mmand displays the weighted round robin WRR bandwidth allocation for the four priority queues Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 188 Priority Commands 4 Example Console show queue bandwidth Queue ID Weight Console show queue cos map This command shows the class of service priority map Syntax show queue cos map interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 26 50 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 Information of Eth 1 1 Traffic Class 012 3 Priority Queue 1001 Console 5 7 2 a W A 4 2 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 Table 4 64 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 Command Function Mode Page map ip dscp Enables IP DSCP class of service mapping GC 4 189 map ip dscp Maps IP DSCP value to a class of service IC 4 190 show map ip dscp Shows the IP DSCP map PE 4 191 map ip dscp Global Configuration This command enables IP DSCP mapping i e Differentiated Services Code Point mapping Use the no form to disable IP DSCP mapping 4 189 4 Command Line Interface Syntax no map ip dscp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP DSCP and default switchport pri
380. mmands on page 4 33 unit Keyword that allows you to copy to from a unit Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The system prompts for data required to complete the copy command The destination file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ Due to the size limit of the flash memory the switch supports only two operation code files The maximum number of user defined configuration files depends on available memory You can use Factory_Default_Config cfg as the source to copy from the factory default configuration file but you cannot use it as the destination To replace the startup configuration you must use startup config as the destination Use the copy file unit command to copy a local file to another switch in the stack Use the copy unit file command to copy a file from another switch in the stack The Boot ROM and Loader cannot be uploaded or downloaded from the TFTP server You must follow the instructions in the release notes for new firmware or contact your distributor for help For information on specifying an https certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 53 For information on configuring the switch to
381. mpatible device to the server s serial port These commands are used to set communication parameters for the serial port or Telnet i e a virtual terminal Table 4 5 Line Commands Command Function Mode Page line Identifies a specific line for configuration and starts the line GC 4 11 configuration mode login Enables password checking at login LC 4 11 password Specifies a password on a line LC 4 12 timeout login Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the LC 4 13 response CLI exec timeout Sets the interval that the command interpreter waits until user LC 4 13 input is detected password thresh Sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number LC 4 14 of failed logon attempts silent time Sets the amount of time the management console is LC 4 15 inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password thresh command databits Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted LC 4 15 and generated by hardware parity Defines the generation of a parity bit LC 4 16 speed Sets the terminal baud rate LC 4 17 stopbits Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte LC 4 17 disconnect Terminates a line connection PE 4 18 show line Displays a terminal line s parameters NE PE 4 18 These commands only apply to the serial port 4 10 Line Commands 4 line This c
382. mpt threshold is reached the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time before allowing the next logon attempt Use the silent time command to set this interval When this threshold is reached for Telnet the Telnet logon interface shuts down This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections Example To set the password threshold to five attempts enter this command Console config line password thresh 5 Console config line Related Commands silent time 4 15 timeout login response 4 13 silent time This command sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password thresh command Use the no form to remove the silent time value Syntax silent time seconds no silent time seconds The number of seconds to disable console response Range 0 65535 0 no silent time Default Setting The default value is no silent time Command Mode Line Configuration Example To set the silent time to 60 seconds enter this command Console config line silent time 60 Console config line Related Commands password thresh 4 14 databits This command sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and generated by the console port Use the no form to restore the default value 4 15 4 Command Line Interface Syntax databits 7 8 no databi
383. multicast groups This switch does not support GMRP it uses the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP to provide automatic multicast filtering Web Click System Bridge Extension Configuration Bridge Extension Configuration Bridge Capability Extended Multicast Filtering Services No Traffic Classes Enabled Static Entry Individual Port Yes VLAN Learning IVL Configurable PVID Tagging Yes Local VLAN Capable No Enabled Figure 3 5 Bridge Extension Configuration 3 13 3 Configuring the Switch CLI Enter the following command Console show bridge ext 4 164 Max support VLAN numbers 256 Max support VLAN ID 4094 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning IVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic classes Enabled Global GVRP status Disabled GMRP Disabled Console Setting the Switch s IP Address This section describes how to configure an IP interface for management access over the network The IP address for the stack is obtained via DHCP by default To manually configure an address you need to change the switch s default settings IP address 192 168 1 1 and netmask 255 255 255 0 to values that are compatible with your network You may also need to a establish a default gateway between the stack and management stations that exist on another network segment You can manually configure a specific IP ad
384. must be an untagged member of the SPVLAN Then the outer SPVLAN tag will be stripped when the packets are sent out Another reason is that it causes non customer packets to be forwarded to the SPVLAN Static trunk port groups are compatible with QinQ tunnel ports as long as the QinQ configuration is consistent within a trunk port group The native VLAN VLAN 1 is not normally added to transmitted frames Avoiding using VLAN 1 as an SPVLAN tag for customer traffic to reduce the risk of misconfiguration Instead use VLAN 1 as a management VLAN instead of a data VLAN in the service provider network There are some inherent incompatibilities between Layer 2 and Layer 3 switching Tunnel ports do not support IP Access Control Lists Layer 3 Quality of Service QoS and other QoS features containing Layer 3 information are not supported on tunnel ports Spanning tree bridge protocol data unit BPDU filtering is automatically disabled on a tunnel port General Configuration Guidelines for QinQ 1 2 6 T Configure the switch to QinQ mode see Enabling QinQ Tunneling on the Switch on page 3 137 Create a Service Provider VLAN also referred to as an SPVLAN see Creating VLANs on page 3 128 Configure the QinQ tunnel access port to 802 1Q Tunnel mode see Adding an Interface to a QinQ Tunnel on page 3 138 Set the Tag Protocol Identifier TPID value of the tunnel port This step is required if the
385. n Console quit Press ENTER to start session User Access Verification Username 4 23 4 Command Line Interface System Management Commands These commands are used to control system logs passwords user names browser configuration options and display or configure a variety of other system information Table 4 7 System Management Commands Command Group Function Page Device Designation Configures information that uniquely identifies this switch 4 24 User Access Configures the basic user names and passwords for management access 4 25 IP Filter Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access 4 27 Web Server Enables management access via a web browser 4 29 Telnet Server Enables management access via Telnet 4 32 Secure Shell Provides secure replacement for Telnet 4 33 Event Logging Controls logging of error messages 4 43 Time System Clock Sets the system clock automatically via NTP SNTP server or manually 4 53 System Status Displays system configuration active managers and version information 4 57 Frame Size Enables support for jumbo frames 4 63 Device Designation Commands Table 4 8 Device Designation Commands Command Function Mode Page prompt Customizes the prompt used in PE and NE mode GC 4 24 hostname Specifies the host name for the switch GC 4 25 snmp server contact Sets the system contact string GC 4 103 snmp server location Sets the system lo
386. n MVR Non MVR Non MVR Non MVR Port Information Up Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Port Type Oper Status MVR Status Immediate Leave Trunk Member Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 3 107 MVR Port Information CLI This example shows information about interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN Port eth1 1 eth1 2 Console Type SOURCE Console show mvr interface Status Immediate Leave ACTIVE UP RECEIVER ACTIVE UP Disable Disable 4 221 3 177 3 Configuring the Switch Displaying Port Members of Multicast Groups You can display the multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN either through IGMP snooping or static configuration Field Attributes e Group IP Multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN Group Port List Shows the interfaces with subscribers for multicast services provided through the MVR VLAN Web Click MVR Group IP Information MVR Group IP Table Group IP none x Group Port List none Figure 3 108 MVR Group IP Information CLI This example following shows information about the interfaces associated with multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN Console show mvr interface 4 221 MVR Group IP Status embers 2
387. n be enabled or disabled for individual interfaces Command Attributes e Port Trunk Displays the port trunk number e Input Output Rate Limit Status Enables or disables the rate limit Default Enabled Input Output Rate Limit Sets the rate limit level Web Click Port Rate Limit Input Output Port Trunk Configuration Enable the Rate Limit Status for the required interfaces set the Rate Limit Level and click Apply Input Rate Limit Port Configuration Port Input Rate Limit Status Input Rate Limit Mbps Trunk 1 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled WO AN DBD HN HR Win Figure 3 59 Input Rate Limit Port Configuration 3 94 Port Configuration 3 CLI This example sets the rate limit level for input traffic passing through port 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 4 116 Console config if rate limit input 500 4 129 Console config if Showing Port Statistics You can display standard statistics on network traffic from the Interfaces Group and Ethernet like MIBs as well as a detailed breakdown of traffic based on the RMON MIB Interfaces and Ethernet like statistics display errors on the traffic passing through each port This information can be used to identify potential problems with the switch such as a faulty port or unusually heavy loading RMON statistics provide
388. n they become Members and are used for communication between Member switches and the Commander Command Attributes e Cluster Status Enables or disables clustering on the switch Cluster Commander Enables or disables the switch as a cluster Commander e Role Indicates the current role of the switch in the cluster either Commander Member or Candidate Cluster IP Pool An internal IP address pool that is used to assign IP addresses to Member switches in the cluster Internal cluster IP addresses are in the form 10 x x member ID Only the base IP address of the pool needs to be set since Member IDs can only be between 1 and 16 Note that you cannot change the cluster IP pool when the switch is currently in Commander mode Commander mode must first be disabled Number of Members The current number of Member switches in the cluster Number of Candidates The current number of Candidate switches discovered in the network that are available to become Members 3 195 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Cluster Configuration Cluster Configuration Cluster Status M Enabled Cluster Commander F Enabled Role Commander Cluster IP Pool 10 254 254 1 Number of Members 1 Number of Candidates 2 Figure 3 123 Cluster Configuration CLI This example first enables clustering on the switch sets the switch as the cluster Commander and then configures the cluster IP pool Console conf
389. nabled box and click Apply 802 1Q Tunnel Configuration 802 1Q Tunnel Status Enabled 802 1Q Ethernet Type 8100 8000 FFFF hexadecimal value Figure 3 78 802 1Q Tunnel Status 3 137 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example sets the switch to operate in QinQ mode Console config dotlq tunnel system tunnel control 52 14 Console config exit Console show dotlq tunnel 52 16 Current double tagged status of the system is Enabled The dotlq tunnel mode of the set interface 1 1 is Access mode TPID is 0x8100 The dotlq tunnel mode of the set interface 1 2 is Uplink mode TPID is 0x8100 The dotlig tunnel mode of the set interface 1 3 is Normal mode TPID is 0x8100 The dotlig tunnel mode of the set interface 1 4 is Normal mode TPID is 0x8100 The dotlq tunnel mode of the set interface 1 5 is Normal mode TPID is 0x8100 The dotlq tunnel mode of the set interface 1 24 is Normal mode TPID is 0x8100 Console Adding an Interface to a QinQ Tunnel Follow the guidelines in the preceding section to set up a QinQ tunnel on the switch Use the VLAN Port Configuration or VLAN Trunk Configuration screen to set the access port on the edge switch to 802 1Q Tunnel mode Also set the Tag Protocol Identifier TPID value of the tunnel port if the attached client is using a nonstandard 2 byte ethertype to identify 802 1Q tagged frames Command Usage e Use the 802 1Q Tunnel Status
390. names specify one or more name servers to use to use for address ri esolution enable domain lookup status and click Apply General Configuration Domain Lookup Status O Enabled Default Domain Name Sample com Domain Name List Current New Domain Name Current New 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 Name Server IP Figure 3 111 DNS General Configuration 14 Do not include the initial dot that separates the host name from the domain name 3 182 Configuring Domain Name Service 3 CLI This example sets a default domain name and a domain list However remember that if a domain list is specified the default domain name is not used Console config ip domain name sample com 4 234 Console config ip domain list sample com uk 4 235 Console config ip domain list sample com jp Console config ip name server 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 4 236 Console config ip domain lookup 4 236 Console show dns 4 238 Domain Lookup Status DNS enabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List Sample com uk Ssample com jp Name Server List 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 Console Configuring Static DNS Host to Address Entries You can manually configure static entries in the DNS table that are used to map domain names to IP addresses Command Usage Static entries may be used for local devices connected directly to the attached network or for commonly used resources located
391. nd POP3 110 Command Attributes IP Port Priority Status Enables or disables the IP port priority IP Port Priority Table Shows the IP port to CoS map IP Port Number TCP UDP Set a new IP port number e Class of Service Value Sets a CoS value for a new IP port Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority Web Click Priority IP Port Priority Status Set IP Port Priority Status to Enabled IP Port Priority Status IP Port Priority Global Status I Enabled Figure 3 92 IP Port Priority Status 3 153 3 Configuring the Switch Click Priority IP Port Priority Enter the port number for a network application in the IP Port Number box and the new CoS value in the Class of Service box and then click Apply IP Port Priority none IP Port Priority Table Port Number TCP UDP Class of Service Value 0 7 Remove IP Port Figure 3 93 IP Port Priority CLI The following example globally enables IP Port Priority service on the switch maps HTTP traffic on port 5 to CoS value 0 and then displays all the IP Port Priority settings for that port Console config map ip port 4 204 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip port 80 cos 0 4 205 Console config if end 4 205 Console show map ip port ethernet 1 5 TCP port mapping status disabled Port Port no COS Eth 1 5 80 0 Console Note Mappin
392. nfig if end Console show ip source guard 4 230 Interface Filter type Eth 1 1 DISABLED Eth 1 2 DISABLED Eth 1 3 DISABLED Eth 1 4 DISABLED Eth 1 5 SIP Eth 1 6 DISABLED Static IP Source Guard Binding Configuration Adds a static addresses to the source guard binding table Table entries include a MAC address IP address lease time entry type Static Dynamic VLAN identifier and port identifier All static entries are configured with an infinite lease time which is indicated with a value of zero in the table 3 192 IP Source Guard 3 Command Attributes Static Binding Table Counts The total number of static entries in the table e Port Switch port number Range 1 26 50 VLAN ID ID of a configured VLAN Range 1 4094 MAC Address A valid unicast MAC address IP Address A valid unicast IP address including classful types A B or C Web Click IP Source Guard Static Configuration Static IP Source Guard Binding Configuration Static Binding Table Counts l J VLAN 1 00 12 34 56 78 9A Unit 1 Port 9 192 168 1 35 IPv4 Lease Time 0 Seconds Current Static Binding Table Port 1 VLAN ID h w MAC i Address IP Address Figure 3 120 Static IP Source Guard Binding Configuration CLI This example shows how to configure a static source guard binding on port 5 Console config ip source guard binding 11 22 33 44 55 66
393. nfiguration Example To specify port 24 enter the following command Console config interface ethernet 1 24 Console config if description This command adds a description to an interface Use the no form to remove the description Syntax description string no description string Comment or a description to help you remember what is attached to this interface Range 1 64 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example The following example adds a description to port 24 Console config interface ethernet 1 24 Console config if description RD SW 3 Console config if speed duplex This command configures the speed and duplex mode of a given interface when autonegotiation is disabled Use the no form to restore the default Syntax speed duplex 1000full 100full 100half 10full 10half no speed duplex e 1000full Forces 1000 Mbps full duplex operation 100full Forces 100 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Forces 100 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Forces 10 Mbps full duplex operation 10half Forces 10 Mbps half duplex operation 4 117 A Command Line Interface Default Setting e Auto negotiation is enabled by default e When auto negotiation is disabled the default speed duplex setting is 100half for 100BASE TX ports and 1000full for Gigabit Ethernet ports Command Mode Interface Configuration Eth
394. nfiguring Class Maps Configuring Policy Maps Service Policy Settings IGMP Configuration IGMP Immediate Leave Displaying Multicast Router Port Information Static Multicast Router Port Configuration IP Multicast Registration Table IGMP Member Port Table Enabling IGMP Filtering and Throttling IGMP Filter and Throttling Port Configuration IGMP Profile Configuration MVR Global Configuration MVR Port Information MVR Group IP Information MVR Port Configuration MVR Group Member Configuration DNS General Configuration DNS Static Host Table DNS Cache DHCP Snooping Configuration DHCP Snooping VLAN Configuration DHCP Snooping Information Option Configuration DHCP Snooping Port Configuration DHCP Snooping Binding Information IP Source Guard Port Configuration Static IP Source Guard Binding Configuration Dynamic IP Source Guard Binding Information Cluster Member Choice Cluster Configuration Cluster Member Configuration Cluster Member Information Cluster Candidate Information Figures 3 148 3 150 3 151 3 152 3 153 3 154 3 157 3 160 3 161 3 164 3 165 3 166 3 167 3 168 3 169 3 170 3 172 3 173 3 176 3 177 3 178 3 180 3 181 3 182 3 184 3 185 3 187 3 188 3 189 3 190 3 191 3 192 3 193 3 194 3 195 3 196 3 197 3 197 3 198 xxi Figures xxii Chapter 1 Introduction This switch provides a broad range of features for Layer 2 switching It includes a management agent that allows you
395. nforms To send an inform to a SNMPv2c host complete these steps 1 Enable the SNMP agent page 4 101 2 Allow the switch to send SNMP traps i e notifications page 4 106 3 Specify the target host that will receive inform messages with the snmp server host command as described in this section 4 Create a view with the required notification messages page 4 109 5 Create a group that includes the required notify view page 4 110 To send an inform to a SNMPv3 host complete these steps 1 Enable the SNMP agent page 4 101 2 Allow the switch to send SNMP traps i e notifications page 4 106 3 Specify the target host that will receive inform messages with the snmp server host command as described in this section 4 Create a view with the required notification messages page 4 109 5 Create a group that includes the required notify view page 4 110 6 Specify a remote engine ID where the user resides page 4 107 7 Then configure a remote user page 4 113 The switch can send SNMP Version 1 2c or 3 notifications to a host IP address depending on the SNMP version that the management station 4 105 4 Command Line Interface supports If the snmp server host command does not specify the SNMP version the default is to send SNMP version 1 notifications e If you specify an SNMP Version 3 host then the community string is interpreted as an SNMP user name If you use the V3 auth or priv options
396. ng Tree State F Enabled Spanning Tree Type RSTP Priority 0 61440 in steps of 40961 32768 When the Switch Becomes Root Input Format 2 hello time 1 lt max age lt 2 Hello Time 1 10 fe seconds Maximum Age 6 40 fzo seconds Forward Delay 4 30 fis seconds forward delay 1 RSTP Configuration Path Cost Method Long Transmission Limit 1 10 3 MSTP Configuration Max Instance Numbers 9 Configuration Digest O0xAC36177F502 Region Revision 0 65535 821D8AB26DE62 Region Name Max Hop Count 1 40 Figure 3 65 Configuring Spanning Tree ble CLI This example enables Spanning Tree Protocol sets the mode to RSTP and then configures the STA and RSTP parameters Console config spanning tree Console config spanning tree Console config spanning tree Console config spanning tree Console config spanning tree Console config spanning tree Console config spanning tree Console config spanning tree Console config mode rstp priority 45056 hello time 5 max age 38 forward time 20 pathcost method long transmission limit 4 3 110 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 Displaying Interface Settings The STA Port Information and STA Trunk Information pages display the current status of ports and trunks in the Spanning Tree Field Attributes Spanning Tree Shows if STA has been enabled on this interface STA Status Displays
397. ngs and the operational state for the remote side of an link aggregation Table 3 9 LACP Neighbor Configuration Information Field Description Partner Admin System ID LAG partner s system ID assigned by the user Partner Oper System ID LAG partner s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol Partner Admin Port Number Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner Partner Oper Port Number Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port s protocol partner Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner Oper Key Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner Admin State Administrative values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table Oper State Operational values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table Web Click Port LACP Port Neighbors Information Select a port channel to display the corresponding information LACP Port Neighbors Information 1ga Trunk ID 1 D 00 00 00 00 00 Partner Oper Syste D q ARG JE TOKE Figure 3 56 LACP Port Neighbors Information 3 90 Port Configuration 3 CLI The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and op
398. nity strings to specified users and set the access level Basic Configuration 2 The default strings are e public with read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects private with read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects To prevent unauthorized access to the switch from SNMP version 1 or 2c clients it is recommended that you change the default community strings To configure a community string complete the following steps 1 From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type snmp server community string mode where string is the community access string and mode is rw read write or ro read only Press lt Enter gt Note that the default mode is read only 2 To remove an existing string simply type no snmp server community string where string is the community access string to remove Press lt Enter gt Console config snmp server community admin rw 4 102 Console config snmp server community private Console config Note If you do not intend to support access to SNMP version 1 and 2c clients we recommend that you delete both of the default community strings If there are no community strings then SNMP management access from SNMP v1 and v2c clients is disabled Trap Receivers You can also specify SNMP stations that are to receive traps from the s
399. nnect the ports before removing a static trunk via the configuration interface statically configured Command Attributes Member List Current Shows configured trunks Trunk ID Unit Port e New Includes entry fields for creating new trunks Trunk Trunk identifier Range 1 32 Port Port identifier Web Click Port Trunk Membership Enter a trunk ID of 1 32 in the Trunk field select any of the switch ports from the scroll down port list and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply Trunk Membership Member List Current New none Trunk 1 32 Remove Port Sac Figure 3 51 Configuring Static Trunks 3 81 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example creates trunk 2 with ports 1 and 2 Just connect these ports to two static trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk Console config interface port channel 2 4 116 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 116 Console config if channel group 2 4 131 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if channel group 2 Console config if end Console show interfaces status port channel 2 4 123 Information of Trunk 2 Basic information Port type 100TX ac address 00 12 CF 12 34 84 Configuration ame Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities
400. nning tree mst port priority 4 159 spanning tree protocol migration 4 160 show spanning tree 4 160 show spanning tree mst configuration 4 162 VLAN Commands 4 163 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands 4 163 bridge ext gvrp 4 164 show bridge ext 4 164 switchport gvrp 4 165 show gvrp configuration 4 165 garp timer 4 166 show garp timer 4 166 Editing VLAN Groups 4 167 vlan database 4 167 vlan 4 168 Configuring VLAN Interfaces 4 169 interface vlan 4 169 switchport mode 4 170 switchport acceptable frame types 4 171 switchport ingress filtering 4 171 switchport native vlan 4 172 switchport allowed vlan 4 173 switchport forbidden vlan 4 174 Displaying VLAN Information 4 175 show vlan 4 175 Configuring IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling 4 176 dot1q tunnel system tunnel control 4 176 switchport dot1q tunnel mode 4 177 switchport dot1q tunnel tpid 4 178 Related Commands show dot1q tunnel Configuring Private VLANs pvlan show pvlan Configuring Protocol based VLANs protocol vlan protocol group Configuring Groups protocol vlan protocol group Configuring Interfaces show protocol vlan protocol group show interfaces protocol vlan protocol group Priority Commands Priority Commands Layer 2 queue mode switchport priority default queue bandwidth queue cos map show queue mode show queue bandwidth show queue cos map Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 map ip dscp Global Configuration map ip dscp Interface Configuration show map ip dscp Quality of Service
401. nt of an SNMP notification operation GC 4 104 snmp server enable traps Enables the device to send SNMP traps i e SNMP GC 4 106 notifications snmp server engine id Sets the SNMP engine ID GC 4 107 show snmp engine id Shows the SNMP engine ID PE 4 108 snmp server view Adds an SNMP view GC 4 109 show snmp view Shows the SNMP views PE 4 110 snmp server group Adds an SNMP group mapping users to views GC 4 110 show snmp group Shows the SNMP groups PE 4 112 snmp server user Adds a user to an SNMP group GC 4 113 show snmp user Shows the SNMP users PE 4 115 4 100 SNMP Commands 4 snmp server This command enables the SNMPv3 engine and services for all management clients i e versions 1 2c 3 Use the no form to disable the server Syntax no snmp server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server Console config show snmp This command can be used to check the status of SNMP communications Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage This command provides information on the community access strings counter information for SNMP input and output protocol data units and whether or not SNMP logging has been enabled with the snmp server enable traps command 4 101 4 Command Line Interface Example Console show snmp SNMP Agent enabled SNMP traps Authentication enable Link up down enable SN
402. nt to select either DES 56 bit or 3DES 168 bit for data encryption Save Host Key from Memory to Flash Saves the host key from RAM i e volatile memory to flash memory Otherwise the host key pair is stored to RAM by default Note that you must select this item prior to generating the host key pair Generate This button is used to generate the host key pair Note that you must first generate the host key pair before you can enable the SSH server on the SSH Server Settings page Clear This button clears the host key from both volatile memory RAM and non volatile memory Flash 3 57 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Security SSH Host Key Settings Select the host key type from the drop down box select the option to save the host key from memory to flash if required prior to generating the key and then click Generate SSH Host Key Settings Public Kay af Host Mey Wte Figure 3 37 SSH Host Key Settings CLI This example generates a host key pair using both the RSA and DSA algorithms stores the keys to flash memory and then displays the host s public keys Console ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 35 Console ip ssh save host key 4 35 Console show public key host 4 35 Host RSA 1024 65537 127250922544926402131336514546131189679055192360076028653006761 8240 96909474483201025248789659775921 6832222558465238779154647 9807396314033 8692579310510576521224305280786588548578
403. nterface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command prevents a VLAN from being automatically added to the specified interface via GVRP Ifa VLAN has been added to the set of allowed VLANs for an interface then you cannot add it to the set of forbidden VLANs for that same interface Example The following example shows how to prevent port 1 from being added to VLAN 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport forbidden vlan add 3 Console config if 4 174 VLAN Commands 4 Displaying VLAN Information Table 4 57 Show VLAN Commands Command Function Mode Page show vlan Shows VLAN information NE PE 4 175 show interfaces status vian Displays status for the specified VLAN interface NE PE 4 123 show interfaces switchport Displays the administrative and operational status ofan NE PE 4 125 interface show vian This command shows VLAN information Syntax show vlan id vian id name vian name private vlan private vian type e id Keyword to be followed by the VLAN ID vian id ID of the configured VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes name Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name vian name ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters private vilan For an explanation of this command see show vlan private vlan on page 4 184 private vlan type Indicates the private vlan type Options Communit
404. nterface Settings for MSTP Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP VLAN Configuration IEEE 802 1Q VLANs Enabling or Disabling GVRP Global Setting Displaying Basic VLAN Information Displaying Current VLANs Creating VLANs Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index Adding Static Members to VLANs Port Index Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces Configuring IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling Enabling QinQ Tunneling on the Switch Adding an Interface to a QinQ Tunnel Configuring Private VLANs Enabling Private VLANs Configuring Uplink and Downlink Ports Protocol VLANs Contents 3 73 3 74 3 76 3 76 3 78 3 80 3 81 3 82 3 84 3 86 3 88 3 90 3 91 3 93 3 94 3 94 3 95 3 99 3 99 3 100 3 102 3 102 3 105 3 107 3 111 3 114 3 116 3 118 3 120 3 122 3 122 3 125 3 126 3 126 3 128 3 129 3 131 3 132 3 133 3 137 3 138 3 141 3 141 3 142 3 142 Contents Protocol VLAN Group Configuration Configuring Protocol VLAN Interfaces Class of Service Configuration Layer 2 Queue Settings Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues Enabling CoS Selecting the Queue Mode Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes Layer 3 4 Priority Settings Mapping Layer 3 4 Priorities to CoS Values Selecting IP Precedence DSCP Priority Mapping IP Precedence Mapping DSCP Priority Mapping IP Port Priority Quality of Service Configuring Quality of Service Parameters Configuring a Class Map Creating QoS Policies At
405. o retrieve MIB objects Read Write Specifies read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects 3 33 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click SNMP Configuration Add new community strings as required select the access rights from the Access Mode drop down list then click Add SNMP Configuration SNMP Community SNMP Community Capability 5 irent New private RW pubic R lt lt Add Immuney Stnng spederma Remove Access Mode Read wite Figure 3 24 Configuring SNMP Community Strings CLI The following example adds the string spiderman with read write access Console config snmp server community spiderman rw 4 102 Console config Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types Traps indicating status changes are issued by the switch to specified trap managers You must specify trap managers so that key events are reported by this switch to your management station using network management platforms such as HP OpenView You can specify up to five management stations that will receive authentication failure messages and other trap messages from the switch Command Attributes Trap Manager Capability This switch supports up to five trap managers Current Displays a list of the trap managers currently configured Trap Manager IP Address IP address of the host the targeted recipient Trap Manager Community String
406. ocal 12345abcdef Console config snmp server engineID remote 54321fedcba Console config Related Commands snmp server host 4 104 show snmp engine id This command shows the SNMP engine ID Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows the default engine ID Console show snmp engine id Local SNMP engineID 8000002a8000000000e8666672 Local SNMP engineBoots 1 Remote SNMP engineID IP address 80000000030004e2b316c54321 192 168 1 19 Console Table 4 38 show snmp engine id display description Field Description Local SNMP enginelD String identifying the engine ID Local SNMP engineBoots The number of times that the engine has re initialized since the snmp EnginelD was last configured Remote SNMP enginelD String identifying an engine ID on a remote device IP address IP address of the device containing the corresponding remote SNMP engine 4 108 SNMP Commands 4 snmp server view This command adds an SNMP view which controls user access to the MIB Use the no form to remove an SNMP view Syntax snmp server view view name oid tree included excluded no snmp server view view name view name Name of an SNMP view Range 1 64 characters e oid tree Object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree Wild cards can be used to mask a specific portion of the OID string Refer to the examples e included Defines an included view e excluded Defines
407. ocols Ethernet Type value but contain an unknown PDU or 2 are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address but do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type Marker Illegal Pkts Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype Web Click Port LACP Port Counters Information Select a member port to display the corresponding information LACP Port Counters Information Interface Port 1 Trunk ID 2 LACPDUs Sent 307 LACPDUs Receive 296 Marker Sent 0 Marker Receive Marker Unknown Pkts D Marker Illegal Pkts Figure 3 54 LACP Port Counters Information CLI The following example displays LACP counters Console show lacp counters 4 136 Port channel 1 Eth 1 1 LACPDUs Sent 91 LACPDUs Receive 43 Marker Sent 0 Marker Receive 0 LACPDUs Unknown Pkts 0 LACPDUs Illegal Pkts 0 3 87 3 Configuring the Switch Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the local side of an link aggregation Table 3 8 LACP Internal Configuration Information Field Description Oper Key Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port Admin Key Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port LACPDUs Interval Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU infor
408. ode If RSTP is using 802 1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires RSTP restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port e Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To allow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration allowing them to participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible VLAN instance assignments Becareful when switching between spanning tree modes Changing modes stops all spanning tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the system in the new mode temporarily disrupting user traffic Example The following example configures the switch to use Rapid Spanning Tree Console config spanning tree mode rstp Console config spanning tree forward time This command configures the spanning tree bridge forward time globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree forward time seconds no spanning tree forward time seconds Time in seconds Range 4 30 seconds The minimum value is the higher of 4 or max age 2 1 Default Setting 15 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration 4 146 Spanning Tree Commands 4 Command Usage This command sets the maximum time in seconds the root device will wait before changing states i
409. oi Subnet Mask 255 2552550 Gateway IP Addressfo0000 MAC Address 00 00 35 28 10 03 Restat DHCP Figure 3 7 DHCP IP Configuration Note If you lose your management connection use a console connection and enter show ip interface to determine the new switch address CLI Specify the management interface and set the IP address mode to DHCP or BOOTP and then enter the ip dhcp restart command Console config Console config interface vlan 1 4 116 Console config if ip address dhcp 4 223 Console config if end Console ip dhcp restart 4 225 Console show ip interface 4 225 IP address and netmask 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode User specified Console Renewing DCHP DHCP may lease addresses to clients indefinitely or for a specific period of time If the address expires or the switch is moved to another network segment you will lose management access to the switch In this case you can reboot the switch or submit a client request to restart DHCP service via the CLI 3 16 Basic Configuration 3 Web If the address assigned by DHCP is no longer functioning you will not be able to renew the IP settings via the web interface You can only restart DHCP service via the web interface if the current address is still available CLI Enter the following command to restart DHCP service Console ip dhcp restart 4 225 Console Enabling Jumbo Frames You can enable jum
410. oint to point Spanning Tree Status enable show spanning tree mst configuration This command shows the configuration of the multiple spanning tree Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Configuration name R amp D Revision level 0 Instance Vlans Console Console show spanning tree mst configuration Mstp Configuration Information 4 162 VLAN Commands 4 VLAN Commands A VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment This section describes commands used to create VLAN groups add port members specify how VLAN tagging is used and enable automatic VLAN registration for the selected interface Table 4 53 VLANs Command Groups Function Page GVRP and Bridge Extension Configures GVRP settings that permit automatic VLAN learning 4 163 shows the configuration for bridge extension MIB Editing VLAN Groups Sets up VLAN groups including name VID and state 4 167 Configuring VLAN Configures VLAN interface parameters including ingress and egress 4 169 Interfaces tagging mode ingress filtering PVID and GVRP Displaying VLAN Displays VLAN groups status port members and MAC addresses 4 175 Information Configuring Private VLANs Configures private VLANs including uplink and downlink ports 4 179 Configuring Protocol VLANs Configures protocol based VLANs based on frame type and protocol 4 1
411. ole show interfaces status This command displays the status for an interface Syntax show interfaces status interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 26 50 port channel channel id Range 1 32 e vlan vian id Range 1 4094 Default Setting Shows the status for all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed For a description of the items displayed by this command see Displaying Connection Status on page 3 76 4 123 4 Command Line Interface Example Console show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 Information of Eth 1 5 Basic information Port type Mac address Configuration Name Port admin Speed duplex Capabilities Broadcast storm Broadcast storm limit Flow control Lacp Port security ax MAC count Port security action Current status Link status Port operation status Flow control type Operation speed duplex 100TX 00 12 CF 12 34 61 Up Auto 10half Enabled 500 packets second Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 None 10full 100half Up Up 100full None Console show interfaces status vlan 1 Information of VLAN 1 MAC address Console 00 12 CF 12 34 56 100full show interfaces counters This command displays interface statistics Syntax show interfaces coun
412. ole config DHCP Snooping Port Configuration Configures switch ports as trusted or untrusted An untrusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive messages from outside the network or firewall A trusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive only messages from within the network Command Attributes Trust Status Enables or disables port as trusted 3 189 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click DHCP Snooping Information Option Configuration a DHCP Snooping Port Configuration Port Trust Status 1 Cl Enabled 2 C Enabled 3 Cl Enabled 4 C Enabled 5 Cl Enabled 6 Cl Enabled 7 C Enabled 8 Cl Enabled 9 Cl Enabled v Figure 3 117 DHCP Snooping Port Configuration CLI This example shows how to enable the DHCP Snooping Trust Status for ports Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if ip dhcp snooping trust 4 234 Console config if DHCP Snooping Binding Information Displays the DHCP snooping binding information Command Attributes No Entry number for DHCP snooping binding information e Unit Stack unit e Port Port number e VLAN ID ID of a configured VLAN Range 1 4094 MAC Address A valid unicast MAC address IP Address A valid unicast IP address IP Address Type Indicates an IPv4 address type e Lease Time Seconds The time after which an entry is r
413. ollowing example shows how to set the interface configuration mode to VLAN 1 and then assign an IP address to the VLAN Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 254 255 255 255 0 Console config if Related Commands shutdown 4 121 switchport mode This command configures the VLAN membership mode for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport mode trunk hybrid private vlan no switchport mode trunk Specifies a port as an end point for a VLAN trunk A trunk is a direct link between two switches so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN Note that frames belonging to the port s default VLAN i e associated with the PVID are also transmitted as tagged frames hybrid Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames e private vian For an explanation of this command see switchport mode private vlan on page 4 182 Default Setting All ports are in hybrid mode with the PVID set to VLAN 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example The following shows how to set the configuration mode to port 1 and then set the switchport mode to hybrid Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport mode hybrid Console config if Related Commands switchport acceptable frame types 4 171 4 170 VLAN Commands 4 sw
414. ology changes time sec 2262 Transmission limit 3 Path Cost Method long Note The current root port and current root cost display as zero when this device is not connected to the network Configuring Global Settings Global settings apply to the entire switch Command Usage Spanning Tree Protocol Uses RSTP for the internal state machine but sends only 802 1D BPDUs This creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network If multiple VLANs are implemented on a network the path between specific VLAN members may be inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops thus isolating group members When operating multiple VLANs we recommend selecting the MSTP option e Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits as described below STP Mode If the switch receives an 802 1D BPDU i e STP BPDU after a port s migration delay timer expires the switch assumes it is connected to an 802 1D bridge and starts using only 802 1D BPDUs RSTP Mode If RSTP is using 802 1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires RSTP restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port e Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol 7 STP and RSTP BPDUs are transmitted as untagged frames and will cross any VLAN b
415. ommand displays the configuration settings for logging messages to local switch memory to an SMTP event handler or to a remote syslog server Syntax show logging flash ram sendmail trap flash Displays settings for storing event messages in flash memory i e permanent memory ram Displays settings for storing event messages in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset sendmail Displays settings for the SMTP event handler page 4 52 trap Displays settings for the trap function Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example The following example shows that system logging is enabled the message level for flash memory is errors i e default level 3 0 the message level for RAM is informational i e default level 6 0 Console show logging flash Syslog logging Enabled History logging in FLASH level errors Console show logging ram Syslog logging Enabled History logging in RAM level informational Console Table 4 19 show logging flash ram display description Field Description Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command History logging in FLASH The message level s reported based on the logging history command History logging in RAM The message level s reported based on the logging history command 4 47 4 Command Line Interface The following example displays settings
416. ommand identifies a specific line for configuration and to process subsequent line configuration commands Syntax line console vty console Console terminal line e vty Virtual terminal for remote console access i e Telnet Default Setting There is no default line Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Telnet is considered a virtual terminal connection and will be shown as Vty in screen displays such as show users However the serial communication parameters e g databits do not affect Telnet connections Example To enter console line mode enter the following command Console config line console Console config line Related Commands show line 4 18 show users 4 61 login This command enables password checking at login Use the no form to disable password checking and allow connections without a password Syntax login local no login local Selects local password checking Authentication is based on the user name specified with the username command Default Setting login local Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage There are three authentication modes provided by the switch itself at login 4 11 4 Command Line Interface login selects authentication by a single global password as specified by the password line configuration command When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE mode login local selects auth
417. on Configuring User Accounts Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication Configuring HTTPS Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate Configuring the Secure Shell Configuring the SSH Server Generating the Host Key Pair Configuring Port Security Configuring 802 1X Port Authentication Displaying 802 1X Global Settings Configuring 802 1X Global Settings Configuring Port Settings for 802 1X Displaying 802 1X Statistics Access Control Lists Configuring Access Control Lists Setting the ACL Name and Type Configuring a Standard IP ACL Configuring an Extended IP ACL Configuring a MAC ACL Binding a Port to an Access Control List Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access Port Configuration Displaying Connection Status Configuring Interface Connections Creating Trunk Groups Statically Configuring a Trunk Enabling LACP on Selected Ports Configuring LACP Parameters Displaying LACP Port Counters Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds Configuring Port Mirroring Configuring Rate Limits Rate Limit Configuration Showing Port Statistics Address Table Settings Setting Static Addresses Displaying the Address Table Changing the Aging Time Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration Displaying Global Settings Configuring Global Settings Displaying Interface Settings Configuring Interface Settings Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees Displaying I
418. on Page VLAN 3 122 802 1Q VLAN 3 122 GVRP Status Enables GVRP VLAN registration protocol 3 125 802 1Q Tunnel Enables QinQ Tunneling on the switch 3 126 Configuration Basic Information Displays information on the VLAN type supported by this switch 3 126 Current Table Shows the current port members of each VLAN and whether or 3 126 not the port is tagged or untagged Static List Used to create or remove VLAN groups 3 128 Static Table Modifies the settings for an existing VLAN 3 129 Static Membership by Port Configures membership type for interfaces including tagged 3 131 untagged or forbidden Port Configuration Specifies default PVID and VLAN attributes 3 132 Trunk Configuration Specifies default trunk VID and VLAN attributes 3 132 Tunnel Port Configuration Adds ports to a QinQ tunnel 3 138 Tunnel Trunk Configuration Adds trunks to a QinQ tunnel 3 138 Private VLAN 3 141 Status Enables or disables the private VLAN 3 141 Link Status Configures the private VLAN 3 141 Protocol VLAN 3 142 Configuration Configures protocol VLANs 3 142 Port Configuration Configures protocol VLAN port type and associated protocol 3 143 VLANs Priority 3 144 Default Port Priority Sets the default priority for each port 3 144 Default Trunk Priority Sets the default priority for each trunk 3 144 Traffic Classes Maps IEEE 802 1p priority tags to output queues 3 145 Traffic Classes Status Enables disables traffic class priorities not implemented 3 147 Queue Mode Sets
419. onditions The following table briefly describes the selections available from this program Table 3 2 Main Menu Menu Description Page System 3 10 System Information Provides basic system description including contact information 3 10 Switch Information Shows the number of ports hardware firmware version 3 11 numbers and power status Bridge Extension Shows the bridge extension parameters 3 13 Configuration IP Configuration Sets the IP address for management access 3 14 Jumbo Frames Enables jumbo frame packets 3 17 File Management 3 17 Copy Operation Allows the transfer and copying files 3 17 Delete Allows deletion of files from the flash memory 3 18 Set Start Up Sets the startup file 3 18 Line 3 21 Console Sets console port connection parameters 3 21 Telnet Sets Telnet connection parameters 3 23 Log 3 25 Logs Stores and displays error messages 3 25 System Logs Sends error messages to a logging process 3 26 Remote Logs Configures the logging of messages to a remote logging process 3 27 SMTP Sends an SMTP client message to a participating server 3 28 Renumbering Renumbers the units in the stack 3 30 Reset Restarts the switch 3 30 SNTP 3 31 Configuration Configures SNTP client settings including broadcast mode or a 3 31 specified list of servers Clock Time Zone Sets the local time zone for the system clock 3 32 SNMP 3 33 Configuration Configures
420. onds The report delay advertised in IGMP queries Range 5 25 Default Setting 10 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The switch must be using IGMPv2 for this command to take effect This command defines the time after a query during which a response is expected from a multicast client If a querier has sent a number of queries defined by the ip igmp snooping query count but a client has not responded a countdown timer is started using an initial value set by this command If the countdown finishes and the client still has not responded then that client is considered to have left the multicast group Example The following shows how to configure the maximum response time to 20 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping query max response time 20 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping version 4 203 ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 208 ip igmp snooping router port expire time This command configures the query timeout Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping router port expire time seconds no ip igmp snooping router port expire time seconds The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port i e the interface which had been receiving query packets to have expired Range 300 500 4 208 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 Default Setting 300 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usa
421. onfig ip igmp snooping 4 202 Console config ip igmp snooping querier 4 206 Console config ip igmp snooping query count 10 4 206 Console config ip igmp snooping query interval 100 4 207 Console config ip igmp snooping query max response time 20 4 208 Console config ip igmp snooping router port expire time 300 4 208 Console config ip igmp snooping version 2 4 203 Console config exit Console show ip igmp snooping 4 203 Service status Enabled Querier status Enabled Leave proxy status Disabled Query count 10 Query interval 100 sec Query max response time 20 sec Router port expire time 300 sec Immediate Leave Processing Disabled on all VLAN IGMP snooping version Version 2 Console Enabling IGMP Immediate Leave The IGMP snooping immediate leave feature enables a Layer 2 LAN interface to be removed from the multicast forwarding table without first sending an IGMP group specific query to the interface Upon receiving a group specific IGMPv2 leave message the switch immediately removes the interface from the Layer 2 forwarding table entry for that multicast group unless a multicast router was learned on the port IGMP immediate leave improves bandwidth management for all hosts in a switched network 3 164 Multicast Filtering 3 Command Attributes e VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 Immediate Leave Enable or disable IGMP immediate leave for the selected VLAN Web Click IGMP Snoop
422. onfig if spanning tree port priority 0 4 155 4 Command Line Interface Related Commands spanning tree cost 4 154 spanning tree edge port This command specifies an interface as an edge port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax no spanning tree edge port Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device This command has the same effect as the spanning tree portfast Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree edge port Console config if Related Commands spanning tree portfast 4 156 spanning tree portfast This command sets an interface to fast forwarding Use
423. ons 500 262143 packets per second Default 500 pps Trunk Shows if a port is a trunk member 3 91 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Port Port Trunk Broadcast Control Set the threshold mark the Enabled field for the desired interface and click Apply Protect Status Threshold 500 262143 Trunk Port Broadcast Control Port Type 1 1000Base TX Enabled 500 packets sec 2 1000Base TX Enabled 500 packets sec 3 1000Base TX Enabled 500 packets sec 4 1000Base TX Enabled 500 packets sec 5 1000Base TX Enabled 500 packets sec 6 1000Base TX Enabled 500 packets sec 7 1000Base TX Enabled 500 packets sec 8 1000Base TX Enabled 500 packets sec 9 1000Base TX Enabled 500 packets sec Figure 3 57 Port Broadcast Control CLI Specify any interface and then enter the threshold The following disables broadcast storm control for port 1 and then sets broadcast suppression at 500 packets per second for port 2 Console config if exit Console Console config if end Information of Eth 1 2 Broadcast threshold LACP status Ingress Rate Limit Egress Rate Limit VLAN membership mode Ingress rule Acceptable frame type Native VLAN GVRP status Allowed VLAN Forbidden VLAN Private VLAN mode Private VLAN mapping Console 3 92 Priority for untagged traffic Private VLAN host association Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if
424. onsole config access list ip standard david 4 90 Console config std acl 3 68 Access Control Lists 3 Configuring a Standard IP ACL Command Attributes Action An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules Address Type Specifies the source IP address Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to specify a specific host address in the Address field or IP to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields Options Any Host IP Default Any IP Address Source IP address e Subnet Mask A subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The mask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Select the address type Any Host or IP If you select Host enter a specific address If you select IP enter a subnet address and the mask for an address range Then click Add Standard ACL Name Standard ACL Action IP Address Subnet Mask Remove Actior Permit x Address Typel Any P Address pooo Subnet Mask booo Add Figure 3 44 Configuring Standard IP ACLs CLI This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10 1 1 214 and
425. oo he dot x8100 he dot x8100 ot x8100 he dot x8100 he dot 00 dot 00 x ae2HnoHvwonoHxnoHon or oO Q K oX 0 0x8100 Console Console config dotlq tunnel system tunnel control Console config interface ethernet 1 1 config if switchport dotlq tunnel mode access q tunne q tunne q tunne q tunne q tunne q tunne q tunne The dotlg tunnel Console config if interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if switchport dotlq tunnel mode uplink Console config if end Console show dotlq tunnel mode of the set interface 1 1 is mode of the set interface 1 2 is mode of the set interface 1 3 is mode of the set interface 1 4 is mode of the set interface 1 5 is mode of the set interface 1 6 is mode of the set interface 1 7 is mode of the set interface 1 24 is Normal mode Current double tagged status of the system is Enabled Access Uplin Normal Normal Norma Norma Norma moa moa moa moa moa moa moa TPID is TPID is TPID is TPID is TPID is TPID is TPID is TPID is Related Commands switchport dot1q tunnel mode 4 177 Configuring Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN This section describes commands used to configure private VIANs Table 4 59 Private VLAN Commands Command Function
426. oot of the Spanning Tree Oper Link Type The operational point to point status of the LAN segment attached to this interface This parameter is determined by manual configuration or by auto detection as described for Admin Link Type in STA Port Configuration on 3 114 Oper Edge Port This parameter is initialized to the setting for Admin Edge Port in STA Port Configuration on 3 114 i e true or false but will be set to false if a BPDU is received indicating that another bridge is attached to this port Port Role Roles are assigned according to whether the port is part of the active topology connecting the bridge to the root bridge i e root port connecting a LAN through the bridge to the root bridge i e designated port or is an alternate or backup port that may provide connectivity if other bridges bridge ports or LANs fail or are removed The role is set to disabled i e disabled port if a port has no role within the spanning tree 3 111 3 Configuring the Switch Alternate port receives more useful BPDUs from another bridge and is therefore not selected as the designated port R Root Port A Alternate Port D Designated Port B Backup Port useful BPDUs from the same bridge and is therefore not selected as the designated port Backup port receives more R R Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Information only These additional parameters are
427. opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console configure Console config username guest password 0 password Console config username admin password 0 password Console config Setting an IP Address You must establish IP address information for the stack to obtain management access through the network This can be done in either of the following ways Manual You have to input the information including IP address and subnet mask If your management station is not in the same IP subnet as the stack s master unit you will also need to specify the default gateway router Dynamic The switch sends IP configuration requests to BOOTP or DHCP address allocation servers on the network Manual Configuration You can manually assign an IP address to the switch You may also need to specify a default gateway that resides between this device and management stations that exist on another network segment Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the CLI program Note The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default 2 4 Basic Configuration 2 Before you can assign an IP address to the switch you must obtain the following information from your network administrator IP address for the switch Default gateway for the network Network mask for this network To assign an IP address to the swit
428. or trunk from the Interface field and click Query to display the assigned multicast groups Select a multicast address from the displayed lists and click the Add or Remove button to modify the Member list MVR Static Group Member Interface Port Trunk x Member Non Member none none ssaa Figure 3 110 MVR Group Member Configuration CLI This example statically assigns a multicast group to a receiver port Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if mvr group 228 1 23 1 4 219 Console config if Configuring Domain Name Service The Domain Naming System DNS service on this switch allows host names to be mapped to IP addresses using static table entries or by redirection to other name servers on the network When a client device designates this switch as a DNS server the client will attempt to resolve host names into IP addresses by forwarding DNS queries to the switch and waiting for a response You can manually configure entries in the DNS table used for mapping domain names to IP addresses configure default domain names or specify one or more name servers to use for domain name to address translation Configuring General DNS Service Parameters Command Usage To enable DNS service on this switch first configure one or more name servers and then enable domain lookup status To append domain names to incomplete host names received f
429. ority Example The following example shows how to enable IP DSCP mapping globally Console config map ip dscp Console config map ip dscp Interface Configuration This command sets IP DSCP priority i e Differentiated Services Code Point priority Use the no form to restore the default table Syntax map ip dscp dscp value cos cos value no map ip dscp dscp value 8 bit DSCP value Range 0 63 cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7 Default Setting The DSCP default values are defined in the following table Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0 Table 4 65 IP DSCP to CoS Vales IP DSCP Value CoS Value 0 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 48 46 56 NN OD oy B amp B wl N gt 4 190 Priority Commands 4 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP DSCP and default switchport priority DSCP priority values are mapped to default Class of Service values according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard and then subsequently mapped to the four hardware priority queues This command sets the IP DSCP priority for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to map IP DSCP value 1 to CoS value 0 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip dscp
430. orts CoS with four priority queues for each port Data packets in a port s high priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower priority queues You can set the default priority for each interface and configure the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch s priority queues Layer 2 Queue Settings Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces You can specify the default port priority for each interface on the switch All untagged packets entering the switch are tagged with the specified default port priority and then sorted into the appropriate priority queue at the output port Command Usage e This switch provides four priority queues for each port It uses Weighted Round Robin to prevent head of queue blockage The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types i e receives both untagged and tagged frames This priority does not apply to IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frames If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frame the IEEE 802 1p User Priority bits will be used Ifthe output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission Command Attributes e Default Priority The priority that is assigned to untagged frames received on the specified interface Range 0 7 Default 0 Number of Egress Traffic Classes The number of queue buffers provided for each port 9 CLI di
431. other hand modify interface parameters or enable certain switching functions These classes are further divided into different modes Available commands depend on the selected mode You can always enter a question mark at the prompt to display a list of the commands available for the current mode The command classes and associated modes are displayed in the following table 4 Command Line Interface Table 4 1 Command Modes Class Mode Exec Normal Privileged Configuration Global Access Control List Class Map Interface Line Multiple Spanning Tree Policy Map VLAN Database You must be in Privileged Exec mode to access the Global configuration mode You must be in Global Configuration mode to access any of the other configuration modes Exec Commands When you open a new console session on the switch with the user name and password guest the system enters the Normal Exec command mode or guest mode displaying the Console gt command prompt Only a limited number of the commands are available in this mode You can access all commands only from the Privileged Exec command mode or administrator mode To access Privilege Exec mode open a new console session with the user name and password admin The system will now display the Console command prompt You can also enter Privileged Exec mode from within Normal Exec mode by entering the enable command followed by the privileged leve
432. oundaries 3 107 3 Configuring the Switch Toallow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration allowing them to participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible VLAN instance assignments Be careful when switching between spanning tree modes Changing modes stops all spanning tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the system in the new mode temporarily disrupting user traffic Command Attributes Basic Configuration of Global Settings e Spanning Tree State Enables disables STA on this switch Default Enabled e Spanning Tree Type Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D i e when this option is selected the switch will use RSTP set to STP forced compatibility mode RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1w RSTP is the default MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1s e Priority Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Note that lower numeric values indicate higher priority Default 32768 Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0
433. out 4 76 show radius server 4 76 vii Contents viii TACACS Client tacacs server host tacacs server port tacacs server key show tacacs server Port Security Commands port security 802 1X Port Authentication dot1x system auth control dot1x default dot1x max req dot1x port control dot1x operation mode dot1x re authenticate dot1x re authentication dot1x timeout quiet period dot1x timeout re authperiod dot1x timeout tx period show dot1x Access Control List Commands IP ACLs access list ip permit deny Standard ACL permit deny Extended ACL show ip access list ip access group show ip access group MAC ACLs access list mac permit deny MAC ACL show mac access list mac access group show mac access group ACL Information show access list show access group SNMP Commands snmp server show snmp snmp server community snmp server contact snmp server location snmp server host snmp server enable traps snmp server engine id 4 77 4 77 4 77 4 78 4 78 4 79 4 79 4 81 4 81 4 82 4 82 4 82 4 83 4 84 4 84 4 84 4 85 4 85 4 86 4 89 4 90 4 90 4 91 4 91 4 93 4 93 4 94 4 95 4 95 4 96 4 97 4 98 4 98 4 99 4 99 4 99 4 100 4 101 4 101 4 102 4 103 4 103 4 104 4 106 4 107 show snmp engine id snmp server view show snmp view snmp server group show snmp group snmp server user show snmp user Interface Commands interface description speed duplex negotiation capabilities flowcontrol shu
434. ow to enable the Spanning Tree Algorithm for the switch Console config spanning tree Console config spanning tree mode This command selects the spanning tree mode for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Note MSTP is not supported in the current software Syntax spanning tree mode stp rstp mstp no spanning tree mode stp Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D rstp Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w e mstp Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1s Default Setting rstp Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Spanning Tree Protocol Uses RSTP for the internal state machine but sends only 802 1D BPDUs 4 145 4 Command Line Interface This creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network If multiple VLANs are implemented on a network the path between specific VLAN members may be inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops thus isolating group members When operating multiple VLANs we recommend selecting the MSTP option e Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits as described below STP Mode If the switch receives an 802 1D BPDU after a port s migration delay timer expires the switch assumes it is connected to an 802 1D bridge and starts using only 802 1D BPDUs RSTP M
435. ows switches to assign endstations to different virtual LANs and defines a standard way for VLANs to communicate across switched networks IEEE 802 1p An IEEE standard for providing quality of service QoS in Ethernet networks The standard uses packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches to transmit packets based on the tagged priority value IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first enter a user ID and password for authentication IEEE 802 3ac Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging IEEE 802 3x Defines Ethernet frame start stop requests and timers used for flow control on full duplex links Now incorporated in IEEE 802 3 2002 Glossary 2 Glossary IGMP Snooping Listening to IGMP Query and IGMP Report packets transferred between IP Multicast Routers and IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast group members IGMP Query On each subnetwork one IGMP capable device will act as the querier that is the device that asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups they wish to join or to which they already belong The elected querier will be the device with the lowest IP address in the subnetwork Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP A protocol through which hosts can register with their local router for multicast services If there is more than one multicast switch router on a given subnetwork one of the devices is m
436. p by Port CLI This example adds Port 3 to VLAN 1 as a tagged port and removes Port 3 from VLAN 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 4 116 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 1 tagged 4 173 Console config if switchport allowed vlan remove 2 3 131 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces You can configure VLAN behavior for specific interfaces including the default VLAN identifier PVID accepted frame types ingress filtering GVRP status and GARP timers Command Usage GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across the network GARP Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP to register or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN The default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data rate These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties with GVRP registration deregistration Command Attributes PVID VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames received on the interface Default 1 If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member For all other VLANs the PVID must be defined first then the status of the VLAN can be configured as a tagged or
437. p http secure port 4 31 Telnet Server Commands 4 32 ip telnet port 4 32 ip telnet server 4 33 Secure Shell Commands 4 33 ip ssh server 4 35 ip ssh timeout 4 36 ip ssh authentication retries 4 37 ip ssh server key size 4 37 delete public key 4 38 ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 38 ip ssh crypto zeroize 4 39 ip ssh save host key 4 39 show ip ssh 4 40 show ssh 4 40 show public key 4 41 Event Logging Commands 4 43 logging on 4 43 logging history 4 44 logging host 4 45 vi Contents logging facility 4 45 logging trap 4 46 clear logging 4 46 show logging 4 47 show log 4 48 SMTP Alert Commands 4 49 logging sendmail host 4 49 logging sendmail level 4 50 logging sendmail source email 4 51 logging sendmail destination email 4 51 logging sendmail 4 52 show logging sendmail 4 52 Time Commands 4 53 sntp client 4 53 sntp server 4 54 sntp poll 4 55 show sntp 4 55 clock timezone 4 56 calendar set 4 56 show calendar 4 57 System Status Commands 4 57 show startup config 4 57 show running config 4 59 show system 4 61 show users 4 61 show version 4 62 Frame Size Commands 4 63 jumbo frame 4 63 Flash File Commands 4 64 copy 4 64 delete 4 67 dir 4 68 whichboot 4 69 boot system 4 69 Authentication Commands 4 70 Authentication Sequence 4 70 authentication login 4 71 authentication enable 4 72 RADIUS Client 4 73 radius server host 4 74 radius server port 4 74 radius server key 4 75 radius server retransmit 4 75 radius server time
438. p igmp filter IGMP filter enabled onsole show ip igmp filter interface ethernet 1 1 Ethernet 1 1 information IGMP Profile 19 Deny range 239 1 41 1 239 1 1 1 range 239 2 3 1 239 2 3 100 Console show ip igmp profile This command displays IGMP filtering profiles created on the switch Syntax show ip igmp profile profile number profile number An existing IGMP filter profile number Range 1 4294967295 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip igmp profile IGMP Profile 19 IGMP Profile 50 Console show ip igmp profile 19 IGMP Profile 19 Deny range 239 1 1 1 239 1 1 1 range 239 2 3 1 239 2 3 100 Console show ip igmp throttle interface This command displays the interface settings for IGMP throttling Syntax show ip igmp throttle interface interface interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 4 216 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 port Port number Range 1 29 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Using this command without specifying an interface displays all interfaces Example Console show ip igmp throttle interface ethernet 1 1 Eth 1 1 Information Status TRUE Action Deny Max Multicast Groups 32 Current Multicast Groups 0 Console Multicast VLAN Registration Commands This section describes commands used to configure Multi
439. page 4 229 are automatically configured with an infinite lease time Dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping are configured by the DHCP server itself static entries include a manually configured lease time If the IP source guard is enabled an inbound packet s IP address sip option or both its IP address and corresponding MAC address sip mac option will be checked against the binding table If no matching entry is found the packet will be dropped Filtering rules are implemented as follows If the DHCP snooping is disabled see page 4 231 IP source guard will check the VLAN ID source IP address port number and source MAC address for the sip mac option If a matching entry is found in the binding table and the entry type is static IP source guard binding the packet will be forwarded Ifthe DHCP snooping is enabled IP source guard will check the VLAN ID source IP address port number and source MAC address for the sip mac option If a matching entry is found in the binding table and the entry type IP Source Guard Commands 4 is static IP source guard binding static DHCP snooping binding or dynamic DHCP snooping binding the packet will be forwarded If IP source guard if enabled on an interface for which IP source bindings dynamically learned via DHCP snooping or manually configured are not yet configured the switch will drop all IP traffic on that port except for DHCP packets Example This example enables
440. ports 11 13 Because LACP has also been enabled on the ports at the other end of the links the show interfaces status port channel 1 command shows that Trunk 1 has been established Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if lacp Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 12 Console config if lacp Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 13 Console config if lacp Le Conso config if exit Console config exit Console show interfaces status port channel 1 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type 100TX Mac address 00 12 CF 12 34 72 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full Flow control status Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Current status Created by LACP Link status Up Operation speed duplex 100full Flow control type None Member Ports Eth1 11 Eth1 12 Eth1 13 Console lacp system priority This command configures a port s LACP system priority Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner system priority priority no lacp actor partner system priority actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link e priority This priority is used to determine link aggregation group LAG membership and to identify this device to other switches during LAG n
441. priority matches 2 the LACP port admin key matches and 3 the LACP port channel key matches if configured e Ifthe port channel admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed i e it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group Note that when the LAG is no longer used the port channel admin key is reset to 0 Example Console config interface port channel 1 Console config if lacp actor admin key 3 Console config if 4 135 4 Command Line Interface lacp port priority This command configures LACP port priority Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner port priority priority no lacp actor partner port priority actor The local side an aggregate link e partner The remote side of an aggregate link e priority LACP port priority is used to select a backup link Range 0 65535 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e Setting a lower value indicates a higher effective priority e If an active port link goes down the backup port with the highest priority is selected to replace the downed link However if two or more ports have the same LACP port priority the port with the lowest physical port number will be selected as the backup port Once the
442. public key username dsa rsa username Name of an SSH user Range 1 8 characters dsa DSA public key type rsa RSA public key type Default Setting Deletes both the DSA and RSA key Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console delete public key admin dsa Console ip ssh crypto host key generate This command generates the host key pair i e public and private Syntax ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa rsa e dsa DSA Version 2 key type rsa RSA Version 1 key type Default Setting Generates both the DSA and RSA key pairs Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e This command stores the host key pair in memory i e RAM Use the ip ssh save host key command to save the host key pair to flash memory Some SSH client programs automatically add the public key to the known hosts file as part of the configuration process Otherwise you must manually create a known hosts file and place the host public key in it e The SSH server uses this host key to negotiate a session key and encryption method with the client trying to connect to it Example Console ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa Console 4 38 System Management Commands 4 Related Commands ip ssh crypto zeroize 4 39 ip ssh save host key 4 39 ip ssh crypto zeroize This command clears the host key from memory i e RAM Syntax ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa rsa dsa DSA key
443. r the Global Configuration mode enter the command configure in Privileged Exec mode The system prompt will change to Console config which gives you access privilege to all Global Configuration commands Console configure Console config To enter the other modes at the configuration prompt type one of the following commands Use the exit or end command to return to the Privileged Exec mode Table 4 2 Configuration Modes Mode Command Prompt Page Line line console vty Console config line 4 10 Access access list ip standard T Console config std ac 4 89 Control List access list ip extended Console config ext acl 4 91 access list mac Console config mac acl 4 96 Class Map class map Console config cmap 4 198 Interface interface ethernet port port channel ial vlan id Console config i 4 120 MSTP spanning tree mst configuration Console config mstp 4 154 Policy Map policy map Console config pmap 4 200 VLAN vian database Console config vlan 4 167 For example you can use the following commands to enter interface configuration mode and then return to Privileged Exec mode Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if exit Console config 4 Command Line Interface Command Line Processing Commands are not case sensitive You can abbreviate commands and parameters as long as they contain enough letters to di
444. r timeout 10 4 76 Console config radius server 1 host 192 168 1 25 4 74 Console config end Console show radius server 4 76 Remote RADIUS server configuration Global settings Communication key with RADIUS server Server port number 181 Retransmit times 5 Request timeout 10 Server 1 Server IP address 192 168 1 25 Communication key with RADIUS server Server port number 1812 Retransmit times 2 Request timeout 5 Console configure Console config authentication login tacacs 4 71 Console config tacacs server host 10 20 30 40 4 77 Console config tacacs server port 200 4 77 Console config tacacs server key green 4 78 Console show tacacs server 4 78 Server IP address 10 20 30 40 Communication key with tacacs server green Server port number 200 Console config 3 51 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring HTTPS You can configure the switch to enable the Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTPS over the Secure Socket Layer SSL providing secure access i e an encrypted connection to the switch s web interface Command Usage Both the HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch However you cannot configure both services to use the same UDP port If you enable HTTPS you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your browser https device port_number When you start HTTPS the connection is established in this way
445. ration mode Then use the class command to enter Policy Map Class configuration mode And finally use the set and police commands to specify the match criteria where the set command classifies the service that an IP packet will receive police command defines the maximum throughput burst rate and the action that results from a policy violation e You can configure up to 16 rules per Class Map You can also include multiple classes in a Policy Map 4 196 Quality of Service Commands 4 Example This example creates a policy called rd_policy uses the class command to specify the previously defined rd_class uses the set command to classify the service that incoming packets will receive and then uses the police command to limit the average bandwidth to 100 000 Kbps the burst rate to 1522 bytes and configure the response to drop any violating packets Console config policy map rd policy Console config pmap class rd class Console config pmap c set ip dscp 3 Console config pmap c police 100000 1522 exceed action drop Console config pmap c set This command services IP traffic by setting a CoS DSCP or IP Precedence value in a matching packet as specified by the match command on page 4 194 Use the no form to remove the traffic classification Syntax no set cos new cos ip dscp new dscp ip precedence new precedence e new cos New Class of Service CoS value Range 0 7 new dscp
446. re less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Oversize Frames The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Fragments The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error 64 Bytes Frames The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 65 127 Byte Frames 128 255 Byte Frames 256 511 Byte Frames 512 1023 Byte Frames 1024 1518 Byte Frames 1519 1536 Byte Frames The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 3 97 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Port Port Statistics Select the required interface and click Query You can also use the Refresh button at the bottom of the page to update the screen Port Statistics Interface Port el i OTrunk ls Interface Statistics Received Octets 1352927 Received Unicast Packets 9250 Received Multicast Packets 450 Received Broadcast Packets 173 Received
447. reconfigured These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI e Spanning tree mode Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1w MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1s e Priority Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device 3 105 3 Configuring the Switch However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device e Root Hello Time Interval in seconds at which this device transmits a configuration message Root Maximum Age The maximum time in seconds this device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals If the root port ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section means interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Root Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds this device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topo
448. red for specific VLANs but the changes will not take effect until DHCP snooping is globally re enabled When DHCP snooping is globally enabled configuration changes for specific VLANs have the following effects If DHCP snooping is disabled on a VLAN all dynamic bindings learned for this VLAN are removed from the binding table Example This example enables DHCP snooping for VLAN 1 Console config ip dhcp snooping vlan 1 Console config 4 233 4 Command Line Interface Related Commands ip dhcp snooping 4 231 ip dhcp snooping trust 4 234 ip dhcp snooping trust This command configures the specified interface as trusted Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax no ip dhcp snooping trust Default Setting All interfaces are untrusted Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e An untrusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive messages from outside the network or firewall A trusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive only messages from within the network e When DHCP snooping enabled globally using the ip dhcp snooping command page 4 231 and enabled on a VLAN with this command DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN according to the default status or as specifically configured for an interface with the no ip dhcp snooping trust command e When an untrusted port is chan
449. remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor port priority 128 show lacp This command displays LACP information Syntax show lacp port channel counters internal neighbors sysid e port channel Local identifier for a link aggregation group Range 1 32 counters Statistics for LACP protocol messages e internal Configuration settings and operational state for local side e neighbors Configuration settings and operational state for remote side e sysid Summary of system priority and MAC address for all channel groups 4 136 Link Aggregation Commands 4 Default Setting Port Channel all Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show lacp 1 counters Port channel 1 LACPDUs Sent 21 LACPDUs Received 21 Marker Sent 0 Marker Received 0 LACPDUs Unknown Pkts 0 LACPDUs Illegal Pkts 0 Table 4 47 show lacp counters display description Field Description LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group Marker Sent Number of v
450. restarted it will always run the Power On Self Test It will also retain all configuration information stored in non volatile memory by the copy running config startup config command Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command resets the entire system Example This example shows how to reset the switch Console reload System will be restarted continue lt y n gt y end This command returns to Privileged Exec mode Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Interface Configuration Line Configuration and VLAN Database Configuration Example This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Interface Configuration mode Console config if end Console 4 22 General Commands 4 exit This command returns to the previous configuration mode or exit the configuration program Default Setting None Command Mode Any Example This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Global Configuration mode and then quit the CLI session Console config exit Console exit Press ENTER to start session User Access Verification Username quit This command exits the configuration program Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The quit and exit commands can both exit the configuration program Example This example shows how to quit a CLI sessio
451. rface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e You can only assign one policy map to an interface e You must first define a class map then define a policy map and finally use the service policy command to bind the policy map to the required interface Example This example applies a service policy to an ingress interface Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if service policy input rd policy Console config if show class map This command displays the QoS class maps which define matching criteria used for classifying traffic Syntax show class map class map name class map name Name of the class map Range 1 16 characters Default Setting Displays all class maps Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 199 4 Command Line Interface Example Console show class map Class Map match any rd class 1 Match ip dscp 3 Class Map match any rd_class 2 Match ip precedence 5 Class Map match any rd_class 3 Match vlan 1 Console show policy map This command displays the QoS policy maps which define classification criteria for incoming traffic and may include policers for bandwidth limitations Syntax show policy map policy map name class class map name policy map name Name of the policy map Range 1 16 characters class map name Name of the class map Range 1 16 characters Default Setting Displays all policy maps and all classes Comman
452. riority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard as shown in the following table Table 3 11 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues Queue 0 1 2 Priority 1 2 0 3 45 6 7 3 145 3 Configuring the Switch The priority levels recommended in the IEEE 802 1p standard for various network applications are shown in the following table However you can map the priority levels to the switch s output queues in any way that benefits application traffic for your own network Table 3 12 CoS Priority Levels Priority Level Traffic Type 1 Background Spare default Best Effort Excellent Effort Video less than 100 milliseconds latency and jitter Voice less than 10 milliseconds latency and jitter 2 0 3 4 Controlled Load 5 6 7 Network Control Command Attributes e Priority CoS value Range 0 7 where 7 is the highest priority e Traffic Class10 Output queue buffer Range 0 3 where 3 is the highest CoS priority queue Web Click Priority Traffic Classes Select a port or trunk for the current mapping of CoS values to output queues to be displayed Assign priorities to the traffic classes i e output queues then click Apply Traffic Classes Interface Portel OTrunk Priority Traffic Class 0 3 0 1 1 0 2 0 3 1 4 2 5 2 6 3 7 3 Figure 3 85 Traffic Classes 10 C
453. rity i e lower numeric value becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Example Console config spanning tree priority 40000 Console config spanning tree pathcost method This command configures the path cost method used for Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree pathcost method long short no spanning tree pathcost method long Specifies 32 bit based values that range from 1 200 000 000 This method is based on the IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol short Specifies 16 bit based values that range from 1 65535 This method is based on the IEEE 802 1 Spanning Tree Protocol Default Setting Long method Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Note that path cost page 4 154 takes precedence over port priority page 4 155 Example Console config spanning tree pathcost method long Console config 4 149 A Command Line Interface spanning tree transmission limit This command configures the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive RSTP MSTP BPDUs Use the no form to restore the defa
454. rk Management Protocol 3 Table 3 4 Supported Notification Messages Continued Object Label Object ID Description Private Traps swPowerStatus ChangeTrap 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 68 2 1 0 1 This trap is sent when the power state changes swipFilterRejectTrap 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 68 2 1 0 1 This trap is sent when an incorrect IP address is rejected by the IP Filter pethPsePortOnOff 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 68 2 1 0 1 This notification indicates if a PSE Power Notification Sourcing Equipment Portis delivering power to the PD Powered Device This notification is sent on every status change except in search mode pethPsePortPower 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 68 2 1 0 1 This notification indicates a Port Change Status MaintenanceStatus and is sent on every status change Notification pethMainPower UsageOnNotification 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 68 2 1 0 1 This notification indicates PSE Threshold usage indication is on the power usage is above the threshold pethMainPower UsageOffNotification 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 68 2 1 0 1 This notification indicates that the PSE Threshold usage indication is off the usage power is below the threshold a These are legacy notifications and therefore must be enabled in conjunction with the corresponding traps on the SNMP Configuration menu 3 43 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Groups Click New to configure a new group In the New Gro
455. rminates the line connection and returns the terminal to the idle state The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file 4 12 Line Commands 4 during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example Console config line password 0 secret Console config line Related Commands login 4 11 password thresh 4 14 timeout login response This command sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI Use the no form to restore the default Syntax timeout login response seconds no timeout login response seconds Integer that specifies the timeout interval Range 0 300 seconds 0 disabled Default Setting e CLI Disabled 0 seconds e Telnet 600 seconds Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage Ifa login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval the connection is terminated for the session This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting Example To set the timeout to two minutes enter this command Console config line timeout login response 120 Console config line Related Commands s
456. rname Name of an SSH user Range 1 8 characters Default Setting Shows all public keys Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage f no parameters are entered all keys are displayed If the user keyword is entered but no user name is specified then the public keys for all users are displayed When an RSA key is displayed the first field indicates the size of the host key e g 1024 the second field is the encoded public exponent e g 35 and the last string is the encoded modulus When a DSA key is displayed the first field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard DSS and the last string is the encoded modulus 4 44 A Command Line Interface Example Console show public key host Host RSA 1024 35 1568499540186766925933394677505461732531367489083654725415020245593199868 544358361651999923329781766065830958 6108259132128 902337654680172627257141 3428762941301196195566782595664104869574278881462065194174677298486546861 5717739390164779355 9423035774130 98022737087794545240839717526463580581767 16709574804776117 DSA ssh dss AAAB3NzaCl1kc3MAAACBAPWKZTPbsRIB8ydEXcxM3dyV yrDbKStI1nzD Dg0h2Hxc YV44sXZ2JXhamLK6P8bvuiyacWbUW a4 PAtp1KMSdqsKeh 3hKoA3vRRSy 1N2XFfAKx15 fwFfv J1PdOkFgzLGMinvSNYQwiQXbKTBHO Z4mUZpE85 PWxDZMaCNBPJj BrRAAAAFOChb4vsdfOQGNIjw bvwrNLaQ77isiwAAAIEAs y5 YWDC99ebYHNRjJ 5kh4 7wY4i8cZvH p9cnrfwFTMUOLVFD1y3IR 263 95NLy5Qd7ZDx fA9mCOfT y
457. rom a DNS client i e not formatted with dotted notation you can specify a default domain name or a list of domain names to be tried in sequential order If there is no domain list the default domain name is used If there is a domain list the default domain name is not used 3 181 3 Configuring the Switch When an incomplete host name is received by the DNS service on this switch and a domain name list has been specified the switch will work through the domain list appending each domain name in the list to the host name and checking with the specified name servers for a match When more than one name server is specified the servers are queried in the specified sequence until a response is received or the end of the list is reached with no response Note that if all name servers are deleted DNS will automatically be disabled Command Attributes Domain Lookup Status Enables DNS host name to address translation Default Domain Name 4 Defines the default domain name appended to incomplete host names Range 1 64 alphanumeric characters Domain Name List Defines a list of domain names that can be appended to incomplete host names Range 1 64 alphanumeric characters 1 5 names Name Server List Specifies the address of one or more domain name servers to use for name to address resolution Range 1 6 IP addresses Web Select DNS General Configuration Set the default domain name or list of domain
458. ropped Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks When an interface is configured with this feature the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to verify conformity Non conforming traffic is dropped conforming traffic is forwarded without any changes Table 4 45 Rate Limit Commands Command Function Mode Page rate limit Configures the maximum input or output rate for a port IC 4 129 rate limit Use this command to define the rate limit level for a specific interface Use this command without specifying a rate to restore the default rate limit level Use the no form to restore the default status of disabled Syntax rate limit lt input output gt rate no rate limit lt input output gt input Input rate limit output Output rate limit e rate Maximum value in Mbps Range 1 to 1000 Mbps Default Setting Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Mbps Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if rate limit input 1000 Console config if 4 129 4 Command Line Interface Link Aggregation Commands Ports can be statically grouped into an aggregate link i e trunk to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Or you can use the Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP to automatically negotiate a trunk link between this switch and another ne
459. ror Port Configuration Specify the source port the traffic type to be mirrored and the monitor port then click Add Mirror Port Configuration New Mirror Sessions Source 1 10 Both Destination 1 13 Source Port e1 x lt lt Add Type Rx Remove Target Port e1 v Figure 3 58 Mirror Port Configuration CLI Use the interface command to select the monitor port then use the port monitor command to specify the source port and traffic type Console config interface ethernet 1 10 4 116 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 13 tx 4 127 Console config if 3 93 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring Rate Limits This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the switch Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks When an interface is configured with this feature the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to verify conformity Non conforming traffic is dropped conforming traffic is forwarded without any changes Rate Limit Configuration Use the rate limit configuration pages to apply rate limiting Command Usage Input and output rate limits ca
460. rst byte Burst in bytes Range 64 1522 e Exceed Specifies whether the traffic that exceeds the specified rate or burst will be dropped or the DSCP service level will be reduced Set Decreases DSCP priority for out of conformance traffic Range 0 63 Drop Drops out of conformance traffic Add Adds the specified criteria to the policy map 3 159 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click QoS DiffServ Policy Map to display the list of existing policy maps To add a new policy map click Add Policy To configure the policy rule settings click Edit Classes Policy Map Modify Name amp Description l Edit Classes l Add Policy Remove Policy Policy Name ription Policy Configuration y Policy Name Description Policy Rule Settings Policy Name Policy 2 Met a Action eter Exceed Action Name Rate bps Burst byte Class Name m Action Set m CoS 0 7 x Rate 1 Meter 1000000 kbps Burst 64 1522 byte Exceed Add Figure 3 95 Configuring Policy Maps CLI This example creates a policy map called rd policy sets the average bandwidth the 1 Mbps the burst rate to 1522 bps and the response to reduce the DSCP value for violating packets to 0 Console config policy map rd_policy 3 4 200 Console config pmap class rd_class 3 4 200 Console config pmap c set ip dscp 4 4 201 Console config pmap c police 100000 1522
461. rt security This command enables or configures port security Use the no form without any keywords to disable port security Use the no form with the appropriate keyword to restore the default settings for a response to security violation or for the maximum number of allowed addresses Syntax port security action shutdown trap trap and shutdown max mac count address count no port security action max mac count action Response to take when port security is violated shutdown Disable port only trap Issue SNMP trap message only trap and shutdown Issue SNMP trap message and disable port max mac count address count The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port Range 0 1024 Default Setting Status Disabled Action None Maximum Addresses 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet 4 79 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage If you enable port security the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted First use the port security max mac count command to set the number of addresses and then use the port security command to enable security on the port Use the no port security max mac count command to disable port security and reset the maximum number of addresses to the defa
462. rt the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch Otherwise you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management station and place the host public key in it An entry for a public key in the known hosts file would appear similar to the following example 10 1 0 54 1024 35 156849954018676692593339467 750546173253 13674890836547254 15020245593 199868544358361651999923329781 766065830956 10825913212890233 7654680172627257 1413428762941301196195566782 595664 10486957427888146206 519417467729848654686157 177393901647793559423035774 13098022737087794545 2408397 17526463580581 767 16709574804776117 Import Client s Public Key to the Switch Use the copy tftp public key command to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH clients granted management access to the switch Note that these clients must be configured locally on the switch via the User Accounts page as described on page 3 46 The clients are subsequently authenticated using these keys The current System Management Commands 4 firmware only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the following example for an RSA Version 1 key 1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880 05553616163105177594083868631109291232226828519254374603100937187721199 69631781366277414168985132049117204830339254324101637997592371449011938 00609025394840848271781943722884025331159521348610229029789827213532671 3
463. rtup Size bytes y Dwa fg cfe Config File AGY re Conio File Operstion_Cede Y ARTT Figure 3 13 Setting the Startup Configuration Settings CLI Enter the IP address of the TFTP server specify the source file on the server set the startup file name on the switch and then restart the switch Console copy tftp startup config 4 64 TFTP server ip address 192 168 1 23 Source configuration file name config 1 Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console freload To select another configuration file as the start up configuration use the boot system command and then restart the switch Console config Console config boot system config startup new 4 69 Console config exit Console reload 4 22 Console Port Settings You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100 compatible device to the switch s serial console port Management access through the console port is controlled by various parameters including a password timeouts and basic communication settings These parameters can be configured via the web or CLI interface Command Attributes Login Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval the connection is terminated for the session Range 0 300 seconds Default 0 seconds Exec Timeou
464. rver host Specifies the TACACS server GC 4 77 tacacs server port Specifies the TACACS server network port GC 4 77 tacacs server key Sets the TACACS encryption key GC 4 78 show tacacs server Shows the current TACACS settings GC 4 78 tacacs server host This command specifies the TACACS server Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server host host_ip_address no tacacs server host host_ip_address IP address of a TACACS server Default Setting 10 11 12 13 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config tacacs server host 192 168 1 25 Console config tacacs server port This command specifies the TACACS server network port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server port port_number no tacacs server port port_number TACACS server TCP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default Setting 49 4 77 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config tacacs server port 181 Console config tacacs server key This command sets the TACACS encryption key Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server key key_string no tacacs server key key_string Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for the client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example
465. s The number of manually configured addresses e Current Static Address Table Lists all the static addresses e Interface Port or trunk associated with the device assigned a static address MAC Address Physical address of a device mapped to this interface e VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 6 Web only 3 99 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Address Table Static Addresses Specify the interface the MAC address and VLAN then click Add Static Address Static Addresses Static Address Counts 00 E0 29 94 34 DE VLAN 1 Unit 1 Port 1 Permanent Current Static Address Table Interface Port l C Trunk z MAC Address a COG KX VLAN 1 Add Static Address Remove Static Address Figure 3 61 Configuring a Static Address Table CLI This example adds an address to the static address table but sets it to be deleted when the switch is reset Console config mac address table static 00 12 cf 94 34 de interface ethernet 1 1 vlan 1 delete on reset 4 140 Console config Displaying the Address Table The Dynamic Address Table contains the MAC addresses learned by monitoring the source address for traffic entering the switch When the destination address for inbound traffic is found in the database the packets intended for that address are forwarded directly to the associated port Otherwise the traffic is flooded to all ports Command Attributes
466. s Syntax cluster ip pool lt i p address gt no cluster ip pool ip address The base IP address for IP addresses assigned to cluster Members The IP address must start 10 x x x Default Setting 10 254 254 1 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage An internal IP address pool is used to assign IP addresses to Member switches in the cluster Internal cluster IP addresses are in the form 10 x x member ID Only the base IP address of the pool needs to be set since Member IDs can only be between 1 and 16 e Seta Cluster IP Pool that does not conflict with addresses in the network IP 4 239 4 Command Line Interface subnet Cluster IP addresses are assigned to switches when they become Members and are used for communication between Member switches and the Commander e You cannot change the cluster IP pool when the switch is currently in Commander mode Commander mode must first be disabled Example Console config cluster ip pool 10 2 3 4 Console config cluster member This command configures a Candidate switch as a cluster Member Use the no form to remove a Member switch from the cluster Syntax cluster member mac address lt mac address gt id lt member id gt no cluster member id lt member id gt mac address The MAC address of the Candidate switch member id The ID number to assign to the Member switch Range 1 16 Default Setting No Members Command Mode Global Con
467. s IP address for an MVR multicast group Range 224 0 1 0 239 255 255 255 Default Setting Displays global configuration settings for MVR when no keywords are used Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Enter this command without any keywords to display the global settings for MVR Use the interface keyword to display information about interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN Or use the members keyword to display information about multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN Example The following shows the global MVR settings Console show mvr MVR Status enable MVR running status TRUE MVR multicast vlan 1 MVR Max Multicast Groups 255 MVR Current multicast groups 10 Console Table 4 73 show mvr display description Field Description MVR Status Shows if MVR is globally enabled on the switch MVR running status Indicates whether or not all necessary conditions in the MVR environment are satisfied MVR multicast vian Shows the VLAN used to transport all MVR multicast traffic MVR Max Multicast Groups Shows the maximum number of multicast groups which can assigned to the MVR VLAN MVR Current multicast groups Shows the number of multicast groups currently assigned to the MVR VLAN 4 221 4 Command Line Interface The following displays information about the interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN Console show mvr interface Fort Type Status Immediate Leave ethl 1 SO
468. s Continued Function Parameter Default Port Configuration Admin Status Enabled Auto negotiation Enabled Flow Control Disabled Rate Limiting Input and output limits Disabled Port Trunking Static Trunks None LACP all ports Disabled Broadcast Storm Status Enabled all ports Protection Broadcast Limit Rate 500 packets per second Spanning Tree Status Enabled RSTP Algorithm Defaults All values based on IEEE 802 1w Fast Forwarding Edge Port Disabled Address Table Aging Time 300 seconds Virtual LANs Default VLAN 1 PVID 1 Acceptable Frame Type All Ingress Filtering Enabled Switchport Mode Egress Mode Hybrid tagged untagged frames GVRP global Disabled GVRP port interface Disabled Traffic Prioritization Ingress Port Priority 0 Weighted Round Robin Queue 0123 Weight 124 8 IP DSCP Priority Disabled IP Settings IP Address DHCP assigned otherwise 192 168 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 DHCP Client Enabled BOOTP Disabled Multicast Filtering IGMP Snooping Snooping Enabled Querier Enabled Multicast VLAN Registration Disabled 4 Introduction Table 1 2 System Defaults Continued Function Parameter Default System Log Status Enabled Messages Logged Levels 0 7 all Messages Logged to Flash Levels 0 3 SMTP Email Alerts Event Handler Enabled but no server d
469. s Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax switchport priority default default priority id no switchport priority default default priority id The priority number for untagged ingress traffic The priority is a number from 0 to 7 Seven is the highest priority 4 185 A Command Line Interface Default Setting The priority is not set and the default value for untagged frames received on the interface is zero Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP DSCP and default switchport priority The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types i e receives both untagged and tagged frames This priority does not apply to IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frames If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frame the IEEE 802 1p User Priority bits will be used e This switch provides eight priority queues for each port It is configured to use Weighted Round Robin which can be viewed with the show queue bandwidth command Inbound frames that do not have VLAN tags are tagged with the input port s default ingress user priority and then placed in the appropriate priority queue at the output port The default priority for all ingress ports is zero Therefore any inbound frames that do not have priority tags will be placed in queue 0 of the output port Note that if the output port is an untag
470. s MAC ACL configuration mode Use the no form to remove the specified ACL Syntax no access list mac acl_name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list To create an ACL you must add at least one rule to the list To remove a rule use the no permit or no deny command followed by the exact text of a previously configured rule e An ACL can contain up to 32 rules Example Console config access list mac jerry Console config mac acl Related Commands permit deny 4 96 mac access group 4 98 show mac access list 4 97 4 95 4 Command Line Interface permit deny MAC ACL This command adds a rule to a MAC ACL The rule filters packets matching a specified MAC source or destination address i e physical layer address or Ethernet protocol type Use the no form to remove a rule Syntax no permit deny any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid vid vid bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask Note The default is for Ethernet II packets no permit deny tagged eth2 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid vid v
471. s mode to modify any settings on the switch You must also enter Global Configuration mode prior to enabling some of the other configuration modes including Interface Configuration Line Configuration and VLAN Database Configuration See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 5 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console configure Console config Related Commands end 4 22 show history This command shows the contents of the command history buffer Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The history buffer size is fixed at 10 Execution commands and 10 Configuration commands Example In this example the show history command lists the contents of the command history buffer Console show history Execution command history 2 config 1 show history Configuration command history 4 interface vlan 1 3 exit 2 interface vlan 1 1 end Console 4 21 4 Command Line Interface The command repeats commands from the Execution command history buffer when you are in Normal Exec or Privileged Exec Mode and commands from the Configuration command history buffer when you are in any of the configuration modes In this example the 2 command repeats the second command in the Execution history buffer config Console 2 Console config Console config reload This command restarts the system Note When the system is
472. s of an PE 4 125 interface 4 184 Priority Commands 4 queue mode This command sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round Robin WRR for the class of service CoS priority queues Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax queue mode strict wrr no queue mode strict Services the egress queues in sequential order transmitting all traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues e wrr Weighted Round Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using scheduling weights 1 2 4 8 for queues 0 3 respectively Default Setting Weighted Round Robin Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are serviced or use Weighted Round Robin WRR queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue This prevents the head of line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing Example The following example sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode Console config queue mode strict Console config switchport priority default This command sets a priority for incoming untagged frame
473. s or class maps for each of the following access list types MAC ACL IP ACL including Standard ACL and Extended ACL e Policing is based on a token bucket where bucket depth i e the maximum burst before the bucket overflows is by specified the burst byte field and the average rate tokens are removed from the bucket is by specified by the rate bps option Example This example creates a policy called rd_policy uses the class command to specify the previously defined rd_class uses the set command to classify the service that incoming packets will receive and then uses the police command to limit the average bandwidth to 100 000 Kbps the burst rate to 1522 bytes and configure the response to drop any violating packets Console config policy map rd_policy Console config pmap class rd_class Console config pmap c set ip dscp 3 Console config pmap c police 100000 1522 exceed action drop Console config pmap c 4 198 Quality of Service Commands 4 service policy This command applies a policy map defined by the policy map command to the ingress queue of a particular interface Use the no form to remove the policy map from this interface Syntax no service policy input policy map name input Apply to the input traffic policy map name Name of the policy map for this interface Range 1 16 characters Default Setting No policy map is attached to an interface Command Mode Inte
474. s powered on To automatically configure the switch by communicating with BOOTP or DHCP address allocation servers on the network complete the following steps 1 From the Global Configuration mode prompt type interface vlan 1 to access the interface configuration mode Press lt Enter gt 2 At the interface configuration mode prompt use one of the following commands To obtain IP settings via DHCP type ip address dhcp and press lt Enter gt To obtain IP settings via BOOTP type ip address bootp and press lt Enter gt 3 Type end to return to the Privileged Exec mode Press lt Enter gt 4 Type ip dhcp restart to begin broadcasting service requests Press lt Enter gt 2 Initial Configuration 5 Wait a few minutes and then check the IP configuration settings by typing the show ip interface command Press lt Enter gt 6 Then save your configuration changes by typing copy running config startup config Enter the startup file name and press lt Enter gt Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address dhcp Console config if end Console ip dhcp restart Console show ip interface IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode User specified Console copy running config startup config Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Enabling SNMP Mana
475. s used Cannot access the on board configuration program via a serial port connection Be sure you have set the terminal emulator program to VT100 compatible 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity and 9600 bps Check that the null modem serial cable conforms to the pin out connections provided in the Installation Guide Forgot or lost the password Contact your local distributor B Troubleshooting Using System Logs If a fault does occur refer to the Installation Guide to ensure that the problem you encountered is actually caused by the switch If the problem appears to be caused by the switch follow these steps a fF oN gt 6 Enable logging Set the error messages reported to include all categories Designate the SNMP host that is to receive the error messages Repeat the sequence of commands or other actions that lead up to the error Make a list of the commands or circumstances that led to the fault Also make a list of any error messages displayed Contact your distributor s service engineer For example Console config logging on Console config logging history flash 7 Console config snmp server host 192 168 1 23 Glossary Access Control List ACL ACLs can limit network traffic and restrict access to certain users or devices by checking each packet for certain IP or MAC i e Layer 2 information Boot Protocol BOOTP BOOTP is used to provide bootup informa
476. s used to send email messages between servers The messages can be retrieved using POP or IMAP clients Command Attributes e Admin Status Enables disables the SMTP function Default Enabled Email Source Address This command specifies SMTP servers email addresses that can send alert messages 3 28 Basic Configuration 3 Severity Specifies the degree of urgency that the message carries Debugging Sends a debugging notification Level 7 e Information Sends informatative notification only Level 6 e Notice Sends notification of a normal but significant condition such as a cold start Level 5 e Warning Sends notification of a warning condition such as return false or unexpected return Level 4 Error Sends notification that an error conditions has occurred such as invalid input or default used Level 3 e Critical Sends notification that a critical condition has occurred such as memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted Level 2 e Alert Sends urgent notification that immediate action must be taken Level 1 e Emergency Sends an emergency notification that the system is now unusable Level 0 e SMTP Server List Specifies a list of recipient SMTP servers SMTP Server Specifies a new SMTP server address to add to the SMTP Server List Email Destination Address List Specifies a list of recipient Email Destination Address Email
477. sages GC 4 51 destination email logging sendmail Enables SMTP event handling GC 4 52 show logging sendmail Displays SMTP event handler settings NE PE 4 52 logging sendmail host This command specifies SMTP servers that will be sent alert messages Use the no form to remove an SMTP server Syntax no logging sendmail host ip_address ip_address IP address of an SMTP server that will be sent alert messages for event handling Default Setting None 4 49 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You can specify up to three SMTP servers for event handing However you must enter a separate command to specify each server To send email alerts the switch first opens a connection sends all the email alerts waiting in the queue one by one and finally closes the connection To open a connection the switch first selects the server that successfully sent mail during the last connection or the first server configured by this command If it fails to send mail the switch selects the next server in the list and tries to send mail again If it still fails the system will repeat the process at a periodic interval A trap will be triggered if the switch cannot successfully open a connection Example Console config logging sendmail host 192 168 1 200 Console config logging sendmail level This command sets the severity threshold used to trigger alert messages
478. same local network A switch cluster has a Commander unit that is used to manage all other Member switches in the cluster The management station can use both the web interface and Telnet to communicate directly while the Commander throught its IP address and the Commander manages Member switches using cluster internal IP addresses There can be up to 16 Member switches in one cluster Cluster switches are limited to within a single IP subnet 3 194 Switch Clustering 3 Once a switch has been configured to be a cluster Commander it automatically discovers other cluster enabled switches in the network These Candidate switches only become cluster Members when manually selected by the administrator through the management station After the Commander and Members have been configured any switch in the cluster can be managed from the web interface by choosing the Member ID from the Cluster drop down menu From the Commander CLI prompt use the command command see 4 240 to connect to the Member switch Cluster Commander x Commander Unit 1x Mode Active x Figure 3 122 Cluster Member Choice Cluster Configuration To create a switch cluster first be sure that clustering is enabled on the switch the default is enabled then set the switch as a Cluster Commander Set a Cluster IP Pool that does not conflict with the network IP subnet Cluster IP addresses are assigned to switches whe
479. screen to set the switch to QinQ mode before configuring a tunnel port see Displaying Basic VLAN Information on page 3 126 e Use the TPID field to set a custom 802 1Q ethertype value on the selected interface This feature allows the switch to interoperate with third party switches that do not use the standard 0x8100 ethertype to identify 802 1Q tagged frames For example 0x1234 is set as the custom 802 1Q ethertype on a trunk port incoming frames containing that ethertype are assigned to the VLAN contained in the tag following the ethertype field as they would be with a standard 802 1Q trunk Frames arriving on the port containing any other ethertype are looked upon as untagged frames and assigned to the native VLAN of that port All members of a VLAN should be set to the same ethertype Command Attributes Mode Set the VLAN membership mode of the port Default Normal Normal The port operates in its normal VLAN mode 802 1Q Tunnel Configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling QinQ for a client access port to segregate and preserve customer VLAN IDs for traffic crossing the service provider network 3 138 Configuring IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling 3 802 1Q Tunnel Uplink Configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling QinQ for an uplink port to another device within the service provider network Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Tunnel Configuration or Tunnel Trunk Configuration Set the mode for a tunnel access port to 802
480. selected class entry Modify the criteria used to classify ingress traffic on this page Add Class Opens the Class Configuration page Enter a class name and description on this page and click Add to open the Match Class Settings page Enter the criteria used to classify ingress traffic on this page Remove Class Removes the selected class Class Configuration Class Name Name of the class map Range 1 16 characters Type Only one match command is permitted per class map so the match any field refers to the criteria specified by the lone match command Description A brief description of a class map Range 1 64 characters Add Adds the specified class Back Returns to previous page with making any changes Match Class Settings Class Name List of class maps ACL List Name of an access control list Any type of ACL can be specified including standard or extended IP ACLs and MAC ACLs Range 1 16 characters IP DSCP A DSCP value Range 0 63 IP Precedence An IP Precedence value Range 0 7 VLAN A VLAN Range 1 4094 Add Adds specified criteria to the class Up to 16 items are permitted per class Remove Deletes the selected criteria from the class 3 156 Quality of Service 3 Web Click QoS DiffServ then click Add Class to create a new class or Edit Rules to change the rules of an existing class Class Map Modify Name
481. sendmail level 3 Console config logging sendmail source email bill this company com Console config logging sendmail destination email ted this company com Console config logging sendmail Console Resetting the System Web Click System Reset Click the Reset button to reboot the switch When prompted confirm that you want reset the switch Reset Figure 3 21 Resetting the System CLI Use the reload command to restart the switch When prompted confirm that you want to reset the switch Console reload 4 22 System will be restarted continue lt y n gt y Note When restarting the system it will always run the Power On Self Test 3 30 Basic Configuration 3 Setting the System Clock Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP allows the switch to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a time server SNTP or NTP Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries You can also manually set the clock using the CLI See calendar set on page 4 56 If the clock is not set the switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup When the SNTP client is enabled the switch periodically sends a request for a time update to a configured time server You can configure up to three time server IP addresses The switch will attempt to poll each server in the configured sequence Con
482. server port This command sets the RADIUS server network port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server port port_number no radius server port port_number RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default Setting 1812 4 74 Authentication Commands 4 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server port 181 Console config radius server key This command sets the RADIUS encryption key Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server key key_string no radius server key key_string Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server key green Console config radius server retransmit This command sets the number of retries Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server retransmit number_of_retries no radius server retransmit number_of_retries Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server Range 1 30 Default Setting 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server retransmit 5 Console config 4 75 A Command Line Interface radius server timeout This command sets the interval between transmitting
483. show lacp sysid System Priority Port Channel System MAC Address 1 32768 00 12 CF 8F 2C A7 2 32768 00 12 CF 8F 2C A7 3 32768 00 12 CF 8F 2C A7 4 32768 00 12 CF 8F 2C A7 Console Table 4 50 show lacp sysid display description Field Description Channel group A link aggregation group configured on this switch System Priority LACP system priority for this channel group System MAC Address System MAC address The LACP system priority and system MAC address are concatenated to form the LAG system ID 4 139 4 Command Line Interface Address Table Commands These commands are used to configure the address table for filtering specified addresses displaying current entries clearing the table or setting the aging time Table 4 51 Address Table Commands Command Function Mode Page mac address table static Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN GC 4 140 clear mac address table Removes any learned entries from the forwarding database PE 4 141 dynamic show mac address table Displays entries in the bridge forwarding database PE 4 141 mac address table Sets the aging time of the address table GC 4 142 aging time show mac address table Shows the aging time for the address table PE 4 143 aging time mac address table static This command maps a static address to a destination port in a VLAN Use the no form to remove an address Syntax mac addre
484. signments of ACLs Command Mode Privileged Executive Example Console show access group Interface ethernet 1 1 IP access list jerry in Interface ethernet 1 26 IP access list jerry in Console 4 99 4 Command Line Interface SNMP Commands Controls access to this switch from management stations using the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP as well as the error types sent to trap managers SNMP Version 3 also provides security features that cover message integrity authentication and encryption as well as controlling user access to specific areas of the MIB tree To use SNMPV3 first set an SNMP engine ID or accept the default specify read and write access views for the MIB tree configure SNMP user groups with the required security model i e SNMP v1 v2c or v3 and security level i e authentication and privacy and then assign SNMP users to these groups along with their specific authentication and privacy passwords Table 4 37 SNMP Commands Command Function Mode Page snmp server Enables the SNMP agent GC 4 101 show snmp Displays the status of SNMP communications NE PE 4 101 snmp server community Sets up the community access string to permit access to GC 4 102 SNMP commands snmp server contact Sets the system contact string GC 4 103 snmp server location Sets the system location string GC 4 103 snmp server host Specifies the recipie
485. sole config mvr group 228 1 23 1 10 Console config 4 218 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 mvr Interface Configuration This command configures an interface as an MVR receiver or source port using the type keyword enables immediate leave capability using the immediate keyword or configures an interface as a static member of the MVR VLAN using the group keyword Use the no form to restore the default settings Syntax no mvr type receiver source immediate group ip address receiver Configures the interface as a subscriber port that can receive multicast data source Configure the interface as an uplink port that can send and receive multicast data for the configured multicast groups immediate Configures the switch to immediately remove an interface from a multicast stream as soon as it receives a leave message for that group jp address Statically configures an interface to receive multicast traffic from the IP address specified for an MVR multicast group Range 224 0 1 0 239 255 255 255 Default Setting The port type is not defined Immediate leave is disabled e No receiver port is a member of any configured multicast group Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 219 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage A port which is not configured as an MVR receiver or source port can use IGMP snooping to join or leave multicast groups using the standard rules
486. specific MAC address or MAC to specify an address range with the Address and Bitmask fields Options Any Host MAC Default Any e Source Destination MAC Address Source or destination MAC address e Source Destination Bitmask Hexadecimal mask for source or destination MAC address e VID VLAN ID Range 1 4094 VID Mask VLAN bitmask Range 1 4094 Ethernet Type This option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets Range 600 fff hex A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060 A few of the more common types include 0800 IP 0806 ARP 8137 IPX Ethernet Type Bitmask Protocol bitmask Range 600 fff hex e Packet Format This attribute includes the following packet types Any Any Ethernet packet type Untagged eth2 Untagged Ethernet II packets Untagged 802 3 Untagged Ethernet 802 3 packets Tagged 802 3 Tagged Ethernet 802 3 packets Tagged 802 3 Tagged Ethernet 802 3 packets Command Usage Egress MAC ACLs only work for destination mac known packets not for multicast broadcast or destination mac unknown packets Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Specify the source and or destination addresses Select the address type Any Host or MAC If you select Host enter a specific address e g 11 22 33 44 55 66 If you select MAC enter a base address and a hexadecimal bitmask for
487. splays this information as Priority for untagged traffic 3 144 Class of Service Configuration 3 Web Click Priority Default Port Priority or Default Trunk Priority Modify the default priority for any interface then click Apply Default Port Priority Port Default Priority 0 7 Number of Egress Traffic Classes Trunk 1 0 4 2 0 4 3 0 4 4 0 4 5 0 4 6 0 4 7 0 4 Figure 3 84 Port Priority Configuration CLI This example assigns a default priority of 5 to port 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport priority default 5 Console config if end Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 3 Information of Eth 1 3 Broadcast threshold Enabled 500 packets second LACP status Disabled Ingress rate limit enable K bits per second 25 VLAN membership mode Hybrid Ingress rule Enabled Acceptable frame type All frames Native VLAN 1 Priority for untagged traffic 5 GVRP status Disabled Allowed VLAN LiFe Forbidden VLAN Private VLAN mode NONE Private VLAN host association NONE Private VLAN mapping NONE Console 4 116 4 185 4 125 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues This switch processes Class of Service CoS priority tagged traffic by using four priority queues for each port with service schedules based on strict or Weighted Round Robin WRR Up to eight separate traffic priorities are defined in IEEE 802 1p The default p
488. ss of the host the targeted recipient Maximum host addresses 5 trap destination IP address entries inform Notifications are sent as inform messages Note that this option is only available for version 2c and 3 hosts Default traps are used retries The maximum number of times to resend an inform message if the recipient does not acknowledge receipt Range 0 255 Default 3 seconds The number of seconds to wait for an acknowledgment before resending an inform message Range 0 2147483647 centiseconds Default 1500 centiseconds community string Password like community string sent with the notification operation to SNMP V1 and V2c hosts Although you can set this string using the snmp server host command by itself we recommend that you define this string using the snmp server community command prior to using the snmp server host command Maximum length 32 characters version Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP Version 1 2c or 3 traps Range 1 2c 3 Default 1 auth noauth priv This group uses SNMPv3 with authentication no authentication or with authentication and privacy See Simple Network Management Protocol on page 5 1 for further information about these authentication and encryption options port Host UDP port to use Range 1 65535 Default 162 Default Setting e Host Address None e Notification Type Traps 4 104 SNMP Commands 4 SNMP Version 1 U
489. ss table static mac address interface interface vlan vlan id action no mac address table static mac address vlan vlan id mac address MAC address interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 26 50 port channel channel id Range 1 32 e vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 action delete on reset Assignment lasts until the switch is reset permanent Assignment is permanent Default Setting No static addresses are defined The default mode is permanent Command Mode Global Configuration 4 140 Address Table Commands 4 Command Usage The static address for a host device can be assigned to a specific port within a specific VLAN Use this command to add static addresses to the MAC Address Table Static addresses have the following characteristics Static addresses will not be removed from the address table when a given interface link is down Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table A static address cannot be learned on another port until the address is removed with the no form of this command Example Console config mac address table static 00 12 cf 94 34 de interface ethernet 1 1 vlan 1 delete on reset Console config clear mac address table dynamic
490. ssigns a specific privilege level for each user name and password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server e You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you enter authentication enable radius tacacs local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted on the TACACS server If the TACACS server is not available the local user name and password is checked Example Console config authentication enable radius Console config Related Commands enable password sets the password for changing command modes 4 26 RADIUS Client Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch Table 4 29 RADIUS Client Commands Command Function Mode Page radius server host Specifies the RADIUS server GC 4 74 radius server port Sets the RADIUS server network port GC 4 74 radius server key Sets the RADIUS encryption key GC 4 75 radius server timeout Sets the interval between s
491. t Sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected If user input is not detected within the timeout interval the current session is terminated Range 0 65535 seconds Default 600 seconds Password Threshold Sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts When the logon attempt threshold is reached the 3 21 3 Configuring the Switch system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time set by the Silent Time parameter before allowing the next logon attempt Range 0 120 Default 3 attempts Silent Time Sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts has been exceeded Range 0 65535 Default 0 e Data Bits Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and generated by the console port If parity is being generated specify 7 data bits per character If no parity is required specify 8 data bits per character Default 8 bits e Parity Defines the generation of a parity bit Communication protocols provided by some terminals can require a specific parity bit setting Specify Even Odd or None Default None Speed Sets the terminal line s baud rate for transmit to terminal and receive from terminal Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial port Range 9600 19200 38400 baud or Auto Default Auto
492. t Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 e Default Ethernet Half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 Fast Ethernet Half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet Full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 3 114 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 Admin Link Type The link type attached to this interface Point to Point A connection to exactly one other bridge Shared A connection to two or more bridges Auto The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point to point link or to shared media This is the default setting Admin Edge Port Fast Forwarding You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device Default Disabled e Migr
493. t IP address End IP address dey 192 168 1 19 192 168 1 19 2 192 168 1225 192 168 1 30 SNMP Client Start IP address End IP address 1s 192 168 1 19 192 168 1 19 2 192 168 1225 192 168 1 30 TELNET Client Start IP address End IP address 1 192 168 1 19 192 168 1 19 2 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Console Web Server Commands Table 4 12 Web Server Commands Command Function Mode Page ip http port Specifies the port to be used by the web browser interface GC 4 29 ip http server Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from a browser GC 4 30 ip http secure server Enables HTTPS for encrypted communications GC 4 30 ip http secure port Specifies the UDP port number for HTTPS GC 4 31 ip http port This command specifies the TCP port number used by the web browser interface Use the no form to use the default port Syntax ip http port port number no ip http port port number The TCP port to be used by the browser interface Range 1 65535 Default Setting 80 Command Mode Global Configuration 4 29 4 Command Line Interface Example Console config ip http port 769 Console config Related Commands ip http server 4 30 ip http server This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from a browser Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip http server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Globa
494. t ports The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports All ports in a trunk must be configured in an identical manner including communication mode i e speed duplex mode and flow control VLAN assignments and CoS settings All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN via the specified port channel STP VLAN and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk via the specified port channel Dynamically Creating a Port Channel Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria Ports must have the same LACP system priority Ports must have the same port admin key Ethernet Interface If the port channel admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed i e it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group However if the port channel admin key is set then the port admin key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group If a link goes down LACP port priority is used to select the backup link channel group This command adds a port to a trunk Use the no form to remove a port from a trunk Syntax channel group channel id no channel group channel id Trunk index Range 1 32 Default Setting The current port will be a
495. t used Otherwise enter an encrypted password A minimum of eight characters is required priv des56 Uses SNMPVv3 with privacy with DES56 encryption priv password Privacy password Enter as plain text if the encrypted option is not used Otherwise enter an encrypted password 4 113 A Command Line Interface Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The SNMP engine ID is used to compute the authentication privacy digests from the password You should therefore configure the engine ID with the snmp server engine id command before using this configuration command e Before you configure a remote user use the snmp server engine id command page 4 107 to specify the engine ID for the remote device where the user resides Then use the snmp server user command to specify the user and the IP address for the remote device where the user resides The remote agent s SNMP engine ID is used to compute authentication privacy digests from the user s password If the remote engine ID is not first configured the snmp server user command specifying a remote user will fail e SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the authoritative agent For informs the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent You therefore need to configure the remote agent s SNMP engine ID before you can send proxy requests or informs to it Example Console config snmp server user steve group r d v3 auth md5
496. taching a Policy Map to Ingress Queues Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Query Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters Enabling IGMP Immediate Leave Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services Assigning Ports to Multicast Services IGMP Filtering and Throttling Enabling IGMP Filtering and Throttling Configuring IGMP Filtering and Throttling for Interfaces Configuring IGMP Filter Profiles Multicast VLAN Registration Configuring Global MVR Settings Displaying MVR Interface Status Displaying Port Members of Multicast Groups Configuring MVR Interface Status Assigning Static Multicast Groups to Interfaces Configuring Domain Name Service Configuring General DNS Service Parameters Configuring Static DNS Host to Address Entries Displaying the DNS Cache DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping Configuration DHCP Snooping VLAN Configuration 3 142 3 143 3 144 3 144 3 144 3 145 3 147 3 147 3 148 3 149 3 149 3 149 3 150 3 152 3 153 3 154 3 155 3 155 3 158 3 161 3 162 3 162 3 163 3 164 3 165 3 166 3 167 3 168 3 169 3 170 3 171 3 172 3 174 3 175 3 176 3 178 3 179 3 180 3 181 3 181 3 183 3 185 3 186 3 187 3 188 Contents DHCP Snooping Information Option Configuration 3 188 DHCP Snooping Port Configuration 3 189 DHCP Snooping Binding Information 3 190 IP Source Guard 3 191 IP Source Guard Port Conf
497. tch 3 165 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click IGMP Snooping Multicast Router Port Information Select the required VLAN ID from the scroll down list to display the associated multicast routers Multicast Router Port Information VLAN ID 1 v Multicast Router List Init Poni i Stobe Figure 3 99 Displaying Multicast Router Port Information CLI This example shows that Port 11 has been statically configured as a port attached to a multicast router Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 4 210 VLAN M cast Router Port Type 1 Eth 1 11 Static Console Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your switch you can manually configure the interface and a specified VLAN to join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router This can ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the switch Command Attributes Interface Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list e VLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router Port or Trunk Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router 3 166 Multicast Filtering 3 Web C
498. tdown switchport broadcast packet rate clear counters show interfaces status show interfaces counters show interfaces switchport Mirror Port Commands port monitor show port monitor Rate Limit Commands rate limit Link Aggregation Commands channel group lacp lacp system priority lacp admin key Ethernet Interface lacp admin key Port Channel lacp port priority show lacp Address Table Commands mac address table static clear mac address table dynamic show mac address table mac address table aging time show mac address table aging time Spanning Tree Commands spanning tree spanning tree mode spanning tree forward time spanning tree hello time spanning tree max age Contents 4 108 4 109 4 110 4 110 4 112 4 113 4 115 4 116 4 116 4 117 4 117 4 118 4 119 4 120 4 121 4 122 4 122 4 123 4 124 4 125 4 127 4 127 4 128 4 129 4 129 4 130 4 131 4 132 4 133 4 134 4 135 4 136 4 136 4 140 4 140 4 141 4 141 4 142 4 143 4 144 4 145 4 145 4 146 4 147 4 148 ix Contents spanning tree priority 4 148 spanning tree pathcost method 4 149 spanning tree transmission limit 4 150 spanning tree mst configuration 4 150 mst vian 4 151 mst priority 4 151 name 4 152 revision 4 153 max hops 4 153 spanning tree spanning disabled 4 154 spanning tree cost 4 154 spanning tree port priority 4 155 spanning tree edge port 4 156 spanning tree portfast 4 156 spanning tree link type 4 157 spanning tree mst cost 4 158 spa
499. te e LACP Activity Activity control value with regard to this link 0 Passive 1 Active 3 88 Port Configuration 3 Web Click Port LACP Port Internal Information Select a port channel to display the corresponding information LACP Port Internal Information interface Pon 3 Trunk ID 1 LACP System Pricety 32768 LACP Pon Prority 32768 Admin Key 3 Oper Key 3 LACPDUS Interval secs W seconds Admin State Expred Iper State Expired Admin State Detautted Oper State Defauted Admin State Distributing per State Distributing d Admin State Colecting per State Collechng v Admin State Aggregation W Oper State Aggregation v Admin State Timeout Long Oper State Timeout Long Admin State LACP Actiety Oper State LACP Actwity Y Figure 3 55 LACP Port Internal Information CLI The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and operational state for the local side of port channel 1 Console show lacp 1 internal 4 136 Port channel 1 Oper Key 120 Admin Key 0 Eth 1 1 LACPDUs Internal 30 sec LACP System Priority 3 LACP Port Priority 128 Admin Key 120 Oper Key 120 Admin State defaulted aggregation long timeout LACP activity Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity 3 89 3 Configuring the Switch Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side You can display configuration setti
500. te agent s SNMP engine ID before you can send proxy requests or informs to it A new engine ID can be specified by entering 5 to 32 octets of hexadecimal characters that is 9 to 64 hexadecimal characters If an odd number of hexadecimal characters are specified a trailing zero is added to the value to fill the octet For example entering the value 123456789 results in an engine ID of 4234567890 Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID z SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Remote Engine ID Remote IP Host Action Add E Figure 3 28 Setting a Remote Engine ID CLI This example specifies a remote SNMPv3 engine ID Console config snmp server engineID remote 54321fedcba0 192 168 1 19 4 107 Console config exit Console show snmp engine id 4 107 Local SNMP engineID 83010000030000352810030000 Local SNMP engineBoots 1 Remote SNMP engineID 54321fedcba0 IP address 192 168 1 25 Console Configuring SNMPv3 Users Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a unique name Users must be configured with a specific security level and assigned to a group The SNMPv3 group restricts users to a specific read write and notify view Command Attributes User Name The name of user connecting to the SNMP agent Range 1 32 characters Group Name The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned Range 1 32 characters Model The user security model SNMP v1 v2c or v3 3 37 3 Config
501. ted connecting authenticating authenticated aborting held force_authorized force_unauthorized Reauth Count Number of times connecting state is re entered Backend State Machine State Current state including request response success fail timeout idle initialize Request Count Number of EAP Request packets sent to the Supplicant without receiving a response Identifier Server Identifier carried in the most recent EAP Success Failure or Request packet received from the Authentication Server Reauthentication State Machine State Current state including initialize reauthenticate 4 87 A Command Line Interface Example Console show dot1x Global 802 1X Parameters system auth control enable 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized 1 1 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 1 2 enabled Single Host auto yes 1 26 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is disabled on port 1 1 802 1X is enabled on port 1 2 reauth enabled Enable reauth period 1800 quiet period 30 tx period 40 supplicant timeout 30 server timeout 10 reauth max 2 max req 5 Status Authorized Operation mode Single Host Max count 5 Port control Auto Supplicant 00 12 cf 49 5e de Current Identifier 3 Authenticator State Machine State Authenticated Reauth Count 0 Backend State Machine State Idle Request Count 0 Identifier Server
502. ters interface interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 26 50 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting Shows the counters for all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed For a description of the items displayed by this command see Showing Port Statistics on page 3 95 4 124 Interface Commands Example 4 Console show interfaces counters ethernet 1 7 Ethernet 1 7 Iftable stats Octets input 30658 Octets output 196550 Unicast input 6 Unicast output 5 Discard input 0 Discard output 0 Error input 0 Error output 0 Unknown protos input 0 QLen output 0 Extended iftable stats Multi cast input 0 Multi cast output 3064 Broadcast input 262 Broadcast output 1 Ether like stats Alignment errors 0 FCS errors 0 Single Collision frames 0 Multiple collision frames 0 SQE Test errors 0 Deferred transmissions 0 Late collisions 0 Excessive collisions 0 Internal mac transmit errors 0 Internal mac receive errors 0 Frame too longs 0 Carrier sense errors 0 Symbol errors 0 RMON stats Drop events 0 Octets 227208 Packets 3338 Broadcast pkts 263 Multi cast pkts 3064 Undersize pkts 0 Oversize pkts 0 Fragments 0 Jabbers 0 CRC align errors 0 Collisions 0 Packet size lt 64 octets 3150 Pa
503. th enabled Enable reauth period quiet period 30 tx period 40 supplicant timeout server timeout 10 reauth max 2 max req 5 Status Operation mode Max count Port control Supplicant Current Identifier Authenticator State State Reauth Count 1800 30 Authorized Single Host 5 Auto 00 12 CF 49 5e dc 3 Machine Authenticated 0 Backend State Machine State Request Count Identifier Server Idle 0 2 Reauthentication State Machine State Initialize 802 1X is disabled on port 1 26 Console 3 65 3 Configuring the Switch Displaying 802 1X Statistics This switch can display statistics for dot1x protocol exchanges for any port Table 3 6 802 1X Statistics Parameter Description Rx EAPOL Start The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAPOL Logoff The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAPOL Invalid The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized Rx EAPOL Total The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP Resp Id The number of EAP Resp Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP Resp Oth The number of valid EAP Response frames other than Resp Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP
504. the network thereby balancing the traffic load preventing wide scale disruption when a bridge node in a single instance fails and allowing for faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree MSTI 0 that connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region This switch supports up to 58 instances You should try to group VLANs which cover the same general area of your network However remember that you must configure all bridges within the same MSTI Region page 4 152 with the same set of instances and the same instance on each bridge with the same set of VLANs Also note that RSTP treats each MSTI region as a single node connecting all regions to the Common Spanning Tree Example Console config mstp mst 1 vlan 2 5 Console config mstp mst priority This command configures the priority of a spanning tree instance Use the no form to restore the default Syntax mst instance_id priority priority no mst instance_id priority instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 e priority Priority of the a spanning tree instance Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 4 151 A Command Line Interface Default Setting 32768 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage e MST priority is used in s
505. the primary VLAN mapping for a promiscuous port 4 184 4 126 Mirror Port Commands 4 Mirror Port Commands This section describes how to mirror traffic from a source port to a target port Table 4 44 Mirror Port Commands Command Function Mode Page port monitor Configures a mirror session IC 4 127 show port monitor Shows the configuration for a mirror port PE 4 128 port monitor This command configures a mirror session Use the no form to clear a mirror session Syntax port monitor interface rx tx no port monitor interface e interface ethernet unit port source port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 26 50 e rx Mirror received packets e tx Mirror transmitted packets Default Setting No mirror session is defined Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet destination port Command Usage e You can mirror traffic from any source port to a destination port for real time analysis You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the destination port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive manner The destination port is set by specifying an Ethernet interface The mirror port and monitor port speeds should match otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port All mirror sessions must share the same destination port When mirroring port traffic the target port must be included in
506. the same LAG if 1 the LACP system priority matches 2 the LACP port admin key matches and 3 the LACP port channel key matches if configured e Ifthe port channel admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed i e it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group 4 134 Link Aggregation Commands 4 Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor admin key 120 Console config if lacp admin key Port Channel This command configures a port channel s LACP administration key string Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner admin key key no lacp actor partner admin key key The port channel admin key is used to identify a specific link aggregation group LAG during local LACP setup on this switch Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Port Channel Command Usage e Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if 1 the LACP system
507. the same VLAN as the source port 4 127 4 Command Line Interface Example The following example configures the switch to mirror received packets from port 6 to 11 Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 6 rx Console config if show port monitor This command displays mirror information Syntax show port monitor interface interface ethernet unit port source port e unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 26 50 Default Setting Shows all sessions Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the currently configured source port destination port and mirror mode i e RX TX Example The following shows mirroring configured from port 6 to port 11 Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 6 rx Console config if end Console show port monitor Port Mirroring Destination port listen port Eth1 11 Source port monitored port Eth1 6 Mode RX Console 4 128 Rate Limit Commands 4 Rate Limit Commands This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the network Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are d
508. the selected traffic class Range 1 15 Web Click Priority Queue Scheduling Select the required interface highlight a traffic class i e output queue enter a weight then click Apply Queue Scheduling Interface Port 21 x OTrunk y Traffic Class 0 weight 1 Traffic Class 1 weight2 WRR Setting Table Traffic Class 2 weight4 Traffic Class 3 weight 8 Weight Value 1 15 Figure 3 88 Configuring Queue Scheduling 11 CLI shows Queue ID 3 148 Class of Service Configuration 3 CLI The following example shows how to display the WRR weights assigned to each of the priority queues Console show queue bandwidth 4 188 Queue ID Weight Console Layer 3 4 Priority Settings Mapping Layer 3 4 Priorities to CoS Values This switch supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3 4 traffic to meet application requirements Traffic priorities can be specified in the IP header of a frame using the priority bits in the Type of Service ToS octet or the number of the TCP port If priority bits are used the ToS octet may contain three bits for IP Precedence or six bits for Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP service When these services are enabled the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the switch and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue Because different priority information may be contained in the traffic this switch maps priority values to t
509. the server while TACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet console jai jai Talol a 1 Client attempts management access 2 Switch contacts authentication server 3 Authentication server challenges client 4 Client responds with proper password or key 5 Authentication server approves access 6 Switch grants management access Command Usage By default management access is always checked against the authentication database stored on the local switch If a remote authentication server is used you must specify the authentication sequence and the corresponding parameters for the remote authentication protocol Local and remote logon authentication control management access via the console port web browser or Telnet e RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assign a specific privilege level for each user name password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server e You can specify up to three authentication methods for any user to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you select 1 RADIUS 2 TACACS and 3 Local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted using the TACACS server and finally the local user name and password is checked 3 48 User Authentication 3 Com
510. thernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 10 Gigabit Ethernet 200 20 000 Default Setting By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode e Ethernet half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 e Fast Ethernet half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 e Gigabit Ethernet full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 e 10 Gigabit Ethernet full duplex 1000 trunk 500 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Each spanning tree instance is associated with a unique set of VLAN IDs e This command is used by the multiple spanning tree algorithm to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to interfaces attached to faster media and higher values assigned to interfaces with slower media e Use the no spanning tree mst cost command to specify auto configuration mode e Path cost takes precedence over interface priority 4 158 Spanning Tree Commands 4 Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree mst 1 cost 50 Console config if Related Commands spanning tree mst port priority 4 159 spanning tree mst port priority This command configures the interface priority on
511. this page Remove Policy Deletes a specified policy Policy Configuration Policy Name Name of policy map Range 1 16 characters Description A brief description of a policy map Range 1 64 characters Add Adds the specified policy Back Returns to previous page with making any changes 3 158 Quality of Service 3 Policy Rule Settings Class Settings e Class Name Name of class map e Action Shows the service provided to ingress traffic by setting a CoS DSCP or IP Precedence value in a matching packet as specified in Match Class Settings on 3 155 Meter The maximum throughput and burst rate Rate kbps Rate in kilobits per second Burst byte Burst in bytes e Exceed Action Specifies whether the traffic that exceeds the specified rate will be dropped or the DSCP service level will be reduced e Remove Class Deletes a class Policy Options e Class Name Name of class map Action Configures the service provided to ingress traffic by setting a CoS DSCP or IP Precedence value in a matching packet as specified in Match Class Settings on 3 155 Range CoS 0 7 DSCP 0 63 IP Precedence 0 7 DSCP 0 63 e Meter Check this to define the maximum throughput burst rate and the action that results from a policy violation Rate kbps Rate in kilobits per second Range 1 100000 kbps or maximum port speed whichever is lower Bu
512. tically assigns MVR multicast streams to an interface 3 180 DNS General Configuration Enables DNS configures domain name and domain list and 3 181 specifies IP address of name servers for dynamic lookup Static Host Table Configures static entries for domain name to address mapping 3 183 Cache Displays cache entries discovered by designated name servers 3 185 DHCP Snooping 3 186 Configuration Enables DHCP Snooping and DHCP Snooping MAC Address 3 187 Verification VLAN Configuration Enables DHCP Snooping for a VLAN 3 188 Information Option Enables DHCP Snooping Information Option 3 188 Configuration Port Configuration Selects the DHCP Snooping Information Option policy 3 189 Binding Information Displays the DHCP Snooping binding information 3 190 IP Source Guard 3 191 Port Configuration Enables IP source guard and selects filter type per port 3 191 Static Configuration Adds a static addresses to the source guard binding table 3 192 Dynamic Information Displays the source guard binding table for a selected interface 3 193 Cluster 3 194 Configuration Globally enables clustering for the switch 3 188 Member Configuration Adds switch Members to the cluster 3 196 Member Information Displays cluster Member switch information 3 197 Candidate Information Displays network Candidate switch information 3 198 3 Configuring the Switch Basic Configuration Displaying System Information You can easily identify the system by disp
513. tication Network switches can provide open and easy access to network resources by simply attaching a client PC Although this automatic configuration and access is a desirable feature it also allows unauthorized personnel to easily intrude and possibly gain access to sensitive network data The IEEE 802 1X dot1X standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication Access to all switch ports in a network can be centrally controlled from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network 3 60 User Authentication 3 This switch uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol over LANs EAPOL P T 802 1x to exchange authentication client protocol messages with the client and a remote RADIUS E 1 Client attempts to access a switch port authentication server to verify 2 Switch sends client an identity request i R RADIUS 3 Client sends back identity information user identity and access server 4 Switch forwards this to authentication server rights When a client i e 5 Authentication server challenges client p 6 Client responds with proper credentials Supplicant connects to a 7 Authentication server approves access 8 Switch grants client access to this port switch port
514. ting 9600 Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial port Some baud rates available on devices connected to the port might not be supported The system indicates if the speed you selected is not supported Example To specify 57600 bps enter this command Console config line speed 57600 Console config line stopbits This command sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax stopbits 1 2 1 One stop bit e 2 Two stop bits Default Setting 1 stop bit Command Mode Line Configuration 4 17 4 Command Line Interface Example To specify 2 stop bits enter this command Console config line stopbits 2 Console config line disconnect This command terminates an SSH Telnet or console connection Syntax disconnect session id session id The session identifier for an SSH Telnet or console connection Range 0 4 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Specifying session identifier O will disconnect the console connection Specifying any other identifiers for an active session will disconnect an SSH or Telnet connection Example Console disconnect 1 Console Related Commands show ssh 4 40 show users 4 61 show line This command displays the terminal line s parameters Syntax show lin
515. tion for network devices including IP address information the address of the TFTP server that contains the devices system files and the name of the boot file Class of Service CoS CoS is supported by prioritizing packets based on the required level of service and then placing them in the appropriate output queue Data is transmitted from the queues using weighted round robin service to enforce priority service and prevent blockage of lower level queues Priority may be set according to the port default the packet s priority bit in the VLAN tag TCP UDP port number or DSCP priority bit Differentiated Services Code Point Service DSCP DSCP uses a six bit tag to provide for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding The DSCP bits are mapped to the Class of Service categories and then into the output queues Domain Name Service DNS A system used for translating host names for network nodes into IP addresses Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP IP network DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol BOOTP adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration options Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL EAPOL is a client authentication protocol used by this switch to verify the network ac
516. tling settings of the first port member in the trunk 4 214 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if ip igmp max group 10 Console config if ip igmp max groups action This command sets the IGMP throttling action for an interface on the switch Syntax ip igmp max groups action replace deny replace The new multicast group replaces an existing group e deny The new multicast group join report is dropped Default Setting Deny Command Mode Interface Configuration Command Usage When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port the switch can take one of two actions either deny or replace If the action is set to deny any new IGMP join reports will be dropped If the action is set to replace the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if ip igmp max group action replace Console config if show ip igmp filter This command displays the global and interface settings for IGMP filtering Syntax show ip igmp filter interface interface interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 29 e port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting None 4 215 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show i
517. to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL the switch will replace the old binding with the new one e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port Example Console config int eth 1 25 Console config if ip access group david in Console config if Related Commands show ip access list 4 93 show ip access group This command shows the ports assigned to IP ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip access group Interface ethernet 1 25 IP access list david in Console Related Commands ip access group 4 93 4 94 Access Control List Commands 4 MAC ACLs The commands in this section configure ACLs based on hardware addresses packet format and Ethernet type To configure MAC ACLs first create an access list containing the required permit or deny rules and then bind the access list to one or more ports Table 4 35 MAC ACL Commands Command Function Mode Page access list mac Creates a MAC ACL and enters configuration mode GC 4 95 permit deny Filters packets matching a specified source and MAC ACL 4 96 destination address packet format and Ethernet type show mac access list Displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs PE 4 97 mac access group Adds a port to a MAC ACL IC 4 98 show mac access group Shows port assignments for MAC ACLs PE 4 98 access list mac This command adds a MAC access list and enter
518. to configure the features listed in this manual The default configuration can be used for most of the features provided by this switch However there are many options that you should configure to maximize the switch s performance for your particular network environment Key Features Table 1 1 Key Features Feature Description Configuration Backup and Restore Backup to TFTP server Authentication Console Telnet web User name password RADIUS TACACS Web HTTPS Telnet SSH SNMP v1 2c Community strings SNMP version 3 MD5 or SHA password Port IEEE 802 1X MAC address filtering Access Control Lists Supports up to 128 ACLs 96 MAC rules and 96 rules per system DHCP Client Supported DHCP Snooping Supported with Option 82 relay information Port Configuration Speed duplex mode and flow control Rate Limiting Input rate and output limiting per port Port Mirroring One or more port mirrored to a single analysis port Port Trunking Supports up to 32 trunks using either static or dynamic trunking LACP Broadcast Storm Control Supported Static Address Up to 8K MAC addresses in the forwarding table IEEE 802 1D Bridge Supports dynamic data switching and addresses learning Store and Forward Switching Supported to ensure wire speed switching while eliminating bad frames Spanning Tree Algorithm Supports standard STP and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
519. tocol and IP as the network layer protocol Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP A TCP IP protocol commonly used for software downloads User Datagram Protocol UDP UDP provides a datagram mode for packet switched communications It uses IP as the underlying transport mechanism to provide access to IP like services UDP packets are delivered just like IP packets connection less datagrams that may be discarded before reaching their targets UDP is useful when TCP would be too complex too slow or just unnecessary Glossary 5 Glossary Virtual LAN VLAN A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network A VLAN serves as a logical workgroup with no physical barriers and allows users to share information and resources as though located on the same LAN XModem A protocol used to transfer files between devices Data is grouped in 128 byte blocks and error corrected Glossary 6 Index Numerics 802 1Q tunnel 3 133 4 176 description 3 133 interface configuration 3 138 4 177 4 178 mode selection 3 138 TPID 3 137 4 178 802 1X port authentication 3 60 3 67 A acceptable frame type 3 132 4 171 Access Control List See ACL ACL Extended IP 4 89 4 90 4 91 MAC 4 95 4 95 4 97 Standard IP 4 89 4 90 4 91 address table 3 99 4 140 aging time 3 102 4 143 B BOOTP 3 16 4 223 BPDU 3 103 broa
520. tocol eae Port pa Pest poten port Code Da Remove Address Mask Mask Mask Mask Mask Action Permit Source Address Type Any Source IP Address booo 80 Source Subnet Mask booo Destination Address Type Any Destination IP Address pooo Destination Subnet Mask paonon Service Type TOS 0 15 L Precedence 0 7 DSCP 0 63 fs 34 Protocol Gte Cupan Cotes Source Port 0 65535 o ce Port Bit Mask 0 6553 Destination Port 0 65535 oo Destination Port Bit Mask 0 65535 Control Code 0 63 O Control Code Bit Mask 0 63 oo mai le Figure 3 45 Configuring Extended IP ACLs CLI This example adds two rules 1 Accept any incoming packets if the source address is in subnet 10 7 1 x For example if the rule is matched i e the rule 10 7 1 0 amp 255 255 255 0 equals the masked address 10 7 1 2 amp 255 255 255 0 the packet passes through 2 Allow TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 to any destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 i e HTTP Console config ext acl permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any Console config ext acl permit tcp 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any destination port 80 Console config std acl 3 71 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring a MAC ACL Command Attributes Action An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules e Source Destination Address Type Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to indicate a
521. tomatically learned via GVRP Static Added as a static entry Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters Status Shows if this VLAN is enabled or disabled Active VLAN is operational Suspend VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets Ports Channel groups Shows the VLAN interface members 3 127 3 Configuring the Switch CLI Current VLAN information can be displayed with the following command Console show vlan id 1 4 175 Vlan ID I Type Static Name DefaultVlan Status Active Ports Port channel Ethi 1 S Ethi 2 S Eth1 3 S Ethl 4 S Eth1 5 8 Eth1 6 S Eth1 7 S Eth1 8 S Eth1 9 S Eth1 10 S Eth1 11 S Eth1 12 S Eth1 13 S Eth1 14 S Eth1l 15 S Eth1 16 S Eth1 17 S Eth1 18 S Eth1 19 S Eth1 20 S Eth1 21 S Eth1 22 S Eth1 23 S Eth1 24 S Eth1 25 S Eth1 26 S Console Creating VLANs Use the VLAN Static List to create or remove VLAN groups To propagate information about VLAN groups used on this switch to external network devices you must specify a VLAN ID for each of these groups Command Attributes e Current Lists all the current VLAN groups created for this system Up to 255 VLAN groups can be defined VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN e New Allows you to specify the name and numeric identifier for a new VLAN group The VLAN name is only used for management on this system it is not added to the VLAN tag e VLAN ID ID o
522. tomatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message To use port security specify a maximum number of addresses to allow on the port and then let the switch dynamically learn the lt source MAC address VLAN gt pair for frames received on the port Note that you can also manually add secure addresses to the port using the Static Address Table 3 99 When the port has reached the maximum number of MAC addresses the selected port will stop learning The MAC addresses already in the address table will be retained and will not age out Any other device that attempts to use the port will be prevented from accessing the switch Command Usage A secure port has the following restrictions It cannot use port monitoring It cannot be a multi VLAN port It cannot be used as a member of a static or dynamic trunk It should not be connected to a network interconnection device The default maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a secure port is Zero You must configure a maximum address count from 1 1024 for the port to allow access e Ifa port is disabled shut down due to a security violation it must be manually re enabled from the Port Port Configuration page 3 78 Command Attributes Port Port number Name Descriptive text 4 117 e Action Indicates the action to be taken when a port security violation is detected None No action should be taken This is the default Trap Send an
523. tor has write access for all parameters governing the onboard agent You should therefore assign a new administrator password as soon as possible and store it in a safe place The default guest name is guest with the password guest The default administrator name is admin with the password admin Command Attributes e Account List Displays the current list of user accounts and associated access levels Defaults admin and guest 3 46 User Authentication 3 New Account Displays configuration settings for a new account User Name The name of the user Maximum length 8 characters maximum number of users 16 Access Level Specifies the user level Options Normal and Privileged Password Specifies the user password Range 0 8 characters plain text case sensitive e Change Password Sets a new password for the specified user name Add Remove Adds or removes an account from the list Web Click Security User Accounts To configure a new user account specify a user name select the user s access level then enter a password and confirm it Click Add to save the new user account and add it to the Account List To change the password for a specific user enter the user name and new password confirm the password by entering it again then click Apply User Accounts Account List New Account User Name bob lt lt Add Access Level Normal gt Remove Password
524. ts 7 Seven data bits per character 8 Eight data bits per character Default Setting 8 data bits per character Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage The databits command can be used to mask the high bit on input from devices that generate 7 data bits with parity If parity is being generated specify 7 data bits per character If no parity is required specify 8 data bits per character Example To specify 7 data bits enter this command Console config line databits 7 Console config line Related Commands parity 4 16 parity This command defines the generation of a parity bit Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax parity none even odd no parity none No parity even Even parity odd Odd parity Default Setting No parity Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage Communication protocols provided by devices such as terminals and modems often require a specific parity bit setting 4 16 Line Commands 4 Example To specify no parity enter this command Console config line parity none Console config line speed This command sets the terminal line s baud rate This command sets both the transmit to terminal and receive from terminal speeds Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax speed bps no speed bps Baud rate in bits per second Options 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps Default Set
525. twork device For static trunks the switches have to comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard For dynamic trunks the switches have to comply with LACP This switch supports up to 32 trunks For example a trunk consisting of two 1000 Mbps ports can support an aggregate bandwidth of 4 Gbps when operating at full duplex Table 4 46 Link Aggregation Commands Command Function Mode Page Manual Configuration Commands interface port channel Configures a trunk and enters interface GC 4 116 configuration mode for the trunk channel group Adds a port to a trunk IC Ethernet 4 131 Dynamic Configuration Command lacp Configures LACP for the current interface IC Ethernet 4 132 lacp system priority Configures a port s LACP system priority IC Ethernet 4 133 lacp admin key Configures a port s administration key IC Ethernet 4 134 lacp admin key Configures an port channel s administration key IC Port Channel 4 135 lacp port priority Configures a port s LACP port priority IC Ethernet 4 136 Trunk Status Display Command show interfaces status Shows trunk information NE PE 4 123 port channel show lacp Shows LACP information PE 4 136 4 130 Link Aggregation Commands 4 Guidelines for Creating Trunks General Guidelines Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop A trunk can have up to eigh
526. type rsa RSA key type Default Setting Clears both the DSA and RSA key Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command clears the host key from volatile memory RAM Use the no ip ssh save host key command to clear the host key from flash memory e The SSH server must be disabled before you can execute this command Example Console ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa Console Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 38 ip ssh save host key 4 39 no ip ssh server 4 35 ip ssh save host key This command saves host key from RAM to flash memory Syntax ip ssh save host key dsa rsa e dsa DSA key type rsa RSA key type Default Setting Saves both the DSA and RSA key Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 39 4 Command Line Interface Example Console ip ssh save host key dsa Console Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 38 show ip ssh This command displays the connection settings used when authenticating client access to the SSH server Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip ssh SSH Enabled version 1 99 Negotiation timeout 120 secs Authentication retries 3 Server key size 768 bits Console show ssh This command displays the current SSH server connections Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ssh Connection Version State Username Encryption 0 2 0 Session Started admin
527. ult Syntax spanning tree transmission limit count no spanning tree transmission limit count The transmission limit in seconds Range 1 10 Default Setting 3 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command limits the maximum transmission rate for BPDUs Example Console config spanning tree transmission limit 4 Console config spanning tree mst configuration This command changes to Multiple Spanning Tree MST configuration mode Default Setting e No VLANs are mapped to any MST instance The region name is set the switch s MAC address Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config spanning tree mst configuration Console config mstp Related Commands mst vlan 4 151 mst priority 4 151 name 4 152 revision 4 153 max hops 4 153 4 150 Spanning Tree Commands 4 mst vlan This command adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance Use the no form to remove the specified VLANs Using the no form without any VLAN parameters to remove all VLANs Syntax no mst instance_id vlan vian range e instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 e vian range Range of VLANs Range 1 4094 Default Setting none Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage e Use this command to group VLANs into spanning tree instances MSTP generates a unique spanning tree for each instance This provides multiple pathways across
528. ult You can also manually add secure addresses with the mac address table static command A secure port has the following restrictions Cannot use port monitoring Cannot be a multi VLAN port Cannot be connected to a network interconnection device Cannot be a trunk port If a port is disabled due to a security violation it must be manually re enabled using the no shutdown command Example The following example enables port security for port 5 and sets the response to a security violation to issue a trap message Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if port security action trap Related Commands shutdown 4 121 mac address table static 4 140 show mac address table 4 141 4 80 Authentication Commands 4 802 1X Port Authentication The switch supports IEEE 802 1X dot1x port based access control that prevents unauthorized access to the network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication Client authentication is controlled centrally by a RADIUS server using EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol Table 4 32 802 1X Port Authentication Command Function Mode Page dot1x system auth control Enables dot1x globally on the switch GC 4 81 dot1x default Resets all dot1x parameters to their default values GC 4 82 dot1x max req Sets the maximum number of times that the switch IC 4 82 retransmits an EAP request identity
529. ult Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command shows the system and event messages stored in memory including the time stamp message level page 4 44 program module function and event number 4 48 System Management Commands 4 Example The following example shows sample messages stored in RAM Console show log ram 5 00 01 06 2001 01 0 STA root change notification level 6 module 6 function and event no 4 00 01 00 2001 01 00 STA root change notification level 6 module 6 function and event no 3 00 00 54 2001 01 0 STA root change notification level 6 module 6 function and event no 2 00 00 50 2001 01 00 STA topology change notification level 6 module 6 function and event no 1 00 00 48 2001 01 0 VLAN 1 link up notification level 6 module 6 function and event no Console SMTP Alert Commands These commands configure SMTP event handling and forwarding of alert messages to the specified SMTP servers and email recipients Table 4 21 SMTP Alert Commands Command Function Mode Page logging sendmail host SMTP servers to receive alert messages GC 4 49 logging sendmail level Severity threshold used to trigger alert messages GC 4 50 logging sendmail Email address used for From field of alert messages GC 4 51 source email logging sendmail Email recipients of alert mes
530. ult engine ID If the local engine ID is deleted or changed all SNMP users will be cleared You will need to reconfigure all existing users A new engine ID can be specified by entering 5 to 32 octets of hexadecimal characters that is 9 to 64 hexadecimal characters If an odd number of hexadecimal characters are specified a trailing zero is added to the value to fill the octet For example entering the value 123456789 results in an engine ID of 1234567890 Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Engine ID l a SNMPv3 Engine ID Engine ID 8301000003000035281 0030000 Default Save zj Figure 3 27 Setting an Engine ID CLI This example sets an SNMPv3 engine ID Console config snmp server engine id local 12345abcdef0 4 107 Console config exit Console show snmp engine id4 114 Local SNMP engineID 12345abcdef0 Local SNMP engineBoots 1 Console 3 36 Simple Network Management Protocol 3 Specifying a Remote Engine ID To send inform messages to an SNMPv3 user on a remote device you must first specify the engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where the user resides The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the authoritative agent For informs the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent You therefore need to configure the remo
531. ultview Write View defaultview Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active Console 4 112 SNMP Commands 4 Table 4 40 show snmp group display description Field Description groupname Name of an SNMP group security model The SNMP version readview The associated read view writeview The associated write view notifyview The associated notify view storage type The storage type for this entry Row Status The row status of this entry snmp server user This command adds a user to an SNMP group restricting the user to a specific SNMP Read Write or Notify View Use the no form to remove a user from an SNMP group Syntax snmp server user username groupname remote ip address v1 v2c v3 encrypted auth md5 sha auth password priv des56 priv password no snmp server user username v1 v2c v3 remote username Name of user connecting to the SNMP agent Range 1 32 characters groupname Name of an SNMP group to which the user is assigned Range 1 32 characters remote Specifies an SNMP engine on a remote device ip address The Internet address of the remote device v1 v2c v3 Use SNMP version 1 2c or 3 encrypted Accepts the password as encrypted input auth Uses SNMPv3 with authentication md5 sha Uses MD5 or SHA authentication auth password Authentication password Enter as plain text if the encrypted option is no
532. unction Mode Page class map Creates a class map for a type of traffic GC 4 194 match Defines the criteria used to classify traffic CM 4 194 policy map Creates a policy map for multiple interfaces GC 4 195 class Defines a traffic classification for the policy to act on PM 4 196 set Classifies IP traffic by setting a CoS DSCP or IP precedence PM C 4 197 value in a packet police Defines an enforcer for classified traffic PM C 4 198 service policy Applies a policy map defined by the policy map command to IC 4 199 the input of a particular interface show class map Displays the QoS class maps which define matching criteria PE 4 199 used for classifying traffic show policy map Displays the QoS policy maps which define classification PE 4 200 criteria for incoming traffic and may include policers for bandwidth limitations show policy map interface Displays the configuration of all classes configured for all PE 4 200 service policies on the specified interface To create a service policy for a specific category of ingress traffic follow these steps 1 Use the class map command to designate a class name for a specific category of traffic and enter the Class Map configuration mode 2 Use the match command to select a specify type of traffic based on an access list a DSCP or IP Precedence value or a VLAN 3 Set an ACL mask to enable filtering for the criteria specified in the match command 4 Use the
533. unnel tpid tpid no switchport dot1q tunnel tpid tpid Sets the ethertype value for 802 1Q encapsulation This identifier is used to select a nonstandard 2 byte ethertype to identify 802 1Q tagged frames The standard ethertype value is 0x8100 Range 0800 FFFF hexadecimal Default Setting 0x8100 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Use the switchport dot1q tunnel tpid command to set a custom 802 1Q ethertype value on the selected interface This feature allows the switch to interoperate with third party switches that do not use the standard 0x8100 ethertype to identify 802 1Q tagged frames For example 0x1234 is set as the custom 802 1Q ethertype on a trunk port incoming frames containing that ethertype are assigned to the VLAN contained in the tag following the ethertype field as they would be with a standard 802 1Q trunk Frames arriving on the port containing any other ethertype are looked upon as untagged frames and assigned to the native VLAN of that port All ports on the switch will be set to the same ethertype Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport dotlq tunnel tpid 9100 Console config if Related Commands show interfaces switchport 4 125 show dot1q tunnel This command displays information about QinQ tunnel ports Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 178 Example VLAN Commands 4 Console he dot
534. up page define a name assign a security model and level and then select read and write views Click Add to save the new group and return to the Groups list To delete a group check the box next to the group name then click Delete SNMPv3 Groups New Delete Group Name Model Level Read View Write View Notify View F public V1 noAuthNoPriv defaultview none none F public V2C noAuthNoPriv defaultviewi none none r 1 noAuthNoPriy defaultview defaultview none r V2 noAuthNoPriv defaultview defaultview none SNMPv3 Groups New Group Properties Group Name Security Level 7 SNMP v3 Views Read View C deteultview Wnte View C detaultview Notify View C detaultview gt Bock Ada Figure 3 31 Configuring SNMPv3 Groups CLI Use the snmp server group command to configure a new group specifying the security model and level and restricting MIB access to defined read and write views Console config snmp server group secure users v3 priv read defaultview write defaultview notify defaultview4 116 Console config exit Console show snmp group4 118 Group Name secure users Security Model v3 Read View defaultview Write View defaultview Notify View defaultview Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status activeConsole 3 44 Simple Network Management Protocol 3 Setting SNMPv3 Views SNMPv3 views are used to restrict user access to specified portions of th
535. uration Select a profile to assign to an interface then set the throttling number and action Click Apply IGMP Filter and Throttling Port Configuration pr retin SaaS COARSE ran 1 none v 256 0 deny m False 2 none x 256 0 deny False 3 none x 256 0 deny pi False 4 none x 256 0 deny x False 5 none x 256 0 deny x False 6 none x 256 0 deny x False 7 none y 256 0 deny x False 8 none x 256 0 deny m False 9 none x 256 0 deny x False Figure 3 104 IGMP Filter and Throttling Port Configuration CLI This example assigns IGMP profile number 19 to port 1 and then sets the throttling number and action The current IGMP filtering and throttling settings for the interface are then displayed Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if ip igmp filter 19 4 223 Console config if ip igmp max groups 10 4 224 Console config if ip igmp max groups action replace 4 225 Console config if end Console show ip igmp filter interface ethernet 1 1 4 225 Information of Eth 1 1 IGMP Profile 19 deny range 239 1511 2391 17 range 239 2 3 1 239 2 3 100 Console show ip igmp throttle interface ethernet 1 1 4 226 Information of Eth 1 1 status FALSE action replace max multicast groups 10 current multicast groups 1 Console Configuring IGMP Filter Profiles When you have created an IGMP profile number you can then configure
536. uring the Switch e Level The security level used for the user noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications This is the default for SNMPv3 AuthNoPriv SNMP communications use authentication but the data is not encrypted only available for the SNMPv3 security model AuthPriv SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption only available for the SNMPv3 security model e Authentication The method used for user authentication Options MD5 SHA Default MD5 Authentication Password A minimum of eight plain text characters is required e Privacy The encryption algorithm use for data privacy only 56 bit DES is currently available Actions Enables the user to be assigned to another SNMPv3 group 3 38 Simple Network Management Protocol 3 Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Users Click New to configure a user name In the New User page define a name and assign it to a group then click Add to save the configuration and return to the User Name list To delete a user check the box next to the user name then click Delete To change the assigned group of a user click Change Group in the Actions column of the users table and select the new group SNMPv3 Users New Delete ser Name Group Name Model Level Authentication Privancy Actions F Matt public V1 noAuthNoPriv None None Change Group SNMPv3 Users New SNMPV3 User User Na
537. us Interface status information switchport Interface switchport information Console show interfaces Entering Commands 4 Partial Keyword Lookup If you terminate a partial keyword with a question mark alternatives that match the initial letters are provided Remember not to leave a space between the command and question mark For example s shows all the keywords starting with s Console show s snmp sntp spanning tree ssh startup config system Console show s Negating the Effect of Commands For many configuration commands you can enter the prefix keyword no to cancel the effect of a command or reset the configuration to the default value For example the logging command will log system messages to a host server To disable logging specify the no logging command This guide describes the negation effect for all applicable commands Using Command History The CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered You can scroll back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow key Any command displayed in the history list can be executed again or first modified and then executed Using the show history command displays a longer list of recently executed commands Understanding Command Modes The command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes Exec commands generally display information on system status or clear statistical counters Configuration commands on the
538. use HTTPS for a secure connection see ip http secure server on page 4 30 4 65 4 Command Line Interface Example The following example shows how to upload the configuration settings to a file on the TFTP server Console copy file tftp Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode lt 1 2 gt 1 Source file name startup TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 99 Destination file name startup 01 TFTP completed Success Console The following example shows how to copy the running configuration to a startup file Console copy running config file destination file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console The following example shows how to download a configuration file Console copy tftp startup config TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 99 Source configuration file name startup 01 Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console This example shows how to copy a secure site certificate from an TFTP server It then reboots the switch to activate the certificate Console copy tftp https certificate TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 19 Source certificate file name SS certificate Source private file name SS private Private password x x Success Console reload System will be restarted continue lt y n gt y 4 66 Flash File Commands 4 This example shows how to
539. used to support real time Z N Unicast applications such as videoconferencing or N j Flow streaming audio A multicast server does not have 5 to establish a separate connection with each client It merely broadcasts its service to the network and any hosts that want to receive the multicast register with their local multicast switch router Although this approach reduces the 7 network overhead required by a multicast server the broadcast traffic must be carefully pruned at every multicast switch router it passes through to a ensure that traffic is only passed on to the hosts a which subscribed to this service ay S This switch uses IGMP Internet Group j Management Protocol to query for any attached j A oon a As hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service It identifies the ports containing hosts requesting to join the service and sends data out to those ports only It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service This procedure is called multicast filtering The purpose of IP multicast filtering is to optimize a switched network s performance so multicast packets will only be forwarded to those ports containing multicast group hosts or multicast routers switches instead of flooding traffic to all ports in the subnet VLAN Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Query IGMP Snooping and Query If mu
540. vlan 1 192 168 0 99 interface ethernet 1 5 4 229 Console config Dynamic IP Source Guard Binding Information Displays the source guard binding table for a selected interface Command Attributes Query by Select an interface to display the source guard binding Options Port VLAN MAC Address or IP Address Dynamic Binding Table Counts Displays the number of IP addresses in the source guard binding table Current Dynamic Binding Table Displays the IP addresses in the source guard binding table 3 193 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click IP Source Guard Dynamic Information Dynamic IP Source Guard Binding Information Query by Port VLAN MAC Address IP Address Dynamic IP Source Guard Binding Table Dynamic Binding Table Counts none Current Dynamic Binding Table Figure 3 121 Dynamic IP Source Guard Binding Information CLI This example shows how to configure a static source guard binding on port 5 Console show ip source guard binding 4 230 MacAddress IpAddress Lease sec Type VLAN Interface 11 22 33 44 55 66 192 168 0 99 0 Static 1 Eth 1 5 Console Switch Clustering Switch Clustering is a method of grouping switches together to enable centralized management through a single unit Switches that support clustering can be grouped together regardless of physical location or switch type as long as they are connected to the
541. witch To configure a trap receiver use the snmp server host command From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type snmp server host host address community string version 1 2c 3 auth noauth priv where host address is the IP address for the trap receiver community string specifies access rights for a version 1 2c host or is the user name of a version 3 host version indicates the SNMP client version and auth noauth priv means that authentication no authentication or authentication and privacy is used for v3 clients Then press lt Enter gt For a more detailed description of these parameters see snmp server host on page 4 104 The following example creates a trap host for each type of SNMP client Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 23 batman4 104 Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 98 robin version 2c Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 34 barbie version 3 auth Console config 2 Initial Configuration Configuring Access for SNMP Version 3 Clients To configure management access for SNMPv3 clients you need to first create a view that defines the portions of MIB that the client can read or write assign the view to a group and then assign the user to a group The following example creates one view called mib 2 that includes the entire MIB 2 tree branch and then another view that includes the IEEE 802 1d bridge MI
542. witch supports the following VLAN features Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard e Distributed VLAN learning across multiple switches using explicit or implicit tagging and GVRP protocol Port overlapping allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs End stations can belong to multiple VLANs Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unaware devices e Priority tagging Assigning Ports to VLANs Before enabling VLANs for the switch you must first assign each port to the VLAN group s in which it will participate By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then assign ports on the other VLAN aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN s either manually or dynamically using GVRP However if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port Note VLAN tagged frames can pass through VLAN aware or VLAN unaware network interconnection devices but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end node host that does not support VLAN tagging VA VA VA VLAN Aware VU V
543. ws the response to take when a security violation is detected shutdown trap trap and shutdown or none Current Status Link Status Indicates if the link is up or down Port Operation Status Provides detailed information on port state Displayed only when the link is up Operation speed duplex Shows the current speed and duplex mode Flow control type Indicates the type of flow control currently in use IEEE 802 3x Back Pressure or none CLI This example shows the connection status for Port 5 Console show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 4 123 Information of Eth 1 5 Basic information Port type 100TX Mac address 00 12 CF 12 34 61 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full Broadcast storm Enabled Broadcast storm limit 500 packets second Flow control Disabled Lacp Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Port security action None Current status Link status Down Operation speed duplex 100full Flow control type None Console Configuring Interface Connections You can use the Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration page to enable disable an interface set auto negotiation and the interface capabilities to advertise or manually fix the speed duplex mode and flow control Command Attributes Name Allows you to label an interface Range 1 64 characters Admin Allows you to manually disable an interfa
544. xample Console config logging on Console config Related Commands logging history 4 44 clear logging 4 46 4 43 4 Command Line Interface logging history This command limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on severity The no form returns the logging of syslog messages to the default level Syntax logging history flash ram evel no logging history flash ram flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset level One of the levels listed below Messages sent include the selected level down to level 0 Range 0 7 Table 4 18 Logging Levels Level Severity Name Description 7 debugging Debugging messages 6 informational Informational messages only 5 notifications Normal but significant condition such as cold start 4 warnings Warning conditions e g return false unexpected return 3 errors Error conditions e g invalid input default used 2 critical Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted 1 alerts Immediate action needed 0 emergencies System unusable There are only Level 2 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release Default Setting Flash errors level 3 0 RAM warnings level 6 0 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The message lev
545. y Isolated Primary Default Setting Shows all VLANs Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example The following example shows how to display information for VLAN 1 Console show vlan id 1 Vian ID 1 Type Static Name DefaultVlan Status Active Ports Port channel Eth1 1 S Ethl 2 S Ethl 3 S Ethl 4 S Eth1 5 S Ethi 6 S Eth1 7 S Ethi 8 S Ethl 9 S Eth1 10 S Eth1 11 S Eth1 12 S Eth1 13 S Eth1 14 S Eth1 15 Ss Eth1 16 S Ethi 17 S Eth1 18 S Eth1 19 S Eth1 20 S Eth1 21 S Ethi1 22 S Eth1 23 S Eth1 24 S Eth1 25 S Eth1 26 S Console 4 175 4 Command Line Interface Configuring IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling IEEE 802 1Q tunneling QinQ tunneling uses a single Service Provider VLAN SPVLAN for customers who have multiple VLANs Customer VLAN IDs are preserved and traffic from different customers is segregated within the service provider s network even when they use the same customer specific VLAN IDs QinQ tunneling expands VLAN space by using a VLAN in VLAN hierarchy preserving the customer s original tagged packets and adding SPVLAN tags to each frame also called double tagging This section describes commands used to configure QinQ tunneling Table 4 58 IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling Commands Command Function Mode Page dottq tunnel Configures the switch to operate in normal mode or QinQ GC 4 176 system tunnel control mode switchport dottq tunnel Configures an
546. y supports EAPOL in order to pass the EAP packets from the server to the client e The RADIUS server and client also have to support the same EAP authentication type MD5 Some clients have native support in Windows otherwise the dot1x client must support it Displaying 802 1X Global Settings The 802 1X protocol provides client authentication Command Attributes 802 1X System Authentication Control The global setting for 802 1X 3 61 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Security 802 1X Information 802 1X Information 802 1X System Authentication Control Disabled Figure 3 39 802 1X Global Information CLI This example shows the default global setting for 802 1X Console show dot1x 4 86 Global 802 1X Parameters system auth control enable 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized 1 1 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 1 2 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is disabled on port 1 1 802 1X is disabled on port 1 26 Console Configuring 802 1X Global Settings The 802 1X protocol provides port authentication The 802 1X protocol must be enabled globally for the switch system before port settings are active Command Attributes 802 1X System Authentication Control Sets the global setting for 802 1X Default Disabled Web Select Security 802 1X Configuration Enable 802 1X globally for the switch and click
547. yE fbobMJZi 8 oGCstSNOxrZZVnMqwrTYfdrKx7YKBw Kjw6Bm iFq70 jAhf1Dg451lo0Ac27s6TLdtny1lwRq ow2eTCD5nekAAACBAJ8 rMccXTXHLFAczWS7EjOy Dbs loBfPuSAb4 0AsyjKXKVYNLOKTLZ cFRu41bS2KV5LAwecs igF DjKGWtPNIQqabKgYCw2 o dVzX4Gg yqdTlYmGA7 fHGm8ARGeiG4ssFKy4Z6DmYPXFuml Yg0 fhLwuHpOSKdxT3kk475S7 wOW Console 4 42 System Management Commands 4 Event Logging Commands Table 4 17 Event Logging Commands Command Function Mode Page logging on Controls logging of error messages GC 4 43 logging history Limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on GC 4 44 severity logging host Adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging GC 4 45 messages logging facility Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages GC 4 45 logging trap Limits syslog messages saved to a remote server based on GC 4 46 severity clear logging Clears messages from the logging buffer PE 4 46 show logging Displays the state of logging PE 4 47 show log Displays log messages PE 4 48 logging on This command controls logging of error messages sending debug or error messages to switch memory The no form disables the logging process Syntax no logging on Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The logging process controls error messages saved to switch memory You can use the logging history command to control the type of error messages that are stored E
548. yntax ip source guard sip sip mac no ip source guard sip Filters traffic based on IP addresses stored in the binding table sip mac Filters traffic based on IP addresses and corresponding MAC addresses stored in the binding table Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage 4 228 Source guard is used to filter traffic on an unsecure port which receives messages from outside the network or firewall and therefore may be subject to traffic attacks caused by a host trying to use the IP address of a neighbor Setting source guard mode to sip or sip mac enables this function on the selected port Use the sip option to check the VLAN ID source IP address and port number against all entries in the binding table Use the sip mac option to check these same parameters plus the source MAC address Use the no source guard command to disable this function on the selected port When enabled traffic is filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping static entries configured in the DHCP snooping table or static addresses configured in the source guard binding table Table entries include a MAC address IP address lease time entry type Static IP SG Binding Dynamic DHCP Binding Static DHCP Binding VLAN identifier and port identifier Static addresses entered in the source guard binding table with the ip source guard binding command
549. ype Choose either Ethernet RFC 1042 or LLC Other as the frame type used by this protocol 3 142 Configuring IEEE 802 1 Tunneling lt 3 Protocol Type The only option for the LLC Other frame type is IPX Raw The options for all other frames types include IP ARP or RARP Web Click VLAN Protocol VLAN Configuration Protocol VLAN Configuration Current New ait Protocol Gruop ID 1 2147483647 lt lt Add r Frame Type Ethernet x Enem y Protocol Type IP x Figure 3 82 Protocol VLAN Configuration Configuring Protocol VLAN Interfaces Use the Protocol VLAN Port Configuration menu to set the protocol VLAN settings per port Command Attributes Interface Port or Trunk indentifier e Protocol Group ID Protocol Group ID assigned to the Protocol VLAN Group Range 1 2147483647 e VLAN ID VLAN to which matching protocol traffic is forwarded Range 1 4094 Web Click VLAN Protocol VLAN Port Configuration Protocol VLAN Port Configuration Interface Port e1 x OTrunk ix Current New none lt lt Add Protocol Group ID 1 2147483647 VLAN ID 1 4094 Figure 3 83 Protocol VLAN Port Configuration 3 143 3 Configuring the Switch Class of Service Configuration Class of Service CoS allows you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion This switch supp
550. ystem Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Netscape Navigator 6 2 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Solaris 2 6 e To specify a secure site certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 53 Also refer to the copy command on page 4 64 Example Console config ip http secure server Console config Related Commands ip http secure port 4 31 copy tftp https certificate 4 64 ip http secure port This command specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS connection to the switch s web interface Use the no form to restore the default port Syntax ip http secure port port_number no ip http secure port port_number The UDP port used for HTTPS Range 1 65535 Default Setting 443 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same port 4 31 4 Command Line Interface e If you change the HTTPS port number clients attempting to connect to the HTTPS server must specify the port number in the URL in this format https device port_number Example Console config ip http secure port 1000 Console config Related Commands ip http secure server 4 30 Telnet Server Commands Table 4 14 Telnet Server Commands Command Function Mode Page ip telnet

SMC SMC8150L2 UK network switch

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents